Mazak Mazatrol Matrix Control Classroom Maintneance Manual C740MT0201E PDF

MAZATROL
MATRIX
CLASS ROOM
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Mazak
Digital M§JTUf@PMtOg Solutions
IN
ONE
MATRIX Sale points
'0? i
lifiM ...
$ . t4 f* n*j|*c»*
/: ..4
; : display
|e
7 mctions.
'
M jySgQyyj~T- vC 11
-
I 1
,
&2AWOX
s==
i
muJ1 l-
A
-
M
J
g0'ÿ3Spic5Sgv';; .;S313i 1
-'- 4;
I.-'-'1' ‘
" M
|g||
{ ;/•lÿ
•
*
. •
•ÿ-ÿ•ÿ:= •ÿ••ÿÿ » . ‘-vV> V- -.1

a
mi
:~ olwj *. It Iflj1 G3i f 1 :'•'<
f v;1:1:1;1:1:1:1;1.!
a -l~f *
TTI j
! * I < f * I * I * J *fll‘3 I-I-~I11§2* £»,’ <?«ÿ 1& mMm
>ÿÿ'1 - 1 1*. IT
1
jTBil I j
I m
M
[’-T’TT
W
1
2
NC type MATRIX
:.S INTE-M-INTE-eHU INTE-DI •INTE-e
_ _
machine
Variaxis II -INTE-eVll
display
15" TFT 12. 1 "TFT
(XGA) (SVGA)
PC
CPU
NC
_ Pentium in
1,26GHz
6 4 bit RISC
Geode
300MHz
6 4 bit RISC
m
>1
V.'-v.
CPU Dual CPU Single CPU
PLC No. of steps: 128k No. of steps :64k
capability process time: 16.6ns process time: 160ns
Servo MDS-DH series MDS-CH series
AMP cycle time :11 M S cycle time: 55 MS
servo 3000/ 4000 r.p.m
2000/3000 r.p.m
motor (depend on motor)
encoder
capability
16,000,000 ppr 1,000,000 ppr
PC Windows 2000
Windows XP
OS type (Windows 95)
Ergonomically Designed Control Pane
1. Large display
(15inch)
n
1 '1
Hi1$
i I
: I
> LvJ
\i
2. "QWERTY" key 1 e. i
:
6. Key layout by
,* < :r • ,
h function
:
3, Acrylic key top j - .1 i 1 -VI I - •

i
for easy click II 7. Same design for all
machines
4. Rotary override
switches
- dm A
8. Tactile feel switches K
*
-‘L .. Y;
:f
CM
i T i1
- allow an operator §
M
5. Operation I * 3 to detect by feel
switches in
operator side
"
-—~ ril
3
4
The equipment of a USB interface as standard has facilitated data upload/download and connection to peripheral equipments
that support IJSB.
In addition, large volumes of data can be transferred at high speed between networks with the 100BASE-TX compliant
LAN and that realizes seamless communications between an office and a machine in a factory.
Interface Connected to Standard

USB 'Front / 3ch USB 1.1
Ethernet
|
iBack / lch
! 11 00BASE-TX/1OBASE-T
jPC Card Standard 95/97 compliant (CardBus)
iPC card iBack / 2 slots -PC Card Standard compliant (PCMCIA_V2. 1, JEIDA_4.2 compliant)
j 2 slots Type I/U ma x 2, Type IE: 1
r
EC card Front / 1 slot jPC Card Standard ATA compliant memory card only
: 1 slot Type I/E (Type IE cannot be used.)
'ÿ#15/#
[ MATRIX
r
1
use x 1
i"\
l IC Card x 1 k
RSS
r«3
U.I-2S6
;
*ÿ
in 1 i
r i
*33 £7
‘-;‘T:
o
5« j T > lij
!
II
ttrr 100BASE-T 1/F ..r
wmr§ & ;B; PC Card x 2
mMml |
$»&&
9MR:
(Back Side) ifir
m f«IÿS
i mm i
1 m mm
*** MmK 4m l
•: i- m m '#
.
;: i;
POO m lfÿ jg|
TS, I iÿM|||f#i|
.
m .** »*;»; :.
|»J
.:/ÿ i USB x 2
§ is??
»
Rear side of part surrounded
with the yellow frame
PC Card
*11111
safe-
T
i
:‘;
ai
I
&
J* L i Yi
JR" M9ll!R|p?4
g§
ML
«
I
: !;
’ 1Hfl 1 i
v-;ÿ3 R
Si iHH
IS® -
r Hr H
iT: r
_
mpr* *
I [pgwÿ,h
imp
!M mm
r
pii
i X
MT
m 1 f*
IF IT
01
..
a
s' -
*, , 7
- -•
C;« J ..
m-V'.1
«
|
U
ill. T: 1
UN
5
6
Decrease printed circuit boards of NO unit

Reliability up because decreasing interfeces between each boards
..
WP
mm
as M640MP r o 1 3 boards MATRIX 5 boards
yp«!sfJ
; m
sSIg
I % B
MP
/
. "
1
: , a
m i
& i-
’; ;
I
1J
.a';
* I i
M 111
. Decrease start-up time in cold climates because of equipment hard disk which
is used as car navigation
V-
£
item M640 MATRTIX
$
Operation temperature 5-55 °C 0-55 °C
| 0°C NC start-up time About 22 min utes About 2 minutes
In addition to the existing work simulation for checking programs, the machine simulation has been added to check the
processing programs including a machine interference using fine 3D models of such as the machine, a workpiece and a tool.
1) Tins function will prevent a machine interference or collision before actual processing.
2) Both of Mazatrol and EIA/ISO programs can perform a simulation.

* The EIA/ISO program cannot perform a work simulation of the 5-axis (4-axis) simultaneous machining.
:t:
The EIA/ISO program cannot perform a work simulation of the mold machining using the micro segment program
3) This function simulates the machine real with 3D models of the machine and equipped tools. (The machine will be
delivered with the 3D models set.)
4) A simulation can be run in the background.
Work simulation Machine simulation

I SB
-
1W ; *K». PM1
f } 1 i :-W- * 3.«•
.
: x'- 1 j l mu. i
; '
*.«*:*» r*.«s*
-fi¬
-I*#*.. MW
fwifcfc
y m
a.l
" •
I
I -iK.Jt
*tl !
ii
1.*,
34.1.
i ;
I ;
tr
4 .
i 7 S'
flip J
HMVtXXXK JM1
Wmm **i##,*lli* if; *
ii i If
II
*-ÿ.
<C*M
i
* it'
**>. j :
II
;;
II
r SiktlSPI
11
»is*
&3<w*«a»ga<iicsBS»i
m
—.......
mi i n__ *
*
NHM MW MMP WWBB I
W& i
AO ?> **/»)«
"'t I'
; •« S««V.AT . WBJJEfcJAJ,- mmm «f«« tilm#wi WMTSias; aw# • feiffAfSii*
<K#9 i mm arrcir MKSW wA«ir § • Bras*;:; ; iwwrt1 i Base **»« \
7
8
The intelligent safety shield function prevents an interference or a collision due to an operational error during the manual
operation.
1) During the manual operation, the ganged operation of the actural machine and the 3D model simulation can check the
processing status and stop the machine before an interference or a collision ocurs.
2) Checking with 3D models will prevent an interference on a part where an operator cannot see directly.
3) The integration of the actual machine and 3D models simulates the machine movement exactly.
4) The machine can be set up quickly because there is no need to worry about an interference or a collision.
Actual Machine 3D Models

mm
m
m ! i
R I
* m
f
1
'
I
**-ÿ
"X, >
** mm
M m
1 4 i 5
I;,:-'.
i
-
;
'i
tl fil
IU ,..il
h
M
\
m m IS
m .
.1 !
- Hfen
• i
• !i I
i 'A1,
- 4
; i
’ LX
> :1
1
4 & f flllllg I« :
i
i-,
I
I Iflll
"
I
-i Sts
li.;
r .
111
rp _ + r1 ? <r 4- Tr
r* i
fcjMJ li
[Intelligent Thermal Slueld]
Outline
The traditional thermal displacement compensation function has performed the compensation considering that the thermal
deformation of the machine was proportional to the temperature. Using this method, the thermal displacement could be
compensated with the high accuracy in the steady state. However, just after the spindle speed was changed, it could not
be compensated properly because the constants did not match between the times when the thermal displacement and the
measured temperature changed.
The thermal displacement compensation software (MazakTdc) estimates and compensates the thermal deformation of the
machine based on the spindle speed and the temperature. And it monitors the spindle speed and compensates the thermal
displacement according to the speed; therefore, it can compensate it properly even in the transient state.
9
10
The MAZAK voice adviser is the audio messages by MATRIX itself with the speaker embedded in CNC of MATRIX,
notifying the safety confirmation, the contents of the operation during the set up of the machine and others. It is greatly
effective in preventing a mistake due to the lack of attention during every working process.
1)14 languages (As for some old Eastern European countries, please use English or a neighboring country's language.)
& The MAZAK voice adviser has 52 messages such as greetings and notifications at the machine set-up, when starting the
automatic operation, during the automatic operation or during the maintenance work.
M
Good morning. Today is <dayofweek> <rnonth> <day>"
."Tins is manual operation at 10 times the feedrate."
'"The B-axis is selected. Pay attention for any turret interference."
|"Tool length measurement for a tool has not been completed."
|"Machine has stopped because optional stop is effective."
|"Add spindle lubricant." and other messages.
:
I :
:
» Internal speaker
<****?• vg*T-
S m
m
© mmm
MI
1 11 ili
r? *
s
.. -j
'MM
ii k.
iii
V.
i H HI
: m
i~~ I
f -i-nri *.
— 'w'”'
mm mm
. I
fBiiipimm
——
»
&»&&*»***
&
fifed*mmmmmmmmmmmmm mmm
mmm
i
I r~m mmmmmmmmmmm mmmm 8
\m mmmmmmmmmmmmmm mmma m
MR
The Mazatrol program has made it possible to control the upper turret with the 1st spindle and the lower turret with the 2nd
spindle simultaneously.
1st and 2nd process simultaneous cutting

1 1
rlFs y[i
Hi*]
31
rill 31
31
a
# 31 7
SfijHS
fjl 31
31
1B5B31
31
31 j] t][r]
Processing which used two programs (HEAD -1,HEAD -2) like Multiplex cannot be performed in INTE MATRIX senes.
... „ ,
Simultaneous cutting at unrelated work pieces
mm
Work No.1 I Work No. 10
11
12
1, Alarm history
1) A history of 10,000 alarms can be saved. (48 alarms in case ofM640)
2) Tire data is saved in the text format. Therefore, it is useful for gathering the alarm information.
[ C:\MC_s dgWarm\Alarm. bet]
3) It is possible to register 48 alarms that are not saved in the history file, such as Alarm No. 128 "OUTSIDE
INTERLOCK AXIS," which occurs frequently.
4) The alarm number has been increased 4 digits due to the addition of new functions.
:
*•* fXAftm ms i i »* zttt
3*8 *•* i'X*i w« » I »# It S 24 fctttlS'tw
»K* itw J*N *##* Bttf 1A..W a «m.tf ISB
1*W It**!. re*- *.#»t Vr U *»' .¥
3*8 4M« MM fc*f Mrs- IfSJStvM MMJ i* la s* s mm
2SS *5 tOM. IKrf (M| I* sa s* t
S* *:» *•, Am",
»** *ÿ» »«X« K«Wi«MMKin< 1*01 ISM i». * so ?;* "m&Ktxt
US* S'MMW'IK* ISMS. JO:
a OKMKMWf 9 m **
I jHtoNMr: »**» I# S3 **
*V M ssÿsssS
ass
V*
If *
«
&<« *«. .
TOW
t-SIM
!
,-.
i»»* mm
318
mt* in
8OTW
a** HAS KM *ÿ**>:
;
>
t ** i if
VK
*
*
»-
if 1 S3 ** %tx*m
if *.'ÿ 3 t* vm*w
3* i?
it m'MWM'
»».
<88 ttfjunftMfc »»*»<* ****** '*.ÿ** S» t*
SUSIMS. wsmtt;* CJM*ur o. ss* s* *» IOTWI
*«* SUI&U, tH&ttl,* ttmwr *ÿ ai *» ka erwtase
W * »•» *.*
SO ItWMB •»**»»»*. «.#*ÿ** »»
*» »«
I 2*« me MH SU«*i «1#*0* KW-* .

a*s *f<x MM
3*« if r«ra«.b»i.f
t»A«a* saw. » >*.
*
iJM*
s* ,n
t» »
wW'Sentb.
•>
:
m
.
SS di'lr' *+ II «« ?*'
sat**;-#:*!
| **'
mmOs
I :
ww»-
tllte II I
-I
i, . Running Management Display
1) The running management data for 12 months can be displayed.

2) The use status of spindles and the alarm information can be checked each day.
Use status of spindles (speed and load) ! Alarm information

e
<ÿ>«*. n iw *wwtw» £3 *»T W 9 9kn.£rtm m H Bsm? »*»#?««*ÿ||tssum' Li *>T **
wt sn **
«8 :
* rmi ! n tx <S '
feJfS «S;*»
*3H» «>< t>S»
**
•xt jsiitxa BeiSa&ai mm 3SrtSM*.*fi£ i’W*
&«**«* s s'M? ammwm f*** 'ÿuta ws.nt»»
m\ VMMK *emt *K***«SM: .{«;*» T».» »* ><0 -
•ÿ
B9-: M -
*»•: « H«#
'
«*.:#* *?
HMtf-J X Sfrft <ÿ<) ».»» !ÿ : AW* {.-V

*«i in; is **•%* jtWKJUss*
»ÿ*>*ÿ
»*»
K':i Sti • *«•ME *'I- «* •H fcS I* «•» 36:

**
*/ S
H ?<t ¥3
MEM I
:'l
£vrt*>» > •
AM. U
* #ÿ£•«. w«a- t «•**«; i kwaiK « «***• •* mm. »: *»*<*• xwrnm? «»«
S UM*» S > y KW4 1 <•*» <<:*»• s >*«*.» % u<m * «*«*> 1
i .V;«x5scsssssxd ssssKSÿsxJssissxsx; ;si! iSSSKSSSSXK JL JXXSXSSS KSSXKSSXSX:
13
14
3. DIAGNOSIS MONITOR Display
The data of TO MONITOR DISP" are always displayed in both "SHORT" and "LONG." Also, one block of
data for "MEMORY MONITOR DISP" and two blocks of data for "I/O MONITOR DISP" have been
increased.
4. FLC SIGNAL Display
The addresses of a device corresponding to each "TITLE" are displayed.
5. HARDWARE MONITOR Display
The contents of the display will be altered due to the hardware change.
6. VERSION Display
The ladder version for the virtual machining is displayed.
UNIT
ITEM VERSION
MAIN-21 1001W000-A*W0
MAIN-B 1001W001-A*W0
LG-ENG 1001W011-AXW0
LADDER-F 100 1W5 6 8 - AO 016
LADDER- B 10 0 1W568-A0 0 IB:
LGP
7. SERVO MONITOR & SPINDLE MONITOR Displays
Tire servo data is displayed on the "SPINDLE MONITOR" display, as the spindle has become servo type.
8. Start of Application Software from Mazatrol Menu
Application softwares can be started from the Mazatrol menu by editing a text file for a menu, (e.g.:
C:\MC__s dg\CustomMenu\CustomMenu. txt)
9, Standard Installation of Print Screen Software on NC
A file can be saved in either of the TNG" and “BMP" formats.
IS Print Screen 3
:
& SAVE
Active Print Screen & SAVE
10, Operation Log & Operation Player Softwares (M740Eye.exe & M740Player.exe)
In case that a low reproducible trouble occurs during a complicated operation, it can be replicated by repeating
15
the operation using the operation log and operation player softwares, winch have been installed on NC as a
standard specification.
16
17
18
Control Overview
Control unit
FCU7-MA513-22 MI-P12-M2 board
HN011 card
HN102 card
\
HN123 card
HN163 card
HN482 card
HN531card .«*ÿ
[%,
MI-P12-M2 : Board PC unit
HN011 : Relay card
N
HN102 :PLC engine card
HN123 : Sub-CPU card
IK HN163 : NC base card
HN482 : Memory card
(FLROM/SRAIVI)
HN531 -.Axis extension I/F
19
and CardBus slot

20
Back Side of Matrix

‘ (jBWi •••;ÿVT**':C
m Mi ail
!
P i«x-# M
Wwmm . M m
s’
i i -
i
i
PUK : IS85
M$M
v.t? 0 I
2 Backlights !
jwWMNggg*-. IU.MIIHW ill
m
im
’ÿ
SB wm
pl*l*
M.-mm
m
it
'MM! Efc
:-' &
V
US -I
r'-;:
!
r %..
— |ÿ#S •ir -V
V
L..._ÿiÿaaiiiSjÿH mm -‘.’l
.•
y,
:
(EffiiSiK
m
—
:-i '
‘
i'i '4*
~w- -M 1RS?
m
I
mn ms
$3#
wimmm w (S
S I;;'.
»ÿ
rÿS
“.gÿ— e-
T; kjtCi'i:.-:
'*:r.OT iiMMHI
|
K? \
Right Side of Back
mf
1: ••':5
Rotary 2 settings m
Battery Plug
1 = Pic Stop
C = Initialize r<;ii
- S m.
;
4J1S1
i - id
i 2 Usb 1.1 Plugs
c:
a
lw
m:wsl
*
"TJ
!V
i la L: § Two Leds Display
r Right side is like Fusion
—
5 •- MBm E
i, Left will be always 1 .
r
m
; I
* 3
m w
iv.
ri1
- Rotary Switch 1
Always = 0.
I in
‘ A I i 1
i«S s?«
%
i
§
Rotary Switch 2
i
r Like M640.
Pf -•k
y
- si.
H V3
I PI 100 Megabyte
s Ethernet
21
Hi
|P
22
Hidden Compact Flash -Drive D-Used to backup

the hard-drive
important
files
Top of Unit
•• .
WBSBSSBSBSSBSSSmmÿ
- 2 Backlights,
V
'
Vt
Top of Matrix
jpampi I
% m i
;
top and bottom
2 large fans
fe .
r-,
;.*? •
;ÿ 2 Slot Pcmcia-32 bit
si?'
ff XiierlR-ÿ' "vr . .
n ,n» ‘'
V -V.'-
IKS:
Mw »,V:;
1111
M
Jr-
Pisi J m. SaH M ImAl
...
J
-’
v
F
RYJ
....... .
; :
is
I «ÿ
—y.u
j,fc(V1),.lt,il.I.i
iw KHKEM
.-'
sm
y
V f ~ . f* f f r1 “ruSSS
™
5wr- -ÿ•••;ÿ v>
HSPii
SI r .
r
I
Mfil
• '•vr'
X? II I III I
gPÿÿiiS'pBpI 1 i M
i
iv'v;
tail
IBBHHH JH 5*« -dm

V
T+m
•>a
m
:-.
•:
•
m
•-••ÿ:
$
•
:& •* u * - 1
. vr * v» >ÿ' V:j
w
Bottom of unit
... - -if
.
IssSslli
j -;:C; |:
(.. :
raw
-
"'i "•
;
,
;:- •
T
/
~ 11
H
S mtmmw M'S fj
:/! : . j
f
J
.wjjtj V
c, .:; w fi:;V; •
fasm
f-P
,-,- ..-i'* '.'.•'ÿr-*-—''*'"'* •‘-v' ’'vj
.-W..irm.P»
W7 iTf
iiaii ?!; ,1:
9
r-r'
S j;
f »Mbw a
H
~irjk hv:
T
ft k$
iSMMKT Sira®
I
i 1
3 IS: \
%i •
ilflpf
Tu umnTXi.i.
V,
•
i
Wits
vJL'
JSfiSSIS
".T.‘- 'C !_. '•
i
IS! faPl
ill
B§«PP!S»W§s
m f? t i
:
sr i
l
II
»
" w*» $ÿ' JM* 4 Fl

'
11
>4 ;: - lv:- 11
Sis
Bottom Backlight Opt 2, To
23
Opt 1 , To
MDS-DH Drives MDS-DH Drives, 1st Set of 8.
24
MIP12M2
• PC Card.
• 1 .2 giga-hertz
• 256mb memory
• XP Embedded
HN260
USB Connector Card
Considered connection point for the 2 back USB 1.1 devices.
Plugs into the Pc Board MIP12M2
A
M1-C73-M128 or M1-P12-M256: Main PC PCB HN260 card

'G 'j i i&.wiiiiiiiii«Mm iriii:i Ti 1 1': 1#
fSoUol
[2*00-1
<2 -191.5 H
- V
8
f]
.
m % hi 1
m 1
/
.* 'i f3*pri 3
% LP i
jit i
U
G-_.
G
v&sjgmm
m
S: s, i®
'
in
I
:¥»i
i K
I i
1m [Ml i
M - iff
«;u 0
......
•p -/ *»
Gijg.
-
=mnsi
v* VsyM •
— n
25
PC RAM DIMM: 256 MB

26
HN01 1 : PC to NC extender bus

Also called Relay card as relays signals between the PC to NC.
I SIS
«cÿaa|Fi. f 1
*118111 8S1mIII1
.iJSlSmmr mm
*
I ftisiSfi Sif §ssl§
J8P9 ifPIliy
m f>i KS
-I - r
IBH
:
MdP * m HR*
$838
.. ®
HN163 or HN154: NC main PCB
•. .' v->
' Jfeg1':
•A'
MS
SSESI '
6'
tjv
Si o *;?
I
n li
i;l
2 Q MS
ns ifl
Sill;
ES
Z
o
S«
Jj
1;
a 'ÿr *ÿ [ '
a SS
At V
;!
4* SSI 55S II m
o
•
<
a ESC as®.
m
£<£HBS(91 !}'
8#
H
£?<
wmfm
:.:P*-
,; m <~1
.-lfiS®
aWfe,
tl
''KKK
i.
i
.«< gS
«CS*30
mavnH
a®,
st-tx1 I •• 0
iff! sS!
27
28
HN163-HN203-HN123
n T
m im m m
i&
nm
A
aR
! m to wii'1]
- mns
Hr- Si Mi
[•. V
.i )
r,, HS i IE
e iU
|U
«
ii
'i'-
Kli 1 fi: Hi
a* HR MB
ssHa I
'f:
i Li£
K .
im
mm
I II BBKE
5
B& 1
M *n :
m
S38
1 3
m
Ti f
m mV
mm
m
rUmm
V\l E
1 77Pr
wm 7T ma •i ?ÿ ® M
r®s &
$
m
mm Ms
L2Q ii
SB 23«
H
feÿj MS m 8£ I
Ml
1 EKMP
B
mm
MB
m
m U ii
hm
nyÿav
MnmmSSinmWm: - 'ÿr
aN
MsflJSlSli#Mi '
;
'i i! i
—
-ÿ
m
HN 1 02 Bf'SWs__
*
mm UTM
TIT
'AT EMEI
u •|i
*?! mm
JB
r
mm
IK i
•tear*"
Pic car .•
&T , es isss S2
Jill ||M»
fWffiW
sa n:!i Vv<
E
pÿftissfcas® ,'v. IS £
Sale
•An
: i
3
a ss»-
»!!'tllilily
fr
:- ;l
: J jk§ H s m
i
HN123
ir'-'j
HW
LAL-nrsr
E5
IfS;
'aes
~i
9
in
w» i‘i
Vÿr)“’'(Sy-
' :-;
«Ss
ffS
Ij ife
I tm,
IfE .ÿ
'.II •>';>:!
i
Sub-CPU
HN102 m
ivVI
L-
g
Pic Engine Card. Where the plc(s) Si®
resides.
• Stores the pic ladder and 11-
;wA Jÿflr I
Tglifs i
Jfr&k:-,iOl I$
register information > Sri
K&%i£'Tm
• Also, Latching parameter -
*x
JF,
iiMaSs
!j ,4$? «iSSEs
n*
I 9B
IBIf88
•l<
registers. ’ I
jH
In
Pfgl ftpe ;*S-.
• Capacitor backed up for 30 Hi mmmm !

minutes ii®
c? BBSPPKM Pl-
fc
tm ... .. ;•
apgte.i!p • -ii
;« ,‘j
p; ByJ 1
,TrlE
H»S§ );
mwm
•i
jU* 32tjT 'W:
fcEWK?! Mai
>A
hV
/irrai'
*1
jfc
1 1>-» »nT7vÿr I
A 5l
29
X
32
m wsswa
i-i ti [-1
iin
'
f !
jLiCli
m '3
l-|
y>.,
!•<
.
fcMM»
n
!- "
•>
a*
**
*11 as
a
a I [c:Vjj
§ il g
as ©
k.«£j R
M
y ma'1 ..
m
li
il im i &
sV.
; M
m
pifftiWl!
fl«
m.
1
m i!
1
L-
k- iflfci <ajAi£.-zei±£2± a
r
Bf
-r-
irÿ
31mn Wi
'JUr
3
'-'J* S
rV
IS!% m ;
; b\*p 1 m
:•<
<•.~i
£9
_ .LI
--*-ÿ- ’jO * *-‘Wr « u>
TOttj, 'i
\aM
:
S3 .
'SI i5- f’
...-£» fc St
3 -usÿgsyrsignaw vaftsakasteriÿÿ IfijBS
“*•
1 *r 1
•*T **"•.** *>XI MvnrtffHtaÿni
r-rec ;
IB !<*#•*
•.ÿiss
. “ -~/5 S®
W®*
U*'
-
-
m
'-
>t_ >>: ~J.'T~ V?v -. ..ÿ
»=-,'- -•
CN
c/o
O
o
•i-H a
O bS)
£ o3
a
T3 G
G
O
03 a
co
,-G
o
G
?-i £
O
GH 4h G
o T3
CD
G
T3 5-h
C CO
CN G >
30
HN482
• Main Memory Card
• This is where the Sram data is stored,
• Machine parameters, Tool data, etc.
• Contains Main A, control s.n, and the Option
information
• Capacitor backup for 30 minutes
31
32
HN482: NC main memory PCB, SRAM and FLROM
k
j
R3-N0.40 I
£73
i
m
m
iiljBi
SUBf; 3
PftfftfPnMn ifiteaiiffl I
as®-- ‘
This contains Main-A, Control Serial Number,

Options, and SRAM data(parameters,tool data, etc.
Changing this requires control s.n. and options.
Like Hrl 13
HN531 : PCMCIA slots (2) and 2nd servo interface (OPT2)
CardBus l/F
2 Slots CardBus, 32 bit.
-r
f"
» *“w iS 'i j £§ aSfey ' - ‘
Si
ml 3 [T1
&JJL2
a i: s c
tempi
55 N i
3
1 pfyl 5US
-
-N jOK
ess
MM1
i
i3 I
I I
,
itJlV:
j
ss H
£0 j
P
3IT
V i ( (j
|.a Tf:
*sm *5
«1
d + lL
~t—
«i
IT: .n
gpcÿ'l®!
SEIa Mil SH
?ÿ
.Wi-'
0pt2
33
34
HN251
• Similar to HR25 1 on the M640

• Includes the Compact Flash card input as well as USB
connection.
• USB connection is 1 .1 version, not 2.0.
• G291 cable connects to Pc Card for USB
• G160 cable connects to HN163 for compact flash.
HN251 : Front slot PC card and USB interfaces
/V K
'‘ÿr- •:> >'•
'ÿÿwm,
rv&m>- V-,
if 'ÿ.
r«*£
m5 Ml
ms
w-iiM % i
m m
p ii
“'•l
m1 r1
i
rnirnÿm sa
«3 i
I
irar
'
TV
4
a-'*-’
i
r**\
35
36
HN271/NH272: LCD interface PCB
Sw
v"
;/ -y '
*35’V--""
m
LW
a mJ
. ./’>/'*
'. \ " \•
HH
mmRs
.•
S%-
?P4;
- .r- .P:i
,
„
;'SS iS !»!**
.....
,
pm
._
1»
sdllillh
S3® ,- j
.
?lisl
§* S-;s''
;v
A' ;ji'
'ÿ:.
254 ’
.?r
s.'
« ‘
J
_,1 A f/'r it 8 »J .* -.
;i;mm
*jmmL
\
S:
2 ( y-f'l
mmmm,
T«SSE
5'W' ’’ S>7:S;ÿ;.,a
\: -NS
r it i •*,
58
B
i I |gjgggj| H
r Si rA ' '
mm
Si
I
T Kiss—if MSSBSSm
LA
bfe3$>3s?#paH
&8fc m
'Vi/.. L«li5 fc>
T'i
:iu
iVrijuvuiiK-u'iulÿiit
1® ani •:
7
I-Si :-
H
L'i £
s!
\:ig
Si
APFi a jpagps HHSM0 '
L‘*flG_SJ
xm mmm R
BRMtal0|l M I, .'*>
mmm MB
m.
- e-i;
\
£ -
*2*2 n iv-y-n;
7' -
7
la
SBS
HN353
• Similar to HR353 card
• Except the servos now go directly to the NC by fiber¬
optic cable.
• Supports 14 Mr-J2 drives
• Supports the Remote I/O. Communicates to HR371
remote I/O cards.
37
3ÿ6
WMm : .V '
Wi
IIIIB
'ÿ-ÿ•
j ravt..
1
' ”ÿ
IPB pÿSg
E3U*: wSfJa i
#
J
"rr.
&
ie Js
-*#
HMÿiSS
. .
Kg
!
3p M i
1
p*
-M iTf*
wis
fOCESt *1
its 8-1I -. A&H
to: #V*Tf
i
i
I rjj
ij,.;
*
6»l •: '-i 3
V
ct,
*9
*
> -s 4
.«»
- i >'V/1
f: -ÿf
T3 pq W-J3 ft 5. U j£ :! w .x- i
i«
isÿ Uotl
yp- I'M
*-H
•
iin *,
M
JUi =-SB. i
ft! JIM p
.
*
c3 liVjF M;
-
MI••
« -
i
L-i
=*
«*“-•“
Mi [
igSBffj
-J
U ’ X
1
/
«®a--
*ri • ®5fs, •<-••;#
.*•
=HÿW!|
•- HOi
p
$sS33i
•••
•
tit
p;
i
&!
m P;
|c< j
Ift 111 m
m
.ÿ.1
l-i-.v .
ssa
"S
•7,®
IK1
If
m
—
!gH r
-a
1!
.rv
-ri
WMJ
ST
c Iglll
Itf •R
ip
£5*1-
,’j
iEy
BÿgI
3
o
HIIISEJM! S<
s m 11/iP;*A i H i
z
:
'il HE &
Iil1 1
! sssi iv
Saa it: I
rail tmn
K m
» IP”W ;
r;E
[rj
m.
&2&:|
•-M-
s W
M
II
mm ®u
S§I
;. 't
EJ
n-
;"X
as:
tessh
1
SiS if. !5*ÿ ILK
Vrffi
®s )
33 Si :r:|
i'
"• @n
ffl.?! [- ’
I n-I?
i
St-;:-5
«K
I 'lb '
3
iJt*
1 HSCÿ:
i'-A-
£
0 3S£i[W»ÿi 'v
i
M
i ..Sliill .
Ill; fel
38
NC covers: Top and middle
.....
... .. ....
...
J
»i
r.&tm:
§§
mmmm
j
§&&aQL .//
%
!
&
H'”- V
: :*«iSb
;
"ÿiii
Ml
t
,vÿ
'ÿ
?
' i>
ill
SSm !.;,l
?k-
M I
?..vV
P TTTjTTTJ T;J
WMj v.'V;
1
I
i«i ' M v y-j;
;
!
'iv/'FTiy
$ -« M ? . r
la
§pifp
Blit
BmgMm
l
1
3
; •
J I
iÿiai
;*mrn
mmmÿrn
SB
MS’ ..
.
IIMI fcy >'••ÿ-ÿ.
FCA750PY-N01 [.v •'•'ÿÿu--’.’.-:-
pS mm, K -7n v.
tiamsL
5"i 3
1 i:
.ÿÿj
MP0e0O70360D0 l
'
i? - -
•/.-
39
•
40
CXA0385: backlight power supply for 15” LCD
if \-y mm
I •
Jr'
i inn
i i .:
?V,
/
A ,« »
I "SfflS' ,"y t':
IS®
x
m <
«s
'Q
NC cooling fan: Notice the third wire for overheat detection

1
*“**ÿÿ“*: V
ii L
l-ÿv?
14 ml
"
'ÿV .
<
MMF -06D240S
24VPC- 0 . 0 3 A
i'
mm
Bill
TO
fMk
D 4201 G 1 RP3
llss
lA
\ ••
Mt'LCG irCHN0P(k'C‘0-,LTD.
(* MADE I/< CHINA
JB
(HlOa?
1
|Rf|j
Vi m
i
k
p'r- ;
i* xtfvA.r&f 'i * 'SJ
<v ,v ji§Sii
41
42
PD27 Power Supply

• Similar to PD25 Power Supply for Fusion and Mpro.
• Outputs 24v after power off to maintain voltage to
hard drive for controlled shutdown.
!
y
i
r ::
ii
K*.
0
:
-
Machine Keyboard
• Has 2 fuses
• If fail, recommend to replace complete assembly.
i aH ;4
' <| n
mpi f'sl
SAMPLE.
Us :rm
rr
tan
»»{
g H . i/.VFwifc
E P#A?
« :.; S'' ’ ' '.•
V
t-1 m
iy,- SHii
......
v '
!.4 l •>
*.'ÿ CJ
P“ -h> A- H. jj
Mi
'
«9
j
,
3«»E si
PC-'i
SPf-
"M?!
1 i i
* <;S5fc
tft JIVM 5= MSS*
fep rS’ ,OTV StASlS;
r.Hf
-k— '5,‘,
g
/3
1: i »
A. A. V
fl||p vasar
.......
gv2
?Si
!.
sp-raacKa
i1 <1
D
..*•
;i
•T»fjg
!;K1 ':': -p; g
.
F«S
~’
5
•7 :
*
1.
.! Ifi
«If
iv ;
m
i
,r
I.W T.V-'-
tfii»9cr is .if*,:
•I 1 V
-
SBaiilP
mi
.
s;
ijipi s: :ÿ
yia L NpjjK
St •
r: •
:A
H
85 I
WM£&»3
I
!!
:
'
i
JLi
UJw> i ir-A u
J-
-
11;
SIS
&
?'!
m
B I*
.1 .-; ii &
m
"j i
a
[g
Uk- Ml IsS
I
m i
:<•-..
i;Vcyj''
Wmtm
PR,.Jÿy tT*V~ F!. » < •. «.•v c
NiH[i!t:yiJOT9T
F Ju_.;L b _ t
. • •:
„S ,LI J
:
i
a 13-
EE i
,
m
43
-ÿvr “ t-W
: Ml.;.:: r* * . *4_
'
K ii
44
Hard Drive
• Embedded Windows XP software
• 20 Gigabyte hard drive
• No need for heater as guarantee to operate at 0 degree weather. Similar to
hard drive used in car GPS systems.
gpfc
fiwll
,
E
55
r*
i
mmMm
,
l?gl ;. ; )
I , I
fTmf
1 *•
p irim
lsr.» i
1
.a
e-2J* «S '"'a-
::
I
y
«
«
i V-
H ;
m BlKwriSSjÿ;
I ;<Si
IX F .i r"
s;
V
MBWII
..waa.
&*.%*>»»ÿ
g
i
ir
P !8!
MB
Ss* sul Bw l* £
f
k3 I'l
f i I. jBpR|pilir I
"i. i
m "p mu
_
[} •ft
ll ’'
'] 8 FT.
n
_
An embedded system is a special-purpose system in
which the computer is completely encapsulated by the
device it controls. Unlike a general-purpose computer,
such as a personal computer, an embedded system
performs one or a few pre- defined tasks, usually with verÿ
specific requirements. Since the system is dedicated to
specific tasks, design engineers can optimize it,
reducing the size and cost of the product. Embedded
systems are often mass-produced, so the cost savings
may be multiplied by millions of items.
Handheld computers or PDAs are generally considered
embedded devices because of the nature of their
hardware design, even though they are more expandable
in software terms. This line of definition continues to blur
as devices expand,
Physically, embedded systems range from portable
devices such as MP3 players, to large stationary
installations like traffic lights or factory controllers.
45
46
3
..A
Connector layout drawing

NC back
FAN 1 FAN2 CardBus ON/ OFF CONNECTION DESCRIPTION
S3i in zL Fan 1 & 2 Fan connections
O f£TT3T BAT CardBus PCMCIA I/F x 2
w
"TO NT t
UJUV UUUp-
ON/OFF ON/OFF SW connection
USB!
¥
7 3
i
BAT 3.3V battery
USB2 USB1 & 2 USB I/F x 2
I CRT External CRT I/F (not used)
. LCD Internal LCD I/F

LAN Ethernet I/F
uasassrs
CF25 External +24V (not used)
CRT
(MvrVT)
HDD Hard drive I/F
FDD Floppy drive I/F
LCD
EMG Emergency stop
Z3
LAN CF24 Remote ON/OFF to PD27
CF01 Power off detection
c DC IN +24V from DCOIJT on KB
ZTT
:NV INV Backlight inverter I/F
FRONT OUT Front slot l/F
cog
31 o
cF*> so
<y cm
i/i , . : \ Ena
ro
1C 1
DCiN CFO I CF24 EMG FDD HDD OF25

47
48

NC bottom
CGI 2 CF10 OPT2 CF50 CF55 0PT1

\ \ /
R 7
T O
E
71 r
E
T
EE
04
*5* |M*J
z LJ ZJ. im i-1
TO
alii
T
7/f— | = ri j
X
fei kf
ftT {Jq
•I
p
Mill
|o|l EPbr v g
Mil
CONNECTION DESCRIPTION
CGI 2 Keyboard l/F Bus connection
CF 10 Base I/O main I/F
OPTI & 2 Optical servo I/F
CF50 2'"1 servo I/O I/F
CF55 Additional I/O, servo I/F

Keyboard unit
<PD27 t<D\m)
MOUSE \ CR22 CR21 CR31 J2 ON/OFF CGI 2 INV DCIN DCOUT CFOI
\ x X
I CONNECTION DESCRIPTION
jn m i \ 7
0
CR21 & 22
CR3 1
Additional I/O I/F
Additional I/O I/F
© E .12 Soft menu key I/F

<j o
m
E H ON/OFF ON/OFF SW connection
o
CG12 KB I/F
r
-7Y2 i INV +12V for backlight I/F
A ) i
m 0 DCIN +24 V from PD27

M3 DCOUT +24 V to DCIN on Main PCB
* CFOI Power off detection

CR32
9
©
m 0
RI03
SIONC & PC
Terminator connection
RS232C I/F x 4 (2 CH ea)
t: ! s PCON/OFF Internal s/w ON/OFF
g° u littfr
a a »
0 MPG HPG I/F
0 DC +24V from I/O PS
IMT
0:::v- N o .13 & 4 Sub op I/O J3“IN, J4+OIJT

©
mm
J
i m t 1
i
NCKEY
MPKEY
NC KB I/F
NC KB I/F for MPX machine

a TL X only
7 77 / 7 7 7 X
/
MPKEY NCKEY / J4 J3 DC MPG SIOPC PCON/OFF SIONC SPEAKER R[03
49
50
Rotary Switch & Segment LED

T-- T\fT
. '~:Z 4-
!
'.ÿnpirrja !
ii {
T=lir:
:
l! ZJ!i
is
u :
.
-
i!
I 4irnTit;
I! Ii! !l ija
;JI II?
!
f
I
:: !
!
. -r::::
:
!i: I*3 '•M hi M
'
viw..
(-)
«• LED2 LED1
•i
i
i T„ ;p SW1
J6
0
!
.-•SSZZCiSSiSSSXiWSSX . s'. SW2
i;
srtssssstss- J
: !|
i
B :
i
i?::
i: ! I
, i
3 |
j
•. FT;. ;;F6o
!ÿ
J
-ii
[V;
* 7
r
’•Vi
Hi .-.V.
.
— j.-;
Rotary Switch 1
Position Boot CPU Note

0 Flush ROM Boot Operation begins
CF/ATA-Flush Boot simultaneously with
1
power supply ON.
2 Network Boot
(reserved for network) For development of OS
4 2 port Boot It starts while reset, and
(reserved for 2 port) operation of the reset For maintenance tool
5
release begins.
6 spare
7 spare
8 Don’t use
9 Don’t use
A Don’t use
B Don’t use
C (reserved for Flush ROM) Operation begins For maintenance tool
simultaneously with
D (reserved for Flush ROM)
power supply ON.
E (reserved for Flush ROM)
51
F Don’t use Reserved for equipment

52
Rotary Switch 2
Position FROM 2PORT Operation Note

0 Serial Bus Normal Set
, •in product
c . value , ,
p
Console Console I
1 PLc STOP Operate
V iA
'
•„
'•
2 Start up script “/from/0/1dsys”

3 Start up script “/cf/ldsys/”
4 Start up script Nullification
5 Normal For handy terminal
6
7
8 Bus Serial
Console Console
9
A Serial Bus
Console Console
B
07
C SRAM clear P. M os
D Normal
E E2PR0M FROM
F Not start 2nd CPU
,}
7 segment status
M640 only 1 status LED

MX has 2 status LED
LED 2 is CPU number: 0 = CPU #1,1= CPU #2.
LED 1 is CPU status: Starts at 8.-> 0 ->count up-> 9 for CPU #1 then O.X count up->9. for CPU #2. So during normal
operation you should either see 09. for 1 CPU or 19. for 2 CPU.
For 1 CPU system: For 2 CPU system:

0 8. -> 0 9. 1 8. 1 9.
Start End Start End
System start up counting M640 | MX Good Bad
LED 2 NONE 0 or 1 2 CPU system 1 9. 1 -v

LED 1 0-9 8.-9. 1 CPU system 0 9. 0 -V
Anything
except 9.
53
54
55
56
TENTATIVE!
CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURATION
2.1 System Configuration
This system are usually confabulated of following components:
(1) Control unit : This unit has the computation processing function for numerical control.
(2) Display unit : Characters and figures are displayed on this unit.
(3) Keyboard unit : This unit has the setting function.
(4) I/O interface unit : Input and output of machine signals are done through this unit.
(5) Servo/Spindle drive unit : This is a servo/spindle amplifier composed of a conductor for obtaining DC
from AC and an inverter for obtaining AC from DC.
(6) Servo/Spindle motor : This drive motor moves the machine.
(7) Other peripheral device : Peripheral device such as external memory and programming support.
Installed by machine loot manufacturer

r PC Card/K I i
USB Devises
G — f Ethernet!
I m
Printer
[CardBus] NC control unrl
FlopDy Disk Drive
[FDD IF] QJ PC Keyboard
fuse]
Display Unit
cy"
PS'? Mouse
! M _j,
|_Prep/amina Tool
[Optical communication]
j PRS232C]
1 Servo Amp-’Spindlo drive urol
ezno Bocal!
Man nil Pulse Generator [delicate IF] s sas s m

Keyboard unit
O LJUL-LJ ooo O
oooo
Machine operation panel
. [0101
t
rio IF]
300
Servo motor / Spindle motor
70s
Servo drive unit
1'jt-noiatS'
* E iu
E1E
I/O mtciface box usoinr, by Card-

sized 3/0
“ZJ?
10 interface I
C 1*"0 interface boxes arc installed
by machine tool moruifacturc : 7S Servo motor
<Note>
The noise resistance of most of PCperipheral devices are lower than the CNC system.
If such a low noise resistance devices are used in the CNC system, the noise resistance of the entire NC
system decreases, and noise trouble is caused occasionally. Please follows notes in Chaper 7 when you
use PC peripheral devises.
57
TENTATIVE
4.4.8 Connection of Power Supply

The PD27 power supply is used to protect the hard disk.
By outputting +24V tor 300msec after the 200VAC is turned off, turning off of the power during writing to the
hard disk can be prevented.
(1) Power Supply System Drawing
R S1 -LAN- CNC Unit
lC0
-
ONAD-F fCU? -MAS 13
PC Board CRT
MOO
Ocuil breaker
CMC Board Cf?5
FDD
NU
nn
ON Off
f«an
oul
EXTXBUS D
CflO D
erso D
® EMG
CF55 p
OPT? P
OPT! D
jI .?ch
CardBus
cm Cf?*
PO?7
IB DC IN US8!
d
: AT;
ONJOFF CGI?
ACIN
-Q CFO! USB?
DCOUT f 110
Crrcuil
breaker CG12
Let DCOUT Keyboard Uni!
FCU7-YZ08?
rno T-ÿiDClN tnm i7
L-C3CF01 iNV
[DC KPG
SK3NC
( VIM SIOPC
|J3
RI03
(2) Unit specification

Item Specification
Input 200VAC - 480VAC (-15%. +10%)
Output 24VDC 8A
Size __ 1 70mmx 65 mm x 230mm
Back up time 300ms
(Note) The power cannot be turned ON immediately after the PD25 power has been turned OFF.
Wait approx, two seconds before turnning the power ON.
_
(3) Connector layout and pin assignment
O
ACIN
1 ...
ACIN : 200VAC input
1
2
3
ACIN N
ACIN H
FG~
ON/OFF SW : Swich ON (
Swich OFF
<Cable side connector type>
Connetor
Contact
: 2-1 781 28-3
: 1-1 752 1 8-5
Recommended maker : AMP
t upword)
— 24VDC output
( i downword)— 24VDC output OFF
ON/OFF : Connect to the escutcheon ONOFF switch
ON ore sw / / 1 NC
0 2 P-OFF
< Cable side connector type>
Connetor : 1-1 78288-5
ON.-OFF 3 0V Contact 1-175218-5
4 0V
powf-n Recommended maker : AMP
OCOUT
m POWER : Green lamp lights during-*-24V output

DCOUT :
_n n_ A(X) B.(V) j < Cable side connector type>

1 ACFAiL +24V j Connetor : 3-1 78128-6
2 OV OV Contact : 1 -1 7521 85
3 FG FG Recommended maker : AMP
58
TENTATIVE
CHAPTER 7 NOTIFICATION OF USING PC PERIPHERAL DEVICE

This chapter describes the notification of using PC peripheral devices.
7.1 Noise measures of USB and Ethernet

USB and Ethernet have been equipped normally.
Please refer to Connection of the USB equipment Connection of Ethernet" for connection
execution example.
jr-B.
Because use under the noise environment is not assumed as for a personal computer on the market such as
Mouse and Keyboard, operation is not guaranteed under the machine operation environment.
Please use the cable with the shield
for the noise inclination.
Additionally, the noise measures by the ferrite core like the figure below are recommended.
Ethernet cable Panel
USB cable USB cable
i
NC unit
ifcT IU !ÿ
i
i
I i
|
—
[ÿ"]
m
Mouse
3p Keyboard
Printer
Jj i
3
il
S3Q /
am iih)
r Ethernet cable
Wraps cable around the

i
ferrite core.
7.2 Recommended Devices List

Introduce the recommended devices that are met the Mitsubishi quality standard and the connectable
devices that are confirmed operation (although not met the Mitsubishi quality standard).
7.2.1 Front Access IC Cards

Supplier Type Specification Class Remarks
SCANDISK SDP3B-48-1 01 48MB Recommended SDP3B-"*-ono ***: Memory
SDP3B-96-1 01 96MB Recommended size (MB) nnn: Manufacturer’s
SDP3B-128-101 128MB Recommended control number "101" is
standard
SDP3B-192-101 192MB Recommended
SDP3B-256-1 01 256MB Recommended
SDP3B-440-101 440MB Recommended
10- DATA PCFCA-16M 16MR Recommended PCFCA-”‘M Memory size
PCFCA-32M 32MB Recommended (MB)
PCFCA-48M 48MB Recommended
PCFCA-1 28M 128MB Recommended
59
TENTATIVE
7.2.2 CardBus PC Cards

Device Supplier Type Name Specification Bus Type Class
FLASH SANDISK SDP3B series PCMCIA Recommended
Card
IO-DATA PCFCA series PCMCIA Recommended
LAN 3Com Etherlll 10 BASE-T Ether PCMCIA Connectable
Card corega Etherll PCC-T 10 BASE-T Ether PCMCIA Connectable
Fether PCC-TXF 10/100 BASE-T Ether PCMCIA Connectable
Fether CB-TXL 10/100 BASE-T Ether CardBus Connectable
BUFFALO LPC2-T 10 BASE-T Ether PCMCIA Connectable
LPC4-TX 10/100 BASE-T Ether PCMCIA Connectable
Notices in use of CardBus type PC card

(1) Install a driver software under the condition that only the target CardBus type PC card is inserted. Some
trouble may occurs if a driver software is installed under the condition that other PC card is inserted
together.
(2) For using a CardBus type PC card, turn on the power under the condition that the target PC card is
inserted. When the PC card is inserted under the condition that the power is turned on, the PC card is
not sometimes recognized by the combination with other PC cards.
60
TENTATIVE
CHAPTER 8 DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE
8.1 Maintenance Tools
8.1.1 Measuring Instruments
The following measuring instruments are used to confirm that the voltage is being supplied correctly to the
NC unit, to confirm that the wiring to the NC unit is correct, and to carry out simple troubleshooting._
- Tool Condition Application
Tester To check that the wiring to the NC unit is correct before
turning the power ON. _
AC voltmeter Measure the AC Power To measures the AC power voltage being supplied to
voltage. the external 24VDC power supply unit.
The tolerable error is +2%
or less.
DC voltmeter Max. scale 30V The To measures the DC power voltage.
tolerable error is ±2% or External power supply 24V (control section, machine
less. input/output interface)
Battery voltage
DC output _
Phase rotation To check the connection order of the AC 3-phase input
meter power supply. _
Synchroscope General measurement and simple troubleshooting.
(Note t)Currently, a high precision digital multi-meter is commonly used as a tester. This digital multi-meter
can be used as both an AC voltmeter and an DC voltmeter.
(Note 2)A logic analyser (200MHz or more) is required for complicated troubleshooting.
8.1.2 Tools
•Screwdriver (Large, Medium, Small)
Radio pliers
8.2 Maintenance Items

Maintenance is categorized into daily maintenance items (items to be carried at set intervals) and periodic
maintenance (replacement of parts when life is reached). Some parts (HDD, FDD, etc.) will not function in a
hardware manner when the life is reached, so these should be replaced before the life is reached.
Name Life fnspection/Replacemeni

Escutcheon Once/lwo months
(Accordingly when dirty)
Cleaning of floppy disk drive Once/two months
(type built in operation box)
Replacement of floppy disk sheet 3x106 passes/track
_
(type built in operation box)
Replacement of floppy disk drive 12,000 access hours or 5 years of FDD motor rotation, Refer to left
(lype built in operation box) whichever is sooner
Replacement of hard disk drive 5 years or 20,000 hours power ON _ Refer lo left
Replacement of LCD backlight 5 years or 20,000 power ON hours (specified with power ON Replace when display dims
lime where brightness drops lo less than 50% at 25 cC)
Replacement of batter Cumulative data hold time 5 years When battery drop caution
alarm occurs _
50.000 hours (specified with rotation time when rotation speed
Cooling Ian (control section)
_
drops to less than 20% of initial speed)
Refer to left
Keyboard IQ6 punches Refer to left
61
TENTATIVE
8.3 Maintenance of Escutcheon and keyboard

8.3.1 Cleaning of Escutcheon and keyboard
Wipe the escutcheon (display unit and plastic frame of keyboard unit) and keyboard surface with a soft dry
clean cloth. If the escutcheon is heavily dirtied, soak the cloth in a neutral detergent, and wipe the display.
Do not use an alcohol or a paint thinner, etc.
The escutcheon and the keyboard are not for waterproofing. Be careful that a liquid doesn't go into inside
of it.
8-3.2 Replacement of NC Data Key

The NC data key is the printed circuit board which the switches are mounted on it, and is included into the
keyboard unit. Replace it in accordance with the following procedure.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove all the cables connected at the back of the NC data key.
(3) Remove the tablet pointer flexible cable and keyboard cable from the PCB (HN20x card).
(4) Remove six screws, and remove the sheet metal adapter and the H R201 card from the keyboard unit.
(5) Remove fourteen screws, and remove the NC data key from the escutcheon
(6) Install a new NC keyboard with the process which is contrary to ® ©. -
Remove Keyboard cable
Remove Glide Pointer cable HN20X card
\
-
I: IzsC'A
"rH* \ <r”
’ :i
i
H *\
&
4
ssss??**** A,
O
(: Remove 8 screws
NC data key
•<o
$
r. !"•
L -o
Remove 18 screws
62
TENTATIVE
8.3.3 Replacement of Menu Key

The menu key is the printed circuit board which the switches are mounted on it, and is included into the
display unit. Replace it in accordance with the following procedure.
(1 ) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove the menu key cable from the keyboard unit. Because the menu key cable is soldered on the
menu key PCB, remove it at the keyboard unit side.
tf'X (3) Remove 8 screws, and remove the escutcheon
(4) Remove 8 screws, and remove the menu key
(5) Install a new menu key with the process which is contrary to (D (3). -
<o
I \
S
v«rf
I® r7
Remove 8 screws
and, remove escutcheon
fit
Remove ON/OFF switch connector
o
Si/ ri.s
'O mLIH 1
•o
'O
Remove Keyboard card
i ft.
iPv
it
! 5
Menu key
;
ill
r • T.V n-' /J 4
\
iB «5£s.
Remove 8 screws
and, remove menu key
63
TENTATIVE
8.4 Maintenance of Floppy Disk Drive

8.4.1 Cleaning of Floppy Disk Drive (Head Cleaning )
When the floppy disk drive is used for a long time, magnetic particles or dust from the disk may adhere onto
the head surface. This can cause the reading and writing processes to be inhibited. Clean the head
periodically ( once every two months ) with the following procedure.
(1) Recommended cleaning disk
Maker : Japan Morex

Type : Morex cleaning floppy for double-sided 3.5-inch
Method : Dry
(2) Cleaning method

© Insert the cleaning disk into the floppy disk drive to be clearned.
(2) Start the cleaning program, and follow the instructions given on the screen.
(3) When the program is completed, eject the cleaning disk.
8.4.2 Handling of Floppy Disks

Observe the following items to ensure that the floppy disk can be used for a long time.
(1) Precautions for use

© Never tough the magnetic surface with hands. Finger prints on the magnetic surface
will inhibit the reading process.
(2) Do not touch the floppy disk with hands dirtied with oil or iron chips.
(D Do not place the floppy disk near cigarette smoke. Do not apply solvents on the M
magnetic surface.
@ Always attach the index label to the correct position so that it will not come off. Do
not layer the index labels.
(5) Fill in the indexlabel before attaching it to the floppy disk. When writing on a label
already attached to the floppy disk, use a felttip pen ,etc.
(6) Carefully insert the floppy disk into the drive with it facing the correct direction.
Rough handling during insertion and ejection could damage the floppy disk.
© When bringing the floppy disk inside from outdoors where the temperature and
humidity difference are great from indoors, wait at least 30 minutes before starting
use.
(2) Precautions for storage

© Store floppy disks that are not in use and the backup floppy disks in plastic cases.
(2) Do not place the floppy disk where it will be subject to direct sunlight or near heating
appliances.
© Do not place the floppy disk near magnets or items that generate strong magnetic
fields. Magnetic rings and necklaces could also damage the data on the floppy disk,
so avoid wearing these items when handling floppy disks. D
@ Do not place heavy items on the floppy disk.
64
TENTATIVE
8.4.3 Other Precautions for Use

(1) Floppy disk drive life
The durability of the floppy disk drive is guaranteed for five years of the FDD motor rotation or 12,000 access
hours, whichever is sooner.
However, if used in a heavily contaminated environment, the reading and writing processes could be
inhibited due to the adherence of dust or foreign matter.
Periodically clean the head to prevent this type of trouble.
<T5
(2) Recommendation for making backups
Make copies of the floppy disks containing important data to be used in case of an accident such as
damaging of the floppy disk or destruction of the data.
(3) Operating conditions

The floppy disk drive and floppy disks are extremely sensitive to changes in the temperature and humidity
and to dust, so always observe the precautions that have been described.
In respect to the temperature, if the working conditions are not satisfied (such as if the system is started at
below freezing), the data track and head positions may deviate and prevent the data from being read
properly.
In this case, wait for the internal temperature to rise.
(4) Writing to floppy disks

The temperature must be 10 to 40 °C when writing to the floppy disk.
Always observe the temperature conditions when writing data.
8.4.4 Replacement of Floppy Disk Drive

© Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove the F1 30 cable from the floppy disk unit. Connection of Floppy Disk
Unit" for connection and removal of the F130 cable.
(D The floppy disk drive is covered with three sheet metals. And three sheet metals are fixed with eight
screws. Remove those sheet metals referring to the figure 8.5.
@ Install a new floppy disk drive with the process which is contrary to ©~ (3).
NB
T
.*
f'*
A -
A
65
TENTATIVE
8.5 Maintenance of Hard Disk

8.5.1 Handling of Hard Disk
(1) Precaution for Use
- Correct connection the cable
- Do not touch the connector section with hands or metal.
- Do not apply excessive force on the connector section.
- Do not drop or apply strong impacts on the drive.
- Do not disassemble the drive.
(2) Precaution for Storage

- Avoid strong the drive in high temperature, high humidity places.
- Do not place the drive near magnets or items the generate strong magnetic fields.
8.5.2 Other Precaution for Use

(1) Recommendation for making backup
The hard disk is a durable device, so make a backup of the hard disk to save important data.
8.5.3 Replacement of Hard Disk

Do not handle the hard disk without metal case because the hard disk has not much endurance against the
vibration and shock in comparison with other electric devises. Replace the hard disk as the Hard Disk Unit
(with the metal case and the stabilizing rubber).
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove the F140 cable which is connected between the hard disk unit and the control unit. Remove
the HEATER cable and the THM cable from the keyboard unit.
(3) Remove two screws, and remove the hard disk unit from the keyboard unit.
(4) Install a new hard disk unit with the process which is contrary to ©~@.
fgfeTTÿo
f|iIE!:' ara®?- T)
W
3
w HI
O'
| /j\ CAUTION /j\ Hard Disk Drive is built in this product Do not drop and do not give a strong impact to the product
because the hard disk drive is a precise device
/\ The hard disk drive has a useful life Please exchange the hard disk drive before end ot the life
/t\ Please make a backup of the customers files which is saved in the hard disk driveAt the
breakdown of the hard disk drive although Mitsubishi provides exchange service of the hard disk
drive, Mitsubishi does not guarantee a customets files which is saved in the hard disk drive And
Mitsubishi does not assume the responsibility concerning the damage caused by having damaged
the hard disk drive
66
T<
TENTATIVE
8.6 Maintenance of LCD

8.6.1 Life of LCD Backlight
CCFL (Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp) is used for the light source (backlight) of the LCD panel.
The estimated life of the backlight is 40,000 hours/25°C. (Time for the brightness to drop to 50% of the initial
value).
Life time depends on temperature. When the LCD panel is used under low temperature or high temperature
continuously, the life time has a tendency to become short.
8.6.2 LCD Characteristics

(1) Luminance
Luminance decreases at a low temperature by the CCFL characteristic. And, the time until luminance
meets rated value after power-on is about 10-15 minutes.
(2) Uniformity, Luminous Dot, Dark Dot
It is not defect or malfunction though uniformity, a small luminous dot and a small dark dot may appear on
the LCD panel.
8.6.3 Replacing LCD backlights

Before replacing LCD backlight, remove the LCD panel from the escutcheon. In addition, make sure that
the machine’s power is OFF to replace LCD backlights.
LCD backlight type for replacement: L502174G01
© Remove the cable from the backlight connector connected to the LCD backlight power supply card.
© Remove the cable for menu keyboard from the keyboard unit.
(D Remove the cable for ON/OFF switch from the keyboard unit.
(D Unscrew the M4 screws (8 screws) to remove the escutcheon.
(§) Press the nail during pulling the LCD backlight out. (Figure 8.8)
(D Attach the LCD backlight for replacement in the reverse order of 1 ) -4).
©
\ 0
ill
fpBft :jprr=mi
n r\,
ho
mi H : 'tT
8I !l —s
(2)
0"
67
TENTATIVE
8.7 Maintenance of Battery

All data, such as Ihe parameter and machining program that need to be backup when the power is turned
OFF, are saved by a battery installed in the control unit. It is easy to get a battery because a familiar mm-
Type lithium battery is being used.
Replace the battery as a standard within one week if the Battery Voltage Drop Caution Alarm is appeared.
If the battery isn’t replaced, the Battery Voltage Drop Warning Alarm is appeared. Then, internal backup data
could be damaged.
Battery type name: CR17335SE-R-CH2
8.7.1 Handling of Battery

Double oxidation manganese - Lithium battery contains inflammable material such as lithium, organic
solvent.
Erroneous handling of lithium battery may result in such an accident of heat generation, explosion or fire,
possibly leading to personnel injuries or machine malfunction.
CD Do not recharge, disassemble, apply pressure, heat, directly solder or dispose in fire the battery.
© Insert the battery (+)(-) correctly.
© Do not create short circuit between (+) and (-}. And do not carry or store the battery with the metal
goods such as a necklace.
(3) When the battery is stored or disposed, do not stack or jumble up the batteries with other metal goods.
Then, put a insulating tape to the terminals of the batteries to prevent a short circuit.
© Do not use the batteries by mixing different types or old batteries together with new ones.
8.7.2 Replacement of Battery
© Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
© Remove the battery cable from the control unit.
© Replace the battery from the holder.
@ Install the battery with the process which is contrary to ©~@.
!
H'
©Remove the battery cable IT'D ©Remove Ihe ballery
7©
i A
i
:
\ a
Ur'
'IT' " :-D
c -
| ACAUTION] O If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs , tool data and
parameters in the input /output device, and then replace the battery .
/K Do not short circuit, charge overheat , incinerate or disassemble the battery .
/t\ Dispose of spent batteries according to local laws .
68
TENTATIVE
8.8 Maintenance of Cooling Fan

Two cooling fans are mounted in the control unit. One cools down the NCCPU, and the other cools down the
PC CPU.
These two fans are same part.
Type Name of Cooling Fan : MMF-06E24DS-RP3
8.8.1 Life of Cooling Fan

r The life of the cooling fan depends on the grease life of the bearing. The rotation time when 20% of the
rotation speeds decrease more than an initial rotation speed is defined as the life, and the life is 50,000
hours.
8.8.2 Replacement of Cooling Fan

© Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Remove the fan cable from the "FAN1" connector located around the left top of the NC unit.
(D Remove the cover with opening the lock latch.
@ Remove the cooling fan
© Install a new cooling fan with the process which is contrary to © ~ d).
©Remove the fan cable

©Remove the cover
y .
frs.
VA )/
lit r
>*.
... .
i
sk.-'i
•i •
-sf
M
@Remove the cooling fan i
IV
:
i.:: j...
r*
5
i' i
(
69
70
71
72
Basic Operations for Maintenance 1
1 Basic Operations for Maintenance
The minimum operations required for system maintenance are described in this chapter.
1-1 Unlocking the Password Key Lock

The functions and screens that cannot be operated by the user are locked with a password key,
and normally cannot be used.
1-1-1 Releasing the Key-lock

The key-lock can be released with the following procedures. Once the key-lock is released, the
key is remained unlocked until the power is turned OFF but is automatically re-locked when the
power is turned ON again.
(1) Select the [DIAGNOS] [VERSION] screen.
TPS 0 2005/10/20 Id: 31: 47
?w 50* Orp*» Vv\A 0 . OOiii/nin

POSITION SET UP PROGRAM TOOL C-COND. PARAM DIAGHOS DATA TOOL DISPLAY
INFO. DATA I/O LAYOUT MAP
MS0* ITPS 0 2005/10/20 Id: 33: 23

'\/\j 50Y ' SJ.JJI Orpn ‘V'vV> 0 . OOin/miii
VERSION ALARM ALARM PLC MAIHIEN RUNNING GRAPHIC DATA ACCTJMD.
HISTORY SIGNAL CHECK CONTROL MAI NT B. ERASE TIME
EH!!® TPS 0 2005/10/20 14:34:33

|
'\A; 50* UQ> Orp» VV\A o ooiii/nii*
DlivCHOS VERSION DIAGNOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER

MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR
(2) Press the menu selection and input the keys in the following order:
3000[ INPUT
Following the operation above, the "Hidden" screen menu will appear when the menu selection
key is pressed
t
Screen selection key Menu key
t
Menu selection key
73
1-1-2 Normally (locked with password key) Prohibited Operations
1. Setting of forced output

[Normal]: Menu on DIAGNOS screen.
? * [TPS
:
0 200S/10/20 ;i4:34:38
so* iLUJJ Orp«j vW*. O . OOin/jairt
DIAGHOS VERSION DIAGHOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER
MONITOR MONITOR MON DIOR MOH1TOR MONITOR
[Hidden]: Select DIAGNOS MONITOR menu.

3*3
HH&i TPS 0 2005/10/20 14:38:20
so* TTTO Otpa V V\A 0 . 00 in/» in !!
DIAGNOS VERSION DIAGHOS OPT IOH SERVO SPENDLE HARDWARE LADDER I/O WRITE
i
MONITOR MONITOR | HOW ITOK MONITOR MONITOR WRITE CANCEL
2. Setting of servo parameters and spindle parameters

• Parameter setting menu
Servo Parameter window
Spindle Parameter window
[Normal]: Menu on VERSION screen.

i
Ell!aa TPS 0 2005/10/20 14:34:30 i

‘"'-A.- 50* im Orpa VVY- 0 . OOiu/min
DIAGHOS VERSION DIAGNOS OPTION SERVO ! SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDEP.
MONITOR MONITOR j MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR I
[Hidden]: Select SERVO MONITOR or SPINDLE MONITOR menu.

393
ESIloa. JTPS 0 2005/10/20 14:38:51
’Vv SO* iLjJJi Oz'pn VV\A O . OOin /min
i r,
! DIAGHOS VERSION DIAGHOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER P ARAM.
MONITOR MONITOR ! MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR
!
i.
When the PARAM. setting menu is pressed, the respective parameter window will appear.
74
3. Setting of system parameters (SYSTEM PARAM), pitch error compensation (PITCH
ERROR) and display of key history (KEY HISTORY), memory scope (MEMORY SCOPE)
[Normal]: Menu on VERSION screen.

: *
wm&\ TPS 0 2005/10/20 -14:34:38
'w 5 XEH? Orpn VWV 0.00 in/miii
DIAGHOS VERSION DIAGHOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER
[Hidden]: "VERSION” menu appears on the right end.

a*j3 TPS 0 2005/10/20 14:39:17
*\f\j SOY :5TQ» orp» ]VW 0 . 00in/».in
DIAGHOS VERSION DIAGHOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER VERSIOH
3!>3 ;
I TPS 0 2005/10/20 14:39:38
"VX* SO1. Orpn VWo.OOin/min
DIAGHOS SYSTEM PITCH HEY MEMORY
PARAM ERROR HISTORY SCOPE
4. Setting of cutting parameter (CUTTING PARAM)
[Normal]: Menu on CUTTING CONDITION screen

TPS 0 2005/10/20 14:48:22
rV\- 50 i mji 0 lpn •VW 0. 00 in /rain
WORK -MAT C-SP FR WORKMAT . C-COND. cur C-OND
TOOL-MAT PERCENT . TURNING LEARN
=Ll
[Hidden]: "CUTTING PARAM" menu appears on the right end
3*>3
mm*- TPS 0 2005/10/20 14:40:13 I
'\A/ 50 Y JZD Orpn VV'A 0 OOiu/mlti

*3!
WORK HAT C-SD FR WORKMAT . C COND. i CUT CC'ND|CUTTIIJC
i
I DO L- MAT PERCENT . TURNING : LEARN PARAM
! I:
J
303 j TPS 0 200S/1O/20 14.41:07
r\;\.' 50*. HD> Or p» V-.V 0 OOin/min i
1
Is CUTTING CUTT TNG CUTTING r • cmiD *
( !
PARAM l PARAM 2 PARAM 3 :
!
75
1-1-3 Exiting the MAZATROL Screen
The MAZATROL screen can be exited with the following operation.
r
mu TES 0 : 2 505/10/20 14:42:2a
'XAJ 50 V Orpa ;VVV- O . t)0in/tti.tt
DcM Ax».~*re(
POSITION SET UP PROGRAM TOOL C-COND* PARAM DI -i-liir.'i r<:9iy TOOL DISPLAY
1HFO. DATA LAYOUT MAP
WXm IPS 0 : 2
1 Debug Functions >

JD . PARAH T>% Arrange windows neatly
I
z
When the password key is unlocked, bring the cursor to
this space and click on the right mouse button button to
display the window above.
The MAZATROL screen is exited when "Exit" is selected.
1-1 -4 Returning the Password Key Lock Releasing State
When the NC is powered on, it is always in the state of "key-loced”.

Select "Debug Functions" ”11 31 Mode" from the window avobe to return to the normal state
from the password key lock releasing state if you don't want to turn NC power supply on again.
DebugWindow uI-
TPS 0 2005/JE
I UcndchkFree
m\
!r
Debug Menu Button
GL Functions >
PLC Menu
Arrange windows neatly - uisyiiKi
Exit JT MAP
1
76
Basic Operations for Maintenance
1-2 Completely Erasing the Memory

The entire syslem memory (SRAM) area is cleared when the card, provided with memory, is
replaced or added.
1-2-1 Card with Memory Mounted

HN482 (NC memory module board)
1-2-2 Clearing the Memory y 0 7

RotSw 1
The procedure for erasing the SRAM is described below. <5
(1 ) Set "C" to NC rotary switch 2 [RotSw2].

Rotary switch 1 [RotSwl] is "0”.
A
R n 1,
(Refer to the right images.)
F 0 1
E 9 RotSw2
h XX'?
(2) Turn the NC power ON.
r.
n
The 7-segment LED will change as shown below. R
The procedure is completed when "Y" appears.
Changes at a high speed between these sections.

t
ID! O
SRAM clear
Power ON
(3) The PC side of NC is started while clearing the memory. So when the alarm
messages are displayed while starting NC screen, click the "OK" to all messages.
(Note: The operation in MATRIX. The PC side is not started in M640.)
i
(4) After all alarm messages are cleared, shutdown the PC from the Windows start menu.
77
(5) After the shutdown is completed, NC power is turn to OFF
(6) Return the NC rotary switch 2 to "0" (Refer to the right image v
cP
CP
A
£ 8 1
x» s?
<j>
"SRAM clear" by RotSw2 "C" executes the following operation: O
1. Memory test and zero clear to all SRAM area

9)
2. Zero clear to PLC bit RAM and word RAM 6 8
78
1-4 Backing Up and Restoring the SRAM Data

Of the various data used with the MAZATROL MATRIX, some data is backed up by a battery and
saved in SRAM even if the power has been turned OFF.
Flowever, this saved data will be erased when the memory is cleared. Also, the SRAM data might
be destroyed when the card is replaced, etc.
/j\ Always backup the SRAM data before carrying out work that could cause the SRAM data to be
destroyed.
The some data (parameter etc.) in SRAM are registered in FLROM, and can be read when
required. The default parameters are always registered in the FLROM when shipped from the
Yamazaki factory.
1-4-1 Operation Method of SRAM Backing Up
FLROM
SRAM
Common, local Common, local

variables variables
Too! related tables
SRAM
Parameters .Some data Parameters
Jaw shape data
Cutting conditions. Cutting conditions.

new cutting conditions Maintenance new cutting conditions
tool
Periodic inspection
lllfe' Periodic inspection
|~ Extended coordinate -r:'
Gantry control data Gantry control data

\ h.
HD
'-t
SRAM %
All data
C : \m a inte\s ra m bkf . dat
79
a
1-4-2 Backing Up and Restoring the SRAM
SRAM data is backed up and restored using the maintenance tool.
An outline is shown below.
Start the maintenance tools, and select the BACKUP screen.

ipZ',
BACKUP -
FLASK ROM
SSAX !
EJCT-I'ATA UO
C: '-x-ai n . tfat
UPDATEJ MAIHTraAMCsl BACKUP [ OPTfOK EKIT
With the backup function, the SRAM data in the NC can be saved in another medium
Execute the following operations using the button (T) to @.
© SRAIVH>FLROM
A part of SRAM data in the NC unit (Note) is backed up in FLROM in the NC unit.
© SRAM<-FLROM
A part of SRAM data backed up in FLROM (Note) is read to SRAM.
SRAMÿHDD
The whole SRAM data in the NC unit (2MB), as well as the PLC's BIT-RAM and
WORD-RAM area are backed up in HDD.
The Names of backup files are fixed as follows. _
Content File name Size Remarks
Whole SRAM C:\mainte\srambkf.dat 2MB
PLC’s C:\rn ainte\plcbkff 1 . dat_ 1MB F o r MATRIX Standard
BIT-RAM/WORD-RAM C:\mainte\plcbkfOf ,dat 44KB For MATRIX NEXUS
@ SRAM<-HDD
The above files, which have been backed up in HDD, are read to the original area in the NC
unit.
(Note) A part the SRAM data items read/written between SRAMoFLROM are listed below
• User parameters
-
Machine parameters
- R registers (R21 00 to R2527)
• Cutting conditions
-
Cutting conditions learn
- Maintenance check
-
GL (gantry) parameters
80
a
1-5 Backing Up the Saved Data
Of all the data stored in SRAM and HD, the data indicating the customer's machine conditions can
be backed up by data input/output on NC screen.
It is recommended to backup these data before various maintenance operations are worked.
Save these data as the customer's current machine condition data if any troubles or fault occurs.
1-5-1 Types of the Saved Data
Item Device saved data

SRAM HD
Machining
programs O
Tool data O o
Tool offsets O
Tool files O
Jaw shape O
Cutting conditions O
Workpiece offsets O
User parameters O
Machine
parameters O
Extended
coordinate O
Macro variables O
Periodic inspection O
Note: R registers of R2100 to R2527 and R10500 to R11999 are included in the machine
parameters.
Note: The tool data has the main data in HD and the index table in SRAM.
1-5-2 Media for Backing Up the Saved Data
(1) HD
The data of the item described in 1-5-1 can be backed up to an arbitrary HD’s folder of
NC.
(2) IC memory card (Using the NC front slot)
The data of the item described in 1-5-1 can be backed up by using the IC memory card
from NC front slot.
(3) USB memory
The data of the item described in 1-5-1 can be backed up by using the USB memory from
NC front USB slot or USB slot on pendant box side (extended from USB slot on the back
of NC).
81
1-5-3 Backing Up the Saved Data
For example, the method of backing up the saved data by the USB memory is as follows.
(1) Press the screen selection key until the menu in the figure below appears, and select
"DATA I/O" from the menu
posmou TOOL PROGRAM TOOL C-COHD. P ARAM OIACHOS DATA 30 DISPLAY
LAYOUT DATA x/o 3Xiur WAT
(2) Input/output the data on the screen below.
MCCRW
;
—T T il t
|V: V=J
r T.:.: E
I =F
tmUm
;
ITIIZZIZZZp:
•!
T
i;
% •. - .L \*i.
rrr r TOT**
"
on lAtl JCUO two CCD CAM DMA
:
•n*« *w
s»
(3) Select themenu key "USB”.

USB I/O menu is displayed.
(4) The DEVICE SELECT screen is displayed when "DEVICE SELECT" of the USB I/O
menu is pressed. The D drive is selected (highlighted) with the [ T ] key, and click [OK]
(or press the [INPUT]).
MC<-OSD NC->USD USD DATA I/O DIR. DIR.
LOAD SAVE CONTENT SELECT PAKAH. DELETE SELECT
i'i » nr
IA: \)
I O : \1 M AZAT KOI.
(Effl
(Note) When two or more USB memories are inserted, the E drive or more might be
assigned.
82
0
(5) When the menu "DIR. SELECT" is pressed, the selected drive's folder is displayed in
SELECT DIRECTORY window. Select the folder to output data.
•When a folder is newly created, input a folder name with the keys directly.
mr OTB TT tn RECTORY: »
n*>CMM PRtOOBAH
• r I
r
. i.
I'r
4 r
un
IT
&
— b~
r
OTUC* DATA [irÿV [ c*

T
T
t r !
i
ZZTJ •AV p. Q6 i n/min
RV vn MC •>oins llBB LtniT* OJ.T* I/O

UAD tiltt CSMCTtW* rcixcs YiUtW. DtiATfc
The selected folder name is displayed in « DIRECTORY » on the right side when "OK"
is clicked or <INPUT> is pressed. /
RC usn <-r nrr.rcroPT: ntcxti* »

PROGRAM PROGRAM
£
I
£ 4
~:r :p:
OTnER DATA
t j-
OTHER DATA
.1. I
ESeSS'Ti TPE 0 20CS/10/1V 19:43:22

A/v? so> UUl Orpa VAS O 00 in /min i
f
| Hf '.-USA K| MC- >USB usn narvr. nma x/o nip DTA .
'
1.0AD SAVE COWTEHT SELECT VARAN. DELETE SELECT
(6) Select "NC—>USB SAVE", and select the data to output.
83
(7) Selecting the program file
Press the menu "SELECT ALL". When <INPUT> is pressed, all program files are
displayed in the program area on the upper left. If not all programs are displayed in the
program area at a time, the programs can be confirmed by moving the scrollbar up and
down.
*y, jirntc-roGr: ;<>

*- sfM
PBOCJIJ#*
'
pytfarJ -s
i
EEEt i T
T c
[
[
'ÿy,
WtA
TOOL,
ASM W
riix
Twissso;""'?"'""'"
:;ÿ>
T
_;
JP»
_
Ctroor
...
.TMT
—
__
>V'v*' #*S0 in/min
her.::::
CTPS|tal
--
iKtonirtKcu MCOCOAM WIMBI.'X »
p
,>i> JOWlo/ll I!' H I*
Tttt nv.um ST WIT

roaiAt ki,f- I rm
(8) Selecting other data

Move the selected area from "PROGRAM" to "OTHER DATA" by using TAB key.
(When TAB key is pressed once again, the area is moved from "OTHER DATA" to
"PROGRAM”.)
Select and highlight all items by inputting "INPUT”.
*h: •• JUKtt-JtHCf; HAJ'SHV >>

'•rPOGB-W PDr*on«4
i
!i . I
;
;
i
\
! — r;;.:
1
:
.
;
r
•
-;;Tssri1*3 ft
ttwfc rJL*
cun iit.
«»r«
UUifl MAJX 3
...
CUJIP
...
.......
i -SSiS?-
MIL"
rums
»O
,n.T-;
ViSi
j
:
•»»!*'»
EfliSÿ
t'HJ A
r>!3 > rc-Ti/tO/ll tl:45.ni j

0,3m TBAVGWIT -.IHVerS'..- »o CX* - '
At J.
S’” r n»
(9) When "START" menu is pressed, the copy is started.

The output situation is displayed sequentially in the selected directory column on the right
side. The copy is completed when the directory column is the same as [NC] on the left
side.
84
<r*
1-5-4 Restoring the Saved Data
For example, the method of restoring the saved data backed up by the USB memory is as
follows.
(1) to (5) Set the USB memory's folder name in the same way as previous section.
::
(6) Selecting the backup data

When "USB CONTENT" -* "START" is pressed from the menu, all contents of selected
folder is displayed on the right side column.
IH I
msKTiisr
w> 253 A*A-‘

HM57 '*** Jt MUD
II »rt«T
(7) Loading the selected data

When "NC<— USB LOAD" -> "START" is pressed from the menu, the selected data is
loaded to NC. The output situation is displayed sequentially in the [NC] column on the left
side. The loading is completed when the directory column is the same as [FID] on the right
side.
Ppr
P”* .....
oun-
;i
i
C»» potto ft.'B
n,t
PtRtlftXBJU HftT.-'VIIF >i
pi
: |.
imv:,’ .Mian ti-.M. VJiWy
mz<*
. *;>
I
IJZJ !:
85
1-5-5 Saving to the various media
a
The USB memory was selected as a medium for saving in the above example. Hard disk and IC
card (front) can be used as a medium for saving.
Select the device from "DATA I/O" menu in the previous section (2).
cnuo lINUl) usa CAM DATA
DJ2K $AVIC
> Select USB

->ÿ Select hard disk
> Select IC card (front)
(D When a hard disk is selected

As for the drive and the folder, C:\MC_backup\Other is selected as default.
Select the target folder from under the above-mentioned folder by the menu "DIR SELECT".
(2) When a IC card is selected

The drive is fixed on front IC card.
Select the target folder from under the ROOT of IC card by the menu "DIR SELECT".
Other operations when the hard disk and IC card are selected apply correspondingly the USB
memory in the previous section.
86
a
1-6 File System Configuration
1-6-1 File System Format

Each size of the MAZATROL MATRIX file system is decided by the number of programs and
number of tool system parameters. Up to 960 programs can be set as a multiple of 16, and up
to 4000 tools can be set
Parameter Setting value
32 programs 2
0100 No. of programs 256 programs 16
512 programs 32
960 programs 60
For 0100, set the No. of programs/16 value.
Note 1: The No. of tools is set according to the machine specifications.

Note 2: Refer to section "1-8 Initializing the Data" for the actual formatting operations.
87
1-7 Setting Data with Special Operations
The following data cannot be set easily by the user. Special operations are required.
1-7-1 Setting the Date and Time

Date and time of MAZATROL MATRIX is automatically set when the power is ON using the
Windows internal clock as the reference. Thus, the date and time are set with the Windows clock.
(1 ) Double-click on the date above the menu or time area.
r I TPS 1 j JOOS/1O/10 [l7:4J:J6

)l 50, [vW' 50s
POSITION I TOOL PROGRAM TOOL C-COND PARAH DIAGHOS DATA 3D DISPLAY
I LAYOUT DATA I/O SETUP MAP
(2) "Date and Time Properties” of Windows is displayed, set the current date and time.
The set data is validated immediately.
Dale a.jd qhnB Properties [Yf
Date & Time j Tine Zone ii Internet Tune j
D«t£
mm®
— -------
. ....... ..... .it— .;
-- f zoos ,, .*
\
i
1 2 3
1 5 6 7 8 9 10
!1 12 13 H 15 16 17
13 19 20 2i 22 23 21
25 26 27 28 29
|
I 3:04:56PM :
Z |
Current tine rone: Gf'lT Dayl*gi>t Time
[ CX Cancel
88
1*
1-7-2 Setting the Accumulated Time
Five types of accumulated times are displayed. The total time can be changed with the following
procedure.
(1) Release the password key lock.
Refer to the section "1-1-1 Releasing the Key-lock".
(2) Select the OPTION PARAM screen, and turn 0106 bitO ON.
Note: The total time cannot be rewritten unless 030 bit 6 is turned ON.
(The other data will be rewritten.)
(3) Select"DIAGNOSIS" -> "ACCUMU. TIME" (highlight), and open the
ACCUMULATED TIME window.
~*s 3 14:51:44
'VV 50* jS T []? Orpa V\AA O. 001n/aia

VERSIOK ALARM ALARM PLC MAINTEH ROHNIKG GRAPHIC DATA
HISTORY S 1GHAL CHECK COffTROL MAIHTE. ERASE TIME
(4) Using the cursor keys, move the cursor to "TOTAL TIME”
ACCUMULATED TIME
-ifitfSl
pa
jfe -
JTXI £«cl
aiiiSl
j 200o.dd.od:
(5) Input the time data to be set, and then press the INPUT key to complete the setting.
Ex. To set 2000 hours:
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INPUT
(6) When you input data in above procedures, the 0106 bitO is automatically turned OFF.
Please select the SYSTEM PARAM screen, and confirm that 0106 bitO is OFF.
89
1-8 Initializing the Data
1-8-1 Initializing the Data

....
(2) Press the screen selection key until the following menu appears. Select [DIAGNOS]
-» [DATA ERASE] from this menu.
!Trs 0 too5/10/10
l
'W 4, S ! .
T |=—
POSiriOH
•
TOOL f PROGRAM; Vl; TOOI. . C-COHD”. PRRflM - I piRGHOS|. DATA •ÿin DISPLAY
•
LAYOUT DATA SETUP MAP
;;; - ~ ; , '
j j : j ires o :2ocs/io/i8 jveiSTS

Fvv 4% 50* [VV‘A so*
YERSIO.H ALARM ALARM . PLC MA32TTEH PLC RUHHXMG GRAPHIC ACCUMU.

;
HISTORY SIGHAL CHECK CONTROL :
| ERASE
MALHTE , ;• M
(3) Using the arrow keys and INPUT key, validate the initialization of all data on the
displayed window (highlight in blue).
•ZOOt DATA ADD WPC
TOOL P1S-E
TkxsL Qivv::f,T
i
(TTTT1HC OOMtL
WORK oppytr ALAJtH HISTORY
HACRO VAR. MADHtHWCE
COHPtfrriOPt <-99»9 lNPnY> j-.v-.WM
! START TWIT .
(4) Follow the message under the data selection field, input "-9999" and press the INPUT
key. The initialization is completed when the DATA ERASE window display
disappears.
90
a
1-8-2 Initializing the Programs
The initialization procedure of the area where the machining program is stored is shown below.
(2) Press the screen selection key until the following menu appears. Select [PROGRAM]
-» [PROGRAM FILE] from this menu.
_
ifv'j?
POSITION
PI 50.
TOOL PitOG RAM TOOL
m 5o%
C-COND.: PARAM DIAGHOS DATA
J
3„ DISPLAY
LAYOUT DATA I/O SETUP MAI?
>S 0 (1,1) INSERT
fvv 4ÿ I IP so%
WORK NO. SEARCH PROGRAM TOOL DISPLAY CHANGE DIR. PROGRAM f

EDIT PATH 2PROGRAM PROGRAM CHANGE FILE |
; .j .| ! j IrPS 0 i 2005/10/18 jl? :48:24

KA, «*
PROGRAM PROCEAM NAME PROGRAM PROGRAM PART DIP.. PROGRAM PROGRAM

REHUIIBER] BRA9E INPUT COPY EDIT SHAPE CHANGE TRANSFER
-L
i
(3) Select (highlight) [ALL ERASE] from this menu. Using the operation board keys, input
’’-9999" and then press the INPUT key. Initialization of the programs is completed
when the highlighted display of "ALL ERASE" returns to the normal display.
TPS 0 7005/10/ia |l7;42:47
pvU 4* ywv so% A3.L ERASE <-9999 INPD7> 7
i: -9999
DELETE SELECT i. V:'r;T;;; ; y PROGRAM

1 PROG. DELETE ERASE I
J
r~
i
(4) When "DIR CHANGE" is pressed, the following dialog is displayed. The program
stored area can be changed by the buttons. For the following three areas, all erase of
(3) is operated.
f >*ÿ*»
DIRFCTORv|ÿC: Proqra«a« jj-$

WORK No SIZE PKOT.P.AM KAHF.
----
----
J3 (Selected area) (Directory display)
JiTANDAKI) PROGRAM OK —I -ÿ©STANDARD PROGRAM C:\MC_MachineProgurams
HACK UP PROGRAM -E>(2)BACKUP PROGRAM C:\MC_Backup\Programs
HOI) Ol’EKAT I(KO<;KAM- >®HDD OPERATION PROGRAM
C:\MC_Direct Mode Programs
91
92
93
94
95
List of data backed up (If the folder/file do not exist, the backup is unnecessary.)
Data details Folder (file) name

1 Machining programs C:\MC_Machine Programs
2 Machining programs for HD C:\MC_Direct Mode Programs
operation _
3 Gantry programs C:\MC GL Data
4 Machining programs for backup G:\MC_Backup
5 Sampling data tool data related C:\MC sdg
aOperation control screen data C:\RUMMNG
7 Display data for NIC screen C:\nm64mdata
8 Data for graphic maintenance/
alarm navigation _ C:\m6y_ymw\Mplc
9 Custom display related module C:\Custom Display

10 3D interference check*Real C:\MC_Machine Database
simulator* 3D data for setup
11 Real simulator IN I FILE C:\m6y ymw\M740\Bin\ReleaseVealsimjni
12 NC system software C:\ncbackup
13 J2-CT parameters CAI2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat
C:\j2ctbusV***. prm
14 Maintenance data C:\mainte\mnt_j3kup.dat
15 Option data C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt
C:\mainte\(IMC serial No.).opt.old
16 I SRAM backup _ C:\mainte\srambkf.dat
17 I PLC internal memory backup C:\mainteVpfcbkf1 1 ,dat (other than NEXUS)
C:\mainte\plcbkf01 .dat (NEXUS) _
96
Matrix Data To Save
Added note in step 1 for backup-inch folder(R3)
The data for the Matrix control can now be saved to an USB Jump drive which will allows to save
complete folders easily . So, the data to save is somewhat revised from that of the M640.
Data To Save on Installation Checklist
1) Through Data I/O save the machine parameters, user parameters, cutting conditions.
Save to hard drive under Backup-inch folder if in inch mode, and Backup-mm for
metric.(R3)
2) Using either Printkey or Printscreen3(c:\mainte\printscreen3.exe) save the
following 4 pages:
A) Go to privilege mode.
(To access: Diagnos, Version, Right menu key », 1131 and Input.)
B) Option page.
C) Version page- (Note: In privilege mode, the Model number will be
displayed)
D) O-Parameter page.
E) Hardware Monitor page.
3) Copy the c:\m6y_ymw\Mplc or Tplc folder.
4) Copy the C:MC_SDG\ Alarm folder.
5) Copy the Nm64mdata\eng folder.
6) Copy *.prm and axisinfu.dat file from the c:\Program Files\j2ctbus folder.
7) Save a new mntbkup.dat file using c:\mainte\mainte.exe maintenance tool to hard
drive. Then copy the resulting mntbkup.dat and *.opt file from the c:\mainte.exe
folder to USB drive.
8) Save any 9000 series programs either by Data I/O or Explorer.
9) Save the Pic ladder. See Appendix B
If have a Gantry
10) Save parameter and programs of robot using Data I/O on robot side.
ll)Copy all of these into a folder with S.N. Machine Type and Customer Name.
Then compress to a zipped file with serial number and date(YYYYMMDD).
Example 184305_20060512.zip. For s.n 184305 and May 5th,2006.
12) Place this on the shared on “locutus”(S:) folder of

Address |Z] S:\MazdtroHMachineDataFromField\184305_QTN300_IPH
Folders x j ”! U “f feme 1 Sa| Type: iHddfed I
B§shared on tortus' (S:)
: lu GCM
3! ft i
LJ fl843O5_2OO6O504.zip 154 KB WinZip File 05/04/06 12:15PM
.t D (2004-02-03) Mahle Update 184305_QTN300_IPNI

* J O.ClassSyllabus
* jO.dassWorkbooks I This folder is Online.
* J OO MEAU consignment parts
Mazatrol\MachineDataFromField
by logging in using VPN or having someone in the office placing it there.
97
It is up to the regions how they wish to handle the data as they probably wish to
have their own backup. See Appendix 1 for more detail.
Data To Save on Service Calls if updated software.

1) Version page.
2) Alarm folder
3) Pic ladder.
4) *.LPC file if upgraded.
5) Machine and user parameters.
Appendix A Saving the Mntbkup.dat file

y .. v - '
Li
2nd
'
" \ .
-
nafA' . si
•-M&1MTENAHCE!
- NC IACKUP - I
- NC worn HC HODEI 1b X s-
FC&6551HY-NV
CONTROL UNIT TYPE
:_il 1 FCA655LHY-HV
CONTROL UNIT TYPE
1; 1 i
FOJC-MAG51-34 FCU6~NA651~34 wne
NC 5EE1A1# DEI . >j HC SERIAL* Vnc_tool Fib Folder
M6S6993033-9 M656 9930339
OPTION DATA OPTION DATA BU5DRV32.DLL 48 KB Applccticn Ex
setup, txt 1KB Text Docurrer
k px'pdv<6.s: a <r-u .-nanhrr ; NC MODEL IHFUT Dload32.exe 2b KB Applcation

o yjozl: CONTROL UNIT TYPE IHFUT I m62yticcd dl 32 KB Applcatien £x
a | fjMGSysHDNC M.exe 80 KB Applccficn
PRODUCT ID# r —- HC SERIAL# INPUT
.....— J p] W6YSV5.DLL 24 KB Applcsfcicn Ex
———-———
i
PC 3-DEM- 0007007-00000 '1$*- INPUT

-4
ID* BACKUP i j
--i • j
gW62VbY3.DLL Z4 KB Applcaicn £X
fÿPrintSrreenJ.eve 20 KR ApplcsBinn
BACKUP = 51873-DEM-0OQ7OO7-OOGOO IE# CHANGE lgm62ytd.ag.cil 28 KB Appkctlen Ex
- ha
gj m62vtaDi.nl! 143 KB Applcation Ex
pMAIWrE.KE 368 KB ApplCctiOn
s/w UPDATE I HAIHTENANCE BACKUP OPTION <-<- pj mante.ni 3 KB
; 3-ÿmainte : ~fWj mrf._bkup.dot 1 KB DAT Fib <M
g|||g||
§J —
* i ; L_J Vnc_t; :
M- P 1 Mcbeckjp?
\rÿ. \
lsti \i
•
*) -Cjnm64triat
i 1 Program I ' <7
!i
Results new mntjokup jg -'.it
Copy the new resulting mntbkup.dat and *.opt file to USB jump drive.
Appendix B- Saving of the ladder.
1) Press DIAGNOS.
2) Press VERSION. Select >RIGHT MENU> key and enter 1131 and
press Input.
3) Press LADDER
MONITOR
4 ) Select NC
FILE
98
5) Press OPEN.
6) Select OPEN again.
A)Display will say “Reading from Pic”
B) Display will say "Pic Onboard Complete"
7) Press OK.
8) Press CLEFT MENUC key twice to see LADDER in black now.
9) Select MONITOR and display will actual values.
10) If still not showing status, select START/
STOP
MONITOR
11) If No comments then may be that the comments aren't

selected to be shown. -
A) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see the VIEW, select it.
TOOLS
B) Select COMMENT -
DISPLAY
C)Make sure there is checkmark beside | | COMMENT .
D) Press SET when finished.
Still No comment?
This is probably because the comment file (*. wed) wasn't
Loaded in with ladder in steps 5 and 6.
A) Keep pressing CLEFT MENUC key till you see the
main Mitsubishi Pic Programming Tools Copyright
screen .
B) Select ENVIRON .
SETTING
C) Select NC FILE
D) SETTING
E) Click on the STORAGE PATH Box so it is highlighted

or just press arrow down key to highlight it.
F) The pathway should be C: \m6y_ymw\MPLC
G) Press SETTING menu key.
H) Press the Left menu key an select NC
FILE
Repeat steps 5 through 10 to see the ladder with comments.
12) Ifladder and comments are shown, go to next step to

save ladder and comment file.
13) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see the Copyright screen, the
LADDER must be shown as solid black.
14) Press NC
FILE
99
15) Press OPEN
16) Press OPEN again.
17) Select OK.
18) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see Copyright screen again.
19) Select I EXTERNAL
FILE
20) Press SAVE

PROJECT
21) Press EXTERNAL

F) SAVE
22) If a USB jumpdrive is inserted, then make sure that

the Drive/Path is set correctly to the drive.
23) Select PROJECT

NAME
24) Enter in an appropriate filename, normally ladder

version .
25) Press SAVE.
26) Select OK.

The ladder is now saved to the USB Jumpdrive.
Note: When the project ladder is saved, it will be a folder that includes sub-folders
containing the ladder and comments. The lathe, e-machine, and mill’s file structure are
different.
100
Appendix 1
Connect to shared drive, “Shared on Locutus” by entering the Mazak

network either from a regional office or through VPN. It is best to map that
drive so you don’t have to do a search via Network Neighborhood.
i—J Q Mazatrol
r->9 shared on 'locutus' (5:)
j B D !GCM
a C (2004-02-03) Mahle Update
4 shared on
Q MC parts order
ClMCAM_POSTS
i $0] 0_ClassSyllabus 'locutus' (S:) Cl MEAU WARRANTY STOCK
j E-iCl 0_ClassWorkbooks Cl MERGE FILES
B-Q 00_MEAU consignment parts This folder is Online. Cl MexicoTransf erPrice
Ifl Cl 10.0 CAPRMS Documentation Cl Midwest
Select an item to view its description. fj
i aCl 100 Series APC pjnn
Once there, simply go to the Mazatrol drive and copy the customer
information by using s.n. , machine type, customer name in folder. Create a
folder using this as your format.
Address |Cl S:\Mazatrol\MachineDataFromField
L=
x J
3
I Folders Name J
B Cl Mazatrol Cl 184305_QTN300JPM
: E C MachineDataFromField
| B Cl MATRIX_PRM VIEWER MachineDataFromFieli
!±j . j Utilities
The zipped file with data should be named by serial number and date.
Address |Q S: \lÿzatrol\MachineDa!:aFromFfeld\184305JÿN300JFÿ1 3$
Folders X Name l
$ÿ Cj Mazatrol Sj184305_20060504.zip
: E'CI MachineDataFromField
! | B -S) 184305JQTN300JPM 184305_QTN300_IPM
Once this is placed here, it will be copied over to the standard service drive
for safe-keeping and will be available by either intranet or through the
service web-site, http://main.mazakcorp.com/service/.
101
102
System Maintenance Work @
2 System Maintenance Work
2-1 Folder/File Configuration and Device Information
2-1-1 AT Side Module and File List

The AT side modules and files required for this system.
These contents are planned to be described in the next edition.
2-1-2 HDD Folder Configuration

The configuration of this system's HD folders.
2-1-3 Device Information

The default setting information for the Windows system device manager.
103
System Maintenance Work
1
2-2 Version Upgrading S/W
2-2-1 Preparing the Media Upgraded
NC system software (MAIN-A) and NC application software (MAIN-B) are provided in the media such as
CD-ROM. In order to execute an upgrade, prepare for IC card, USB memory, etc. according to the
following folder configuration.
(1) When IC card (Front) is used:
Folder configuration
© Create a Verup folder directly below the device (root), and put a version-name folder under the
Verup folder.
(D Only one version-name folder is allowed under the Verup folder.
(D The configuration of the folders/files under the version-name folder is as shown below.
@ Create either/both Atsys or/and Ncsys for the folder(s) under the version-name folder.
(root) The Verup folder directly below the device is the only object to be
upgraded. (The other folders and files are ignored.)
Q Hi Verup
D !l A1 Create only one version-name folder in the Verup folder.
CjJ LH Atsys
0 Diski
\-{h Setup.exe > Application (MAIN-B) upgrade file
— { e t c. )
1
P Ncsys
i~Q Bootsys.ncs
r-O NcentJ.ncs > NC system (MAI N-A) upgraded file
Ncsystem.ncs
(2) When a medium, such as IC card (Back), USB memory, etc., that can be accessed as an external
drive of the NC is used:
Folder configuration
© The file configuration under the version-name folder is as shown below.
(2) The location and number of version-name folders are arbitrarily determined.
(D Create either/both Atsys or/and Ncsys for the folder(s) under the version-name folder.
Ck) Cn AO The location and number of version-name folders are arbitrarily determined.
in AI
CjD CH Atsys
p Diski
> Application (MAIN-B) upgraded file
f-Q Setup.exe
1
dp Ncsys( e.t.c. )
j-o Bootsys ncs
> NC system (MAIN-A) upgraded file
NcentJ.ncs
Ncsystem.ncs
104
System Maintenance Work 1]
(3) When the version backed up in the HD is used:
When the application and NC system are upgraded by using the maintenance tool, the contents under
the version-name folder are automatically copied under the HD's C:\ncbackup.
(Note that the contents are copied in the Atsys folder when upgrading the application, and in the Ncsys
folder when upgrading the NC system.)
Since the versions previously upgraded with this NC are backed up in the HD, it is possible to retrieve
one of those versions by selecting an arbitrary version No. as required.
(Example) When upgrading the application of version A1
C:
Device Ncbackup
(root) O CH AO
O D A1 DAI
Cj3 D Atsys Atsys
P Diski Lp Diski
r-o Setup.exe j~L—I Setup.exe
i
(e.t.c. ) ( e t c. )
Ncsys All the contents under the version-name folder, including the file
to be upgraded, are copied in the HD's C:\ncbackup before
upgrading.
105
1
2-2-2 Upgrading Procedure
By the flow chart, the upgrading procedure is explained.

This chart explains a standard prodecre, so please confirm the details by “Version upgrade
manual" which will be offerd when every new NC S/W version is released.
START
£
Back up the saved data
Back up the customer’s current data for attention.
Back up all data according to "1-5-3 Backing Up the
Saved Data".
ik
Backup of the SRAM data
Farther, backup SRAM data in the NC unit.
Backup all the SRAM data and PLC’s data area
according to ®SRAM->HDD of "1-4-2 Backing Up
and Restoring the SRAM"
Version upgrade Install the NC PC side system (MAIN-B). Refer to

the PC side system (MAIN-B) section "2-2-4 Upgrading PC Side System
(MAIN-B)" for details.
£
Version upgrade
Install the NC system (MAIN-A).
Refer to section "2-2-3 Upgrading NC system
the NC system (MAIN-A)
(MAIN-A)" for details.
The saved data backed up is restored.

Restore the back up data
Refer to section "1-5-4 Restoring the Saved Data"
for details.
No
Parameter
Change?
(1) Add/Change the parameters according to

"Version upgrade manual".
(1) Add/Change the parameters (2) Back up the parameters according to (T)SRAM
(2) Back up the parameters after ->FLROM of "1-4-2 Backing Up and Restoring
changing the SRAM" after adding/changing.
(1) Confirm the version display after the operations

by the version display screen from the menu
Confirm after upgrading "DIAGNOS" -> "VERSION".
(2) Request the confirmation of the machine
operation to the customer after upgrading.
END (Notice) Data backed up first will be used only when it

should be necessary to get back to former state by any
chance because of unexpected phenomenon occurs after
upgrading the NC system.
106
System Maintenance Work 2
2-2-3 Upgrading NC system (MAIN-A)
Procedures for upgrading the NC system (MAIN-A) is given below.
Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open the
maintenance tool.
The operation with the maintenance tool is explained urns ;
as follows. mwm mm
j-: wrnrn START |
r in>
© Selection of device
Select a device in which an upgrading HCJWSTCH URUTS
ic wmm cw START
file is included.
& 1X50.1 SWUX' -
©
©
Execution of NC system upgrade
Click the [START] button.
Confirmation of execution
—— '
[
* ic WUMB cm
r.w
] MHHWKij BI,B»F
STAR? ]
DT
The following message appears.
.-Always push the emergency stop button when
_ _ _
upgrading with the actual machine.
$ IS IT OK
R. Mt&r
m START- 0PDATXS& K-C SYSTEH S»‘¥? :
eaBferjÿHscjp st&p buttgn $
---
i
9 OVERWRITE BOOT S'K

—Leave the checkmark for "OVERWRITE BOOT SA/V"
OK CANCEL r ON.
[OK] Upgrading process is continued. —> Go to @.

[CANCEL] Upgrading process is discontinued.
(4) Exiting the application

When executing the maintenance tool without exiting the NC screen, the NC screen is automatically
exited.
© Designation of installation file

• When IC MEMORY CARD is selected for the device, go to ©.
• When HD is selected for the device, a dialog prompting a folder selection is displayed. Select a
version-name folder and click "OK".

(By simply selecting a version-name folder, the ncsys\Bootsys.ncs file beneath it is
automatically selected.)
Browse For Folder |? ]fx]
Select the Ver. Folder
c-: D nc backup A-
Ss L_j AJJ3 Selecting a version-name folder
B D B_A8
W C_J B_A8B
8 LJ B_A8T
m LJ B_A8TE
& CJ B_AC
:+; L_J Atsys
nesys v
OK Cancel
107
© Copying of installation file
File to be installed is copied under HD's C:\ncbackup.
When C:\ncbackup\(version-name folder) is specified for the installation file, this file will not be
copied.
When the folder having the same version name already exists in C:\ncbackup, the folder is
overwritten and copied.
INSTALLER FILES BACK UP,

(Message during copying)
Now . Setup Files Back Up..
© Execution of installation with the specified file
Stop NC operation to execute upgrading with the file in which system software in the NC unit
(MAIN-A) is specified. Then, restart the NC.
SOFTWARE UPDATE
DURING NC SYSTEM RENEWAL ENVIRONMENT

S3S* MAKING.
fH
OVERWRITING NC SYSTEM S/U (Upgrading process is displayed.)
SOFTWARE UPDATE
DURING NC SYSTEM RE-ACTIVATION .
r
w
V NC SYSTEM S/W UPDATE IS DONE Vv'ITH SUCCESS.

PLEASE TURN ON THE POWER SUPPLY AGAIN.
OK
When the above message appears, press "OK" to complete the NC system upgrading process.
108
s
2-2-4 Upgrading PC Side System (MAIN-B)
Procedures for upgrading the NC application (MAIN-B) is given below.
(1) Release the password key lock. ( Refer to the section "1-1-1 Releasing the Key-lock")
(2) Check the Windows task bar in the bottom of the screen, and if there exist any applicatons in running,
close all of them.
(3) Upgrading procedure with using the maintenance tool
Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open the
maintenance tool.
The operation with the maintenance tool is explained as follows.
® Selection of device
Select a device in which an upgrading
j sijiftirf Y
mwm mm-
ipitU?
-T,-— -
m
rjmaemaat sorrtttSE mtmt
file is included. & ic mam cm? $rm r
r is>
(2) Execution of application upgrade
Click the [START] button. "
— *S
• . i* ic am*? a®
r gp
idUttCT srrup TOOL VP&ATS:

START
« ic mam cu®
r up
START
J
(3) Confirmation of execution
The following message appears. f C-lt irmTC |KIISTXKiKCEj OACKVP OPTICK EOT
15 IT OK TO START INSTALLATION ?
[Yes] Version upgrading is continued. -* Goto @.
Yes No [No] Version upgrading is discontinued.
® Exiting the application

When the maintenance tool is executed without exiting the NC screen, the NC screen is automatically
exited.
(D Designation of installation file

• When IC MEMORY CARD is selected for the device, go to ©.
• When HD is selected for the device, a dialog prompting a folder selection is displayed.
Select a version-name folder and click "OK".

(By simply selecting a version-name folder, the Atsys\Disk1\Setup.exe file beneath it is
automatically selected.)
Browse For Folder

Select the Ver. Folder
m
ri j nc backup Selecting a version-name folder.
+• LJ AJJ3
+ :_] B_AS
+' _J 6_A8B
+ _J B_A8T
to U B _A8TE
* _J
-
'±
_
B.AC
i
:_j
j Atsys
ricsys
OK" ]| Cancel "]
109
System Maintenance Work §
© Copying of installation file
A file to be installed is copied under HD's C:\ncbackup.
When C:\ncbackup\(version-name folder) is specified for the installation file, this file will not be copied.
When the folder having the same version name already exists in C:\ncbackup, the folder is overwritten
and copied.
warn (Message when starting to copy)
.
Now Installer Fites Back Up . . .
Copying— i (Message during copying)
m
data2.cab
From 'Diskl' to ’Diskl'
|N* to-
—
; <•' _ -[ Cancel j
25 Seconds Remaining
(7) Uninstallation of existing system

Uninstallation of an existing system is executed.
Go to ® when initially writing an application or when uninstallation has already been executed.
a
So# Sstfut (Executing uninstallation)
k
[Cancel] Upgrading process is discontinued upon

r caa i canceling the uninstallation.
(Completed uninstallation)
p
:v J j
[Finish] -> Goto ®.
110
<D Execution of installation with the specified file

The installer automatically starts and installation is carried out with the specified file.
sssaaBr****’-
to*&**aS$**&« VteMl utsm
Sr'«.y*S>w fcOMCMto iifck ffe*4.
'
S
1
jH&fcSDtb'MMMM
c 3 1 <w~3 ... [Next] Upgrading process is continued.
[Cancel] Upgrading process is discontinued upon
canceling the installation.
(Message during installation)

CV.\M74flÿNÿÿwV5igeftN£L0IJL
|p|T
C; VVV i n dows\system 3 2\d ri vt; rs \V irtiidldiivai.exe jx) Note: When the alarm shown left appears
immediately before the completion of
YMANAGER not exist !!
installation, click "OK".
I 3
(Completed installation)
P tniUHVhwW Wl.'ÿtrf LTwptHn
tbviniifdtiMfi WumK-ii iÿeRtA

FAT tikf FrusSÿj m&.
[Finish] Upgrading process is completed upon

exiting the installer.
f )
111
i
2-3 Adding/Setting Software Options
2-3-1 Preparing S/W Option

The S/W option of MATRIX is officially sold and provided in the Windows file form.
The file is named "(NC serial No.).opt".
For example, if this NC's serial No. is M7123456789, the option file is provided under the file
name of M71 23456789.opt.
Copy the option file officially provided onto the USB memory or IC card (front) for the
preparation.
(1) When USB memory is used (Recommended)
The option file installed is selected with the maintenance tool. So, the option file can be
stored on an arbitrary folder.
(2) When IC card (front) is used
Store only one option file (The extension ".opt") to "root" of IC memory card. (It is not
possible to select the file by the maintenance tool.)
Difference from conventional option

The option was provided by ROM cassette until M640 series. When purchasing an option for
the second time or later, only difference information between the previous time and this time is
written in ROM cassette. Therefore, two or more ROM cassettes exist when the S/W option is
purchased additionally. For example, when NC unit is exchanged, all the stored ROM
cassettes must be installed in order.
In MATRIX, the option is supplied by file (fixed file name is given for each NC serial No.). So,
even if the options are purchased two or more times, all option data reflected for past
purchase history is written to the latest option file. The differences of option handling between
the conventional model and MATRIX are described below.
M640 series MATRIX series

Type Option ROM cassette Option file (Windwos file)
Media Dedicated ROM cassette USB memory, IC card, etc.
Option data Data of difference from last The always latest option data
time
Keeping after All option ROM cassettes are The latest option file is saved in the
option is installed attached to the machine. following of NC's FID. (automatic
saving with maintenance tool)
C:\mainte\(NC serial No ).opt
112
i
2-3-2 Adding/Setting Software Options
The S/W option addition and setup methods are explained as an example of using the USB
memory use.
(1) Set the USB memory stored option file to NC unit.
(2) Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to
open the maintenance tool.
(3) (Only when S/W option is added) S«J'*i.‘niMANa ickns 51

xutnteuHcc
Select "MAINTENANCE" mepu, . JK BACKUP
? : W” mriFT
and click [>] button.
O5KTK0I, WIT
FCW-WSlSKW
rm “Sail. IT
BC SttUU wi- 5j itc aemur
xniuttTH ~ *
®123«S«?85
The current NC's option contents OFTIOK PATA OFTIO!* BATA
are written to
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt . m mm ism I
a mtvim ptat% eoifraji wit ww' iitrer j
by this operation. NC SSSIS.U MSOT j
Normally, the file is automatically :
created when the option is set
last time as described later.
sm KFOATE OFTIOK |
When the option is set for the first time, this operation is not required because there is no
option data in NC.
(4) Select the "OPTION" menu, and TpOtS _ li®

err i os
display the "Select a Option ; SOTUiC
Files- & .t.o nmm w soresto
screen.
(5) Select the [HD] of "SETTING"

menu. \
Select [1C MEMORY CARD]

when option file is prepared
in front 1C card. UPDATE [ «AliifENAKOE| DACRt# OFT IOK EXIT
(6) Click the "SETTING" button.
113
A dialog prompting an option file selection is displayed. Specify drive/path/option file name.
(When the 1C memory card is selected, this dialog is not displayed.)
Sitfcil .1 Optkw Hlrs |
3 fee}; US*
Cjtxea
SfyBixxs* 13ft
i3
'
;
: •-U
0
M? &$<*#**& 5
3B
m FfcgiSSa?
Ftes
fmSem —
r_w~"
Specify a file and click the "Open" button. The specified file is copied to C:\mainte\, and the
contents of option file is ready to be set in the NC unit.
When the option file having the same file name as that of the specified file already exists in
C:\mainte\, confirmation message for overwriting appears.
[Yes] The file is overwritten and option setting is started.

Note that the extension of the original option file must be
changed from "opt" to "opt.old" when saving.
V MAY I OVERWRITE ?
HIIIE:::)] No [No] The file is not overwritten and option setting is

discontinued.
Note that when specifying the option file in C:\mainte\, option is set to the NC unit by the file
specified without copying.
Option setting is completed when the display of the "SETTING" button in the option setting
screen turns to normal from the grayed state.
Alarm message appears in the following cases, and the option setting is discontinued.
When C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt is a file with a different serial No.

from that of NC. B’-. y -Q
2 or more option files exist in C:\mainteV OPTION ERROR
2 or more option files are created by copying the specified file
in to C:\mainteV
(*) In other word, the number of option files (file having the extension
name of ".opt") in C:\mainte\ has to be only one and its file name has
to have the same serial No. as that of NC unit.
(7) The maintenance tool is ended.

(8) Confirm the option effective setting has been updated on the option screen after
turning NC power supply ON again.
114
i
2-3-3 Attention for adding S/W option
The state of option setting is changed from «A» to «B» by adding an option. The following
indicates the transition of the option setting.
Before setting the option addition

NC
Option «A»
HD
C:\mainte
L (NC serial No.).opt . - -Option «A»
After setting the option addition

NC
Option «B»
HD
Renamed
USB memory
and seved
(NC serial No.) .opt C:\mainte
Option «B»
t;(NC serial No.). opt
NC serial No.). opt.old
Option «B»
Option «A»
The latest option file is saved on HD as " (NC serial No.).opt", and the second last option file is
saved as "(NC serial No ). opt old".
When the option setting is different from the customer intended state by a wrong
purchase/order etc. of the option, return to the state of option «A» according to the following
procedures, and confirm the option arrangement again.
Method of return to the previous option state

Rename the option file under "C:\mainte" on Explorer:
(NC serial No ).opt —>(NC serial No.). new
(NC serial No.).opt.old->(NC serial No ).opt
Install the option file C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt from maintenance tool again.
115
2-4 Servicing with the Maintenance Tool
(1) Start up "Explorer" from "Start" menu (right click), and then start the maintenance tool
(C:\mainte\mainte.exe). Select "MAINTENANCE" menu to open the MAINTENANCE
screen. The NC model, serial No. and control unit type can be input on the screen.
Refer to the "Maintenance Tools Instruction Manual" (BNP-B3934-902) for details.
3MAINTENANCE TOOLS §8®

MAINTENANCE
' NC “(C) (a) BACKUP ---
NC MODEL NC MODEL
;
FCA750PY-N02
CONTROL UNIT TYPE
_il FCA750PY-N02
CONTROL UNIT TYPE
FCU7-MA513-22 FCU7-MA513-22
j
NC SERIAL# (b)DEL. >j NC SERIAL#
M7001234567 M7123456789
OPTION DATA OPTION DATA
A production number
(d) NC MODEL INPUT
note to a service part (e) CONTROL UNIT TYPE INPUT
(g) NC SERIAL# INPUT
S/W UPDATE MAINTENANCE BACKUP OPTION EXIT
The correspondence of each button is explained in the following section. (This is not
related to the work procedures.)
(a) Backing up from FLROM to HD
The NC model, serial No. control unit type and option

data registered in FLROM are written to HD,
ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE DATA TO BACKUP FILE ? C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat ••• Maintenance data
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.J.opt ••-Option data
Yes No
(b) Deleting backup files

The HD backup files (C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) are
deleted.
V ?j ARE YOU SURE TO DELETE BACKUP FILE ?
Yes No
(c) Writing from HD to FLROM
The NC model, serial No., control unit type and option

data ( \mainte\(serial No.).opt) saved in the HD backup
1J AitF YOU Sf SlF TO RFSsOiif DATA ftACfrt P FIiF > file (C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) are registered in the
Nr FLROM
Yes f4o
~ORD _|si A password is required to return the product information

to the NC.Only Mitsubishi personnel can carry out this
procedure
-r
OK CA1ICEL | CLEAR
116
(d) NC model input
The NC model can be selected from the combo box
J or can be directly input.
After inputting the NC model, click on the "OK” button.
The NC model in the backup file
r •3 (C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) will be updated, and the NC
MODEL in the display window of the MAINTENANCE
screen will be updated simultaneously.
OK ] CANCEL | CLEAR Press "CANCEL" to cancel input of the NC model,
and press "CLEAR" to clear the items input in the
combo box.
(e) Control unit type input

n:n:ir
The control unit type can be selected from the combo
box or can be directly input. After inputting the control
unit type, press on the "OK" button. The control unit
type in the BACKUP display window of the
3 MAINTENANCE screen will be updated.
OK 1 CANCEL j CLEAR
(f) NC serial No. input

NC SERIAL* Input nine characters after M7.
After inputting the serial No., click on the "OK" button.
The input will be checked. In the input check, the No.
i of input characters and the validity of the characters will
M?r be checked.
If the input check is okay, the NC SERIAL # in the
BACKUP display window of the MAINTENANCE screen
OK CANCEL CLEAR will change.
The backed up options will be cleared when the serial
No. is changed. Note that the options will be cleared
when the password is input and the NC data is written
in.
(g) Writing to HD FLROM of service part unit
The NC model, serial No. control unit type and option

data written in the HD backup file
A&F YOU to aesto&e DATA FROM fc&oar n F > (C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) are written to FLROM of the
service part.
Vet Mu The service part is a special unit whose “serial No.” is
M700’ (Two characters following M7 are 0.
Arbitrary characters since the third character.)
The function is same as C, but the password input is
not required when writing in the service part.
117
118
r~ r
2-5 Inputting and Outputting Ladders

The ladders stored in the NC's FLROM can be output to the external media by ladder monitor.
Conversely, the ladders stored on the external media can be input to the NC's FLROM/SRAM.
Starting the ladder monitor

The ladder monitor is starded in 1 131mode
3*/3
EUlsiilP®-- !”s * 'SO«S/i«/*o
."W so* ]ia Orpe rVV'A 0 . OOSn/ttir*
DIACWOS VERSION DIftGNOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE JIPADtJALE| LADDER VERSION
MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR § MONITOR
Two ladders exist because the ladders are operated by two CPUs in NC unit.
The ladder input/output must execute both COS1 and COS2.
2-5-1 Saving to External Media

The procedure is shown below:
© Open the ladder which runs in NC on onboard edition area.
© Save the opened ladder in external media.
NC HN123card External
(Vertual:COS2 side) / ©
7?
NC HN482card NC HN163card Projectÿ/\ÿ — Project
(SRAM/FROM) (Real:COS1 side) Save / Open
V*4.
PC
FROM area A-* side
/ ROM
Area for / wrile Save
COS1
Temporary
Area for
storage © Onboard
edition area
Copy when area
COS2 Open
the power is
I T
ON
n—<= \
"T
Execute ladder Edit/Monitor
(a) Click "ENVIRON. SETTING" -ÿ"CONNECT NC Setting" to select the ladder of

COS1 side.
I Ull
1 ill !£
r iLC ‘Vlf
r~ u©
(b) Select " M01" from the list, and press "SET". (The selected environment is displayed
on the the lower right of the screen. M01 is displayed in case of the COS1 side. M02
is displayed in case of the COS2 side.)
119
CONNECT Hfr SETTING". x
OTjilJeiMiirsa
SET
Warning:
When connection destination WC is changed, the
PLC data on onboard is lost.
i
i ! i
aT' SST :
i
I
(c) Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key", and click "NC FILE".
i I M!
SC OTOM/L Df/IKH.
fill nir rut •• \ Wuswi. JITHhC
(tlP :
(d) Click ‘•OPEN".

i i t$i
Oik Sflfc VUUFY K*C

WJ1E ten it I riawi W5§OP BSS?
(e) Click "OPEN" -> "OK".

X
-
373»j>: 1 1S 05101 ? 05/10/20 20:50:20 130 532Bvt«
»"tt er
PLC/»«tw*rk 05/10/20 20:50:20 33 & B v t e
SEL. ALL SELECT

OPEN PARAM.
/CANCEL + PFDC.
(0 Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key" twice, and click "EXTERNAL FILE".
! I »i
MU rs£c c-sr ulABWs.

I
If IF
L
(M3 i
(g) Click "SAVE PROJECT"

I | M)1
r
*35£. j rr fixicT s
(h) Click "EXT ERNAL SAVE".
120
| SAVE- PROJECT a
a
-J g] PROCRAM
-0 373HXI19 051017
'.r: {*3 Parameter
0 parent
EXTERNAL SEL. ALL SELECT

SAVE /CANCEL PARAM.
i PROC.
(i) Set "DRIVE", "Path" and "Project name". Click "SAVE".

EXTERNAL SAVE - 0
DRIVE ffra j
LIST
Fi le name PLC ty pel Dale of creating | Heading
m.. Oi rectory
Drive/Polh _ [D'Vtenp
l«d_O5O0O5|
Title
SAVE CANCEL
(j) When the following dialog is displayed, the saving is completed. Click "OK".
, -l‘ v CospIctecJ.
m
;sv>
!
m&m
(k) Return to the following screen pressing ”F1 key" twice.

i | toll
I
fur M;
fill LXttF. ICiTX flWOi. | i tar eve
j.
(I) Click "ENVIRON. SETTING". (This work is not necessary when there is no COS2
side. Jump to (o), and end the ladder monitor.
t I Oil
i uu ? “itr WCtR £C«ICt ; ttiV*. C*!*/XG. LUGKX. •ar

“ j
(m) Select " M01" from the list, and press "SET" on "CONNECT NC SETTING".
121
CONNECT NC SETTING , - '
IS m SET
Warning:
When connection destination NC is changed, the
(n) Operate (c) to (k), and save the COS2 side ladder.
(o) End the ladder monitor clicking "END".

i I til
t
nu FJU UtWR iCYICC ?}MA. ClJJJQSGS.
SOW | JCU1 DC
2-5-2 Loading from External Media

The procedure is shown below:
© Clear the ladder which runs in temporary storage area.
(2) Open the project saved in external media on the onboard edition area.
© Load the opened ladder to the temporary storage area in NC.
@ Save the ladder in ROM area.
if the steps of (2) and © are executed without deleting the ladder of step © when the project
name between the ladder executed in the temporary storage area and the ladder saved in the
external media differ, two ladders are registered (multi-ladder specification).
NC HN123card External
(Vertual : COS2 side)
\
media ©
Project /x Project
NC HN482card NC HN163card
(SRAM/FROM) (Real :COS1 side) SaveZ r Open
© 0
Erase ladder
© side
FROM area
Area for ROM write Save

COST
J Temporary
Onboard
storage
Area for edition area
Copy when area
COS2 Open
the power
is ON
Execute Edit/Monitor
(a) Click "ENVIRON. SETTING" "CONNECT NC SETTING" to select the ladder of

COS1 side
i I tfil
rm ( il<
L'siV-JW-
* ME
'I
UJitiK tevicr nr-jn.
j SISS I iCLP LUi
122
(b) Select " M01" from the list, and press "SET". (The selected environment is displayed
on the the lower right of the screen. M01 is displayed in case of the COS1 side. M02
is displayed in case of the COS2 side.)
CONNECT NC SETTING x
SI
i SET
Warning:
I
arjp ECT i
i
'
(c) Return to the following screen pressing ”F1 key", and click "NC FILE".
i | Ml
HU. fC DCDHiU. Wirot. i

;
*1P W)
rju: rite
i
2T11HC \
(d) Click ,,DELETEM.

t i Mi
i
Cftt SAYt vtwrr ICXTE fcrawT
1 i
(e) Click "SEL. ALL/CANCEL", and all data is selected.

X
-
£/\ 373»lXl 13 05101? 05/10/20 ?0:50‘20 130S$?0yt«
•' Pirsroete/
PLC/M«two/h 03/10/20 20.50:20 3360vtc
$CLECT
DELETE f sa.
/cwa
AIL
|
(0 Click "DELETE".
i ! Wl
t I~I &Sf ! ! S&

I
—
(g) Click "YES" on "DELETE CONFIRMATION" screen.
123
3
It» aÿcil iwJ I He i® deleted.
Is ii all riiM1?
El SO
(h) If the ladder is “RUN" state, "STOP" is urged. Click "YES”.
FtC »* »ri s ftlW stile,
E
J* &Ieiipn «>rfc»r®ed ifl*r »lgp Pt,C? f
NO
(i) When the following dialog is displayed, the deleting is completed. Click "OK".
—
ftSMsttid . ,-E P|
»
, CcfttpJeletJ.
-V»
ft,;
(j) Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key" twice, and click "EXTERNAL FILE".
rant uivu‘ w text I | Ml
I
flit
j.
tc
rSLT B7a* 1
SB® j ! IM?
(k) Click "OPEN PROJECT".

*3 iaitr I I tail
rgg. i
n&< j | ffi
(I) Set "DRIVE" and "File name", and click "SELECT1.

|:$aECI; PROJECT? 0
DRIVE
Jiilsjsff, I PLC typeFPate of c i ea tins [Head i nr

E&.. Di rectory
B:
Dr i ve/Pftt h jD: Vlcmp i

Project moie [ij>d_05030fi |
SELECT CANCEL
i
(m) Click "OPEN".
124
OPEN PROJECT :
m
•a Iÿ.CS0805.,:| rKUUHAM
Q 373HX1 13 051017
Parameter
£2 param
SEL. ALL SaECT SELECT

CP EH PARAH.
/CANCEL PROG. PROJECT
(n) When a message that prompts you to comfirm overwriting is displayed, click "ALL
YES".
UP-- •- X
The program (373MX119.«P?) already exists.
Are you sure OK to overwrite?
YES ALL YES NO
(o) When the following dialog is displayed, the loading is completed. Click "OK”.
iHE.Mwrij -
Cc«»lete«3.
a
i
sail
(p) Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key" twice, and click "NC FILE”.
'ÿ•••n't. ;.5U5.'; H.I* i i »>i
Pil> M:
! S I
:
HflH i
rue
1 -
(q) Click ’'SAVE”

4 t | eat)
Oft't SAVE VERIFY JSk tGLU FCfirUT
(r) Click "SAVE".
125
x]
j= -FREE SPACE VOLLWE •

“a PROGRAM LARGEST CONTIGUOUS
3 [arÿ
..£2 373WX \ 19
Par ansttr
051017
! r BYTE
Par am
TOTAL FREE SPACE
r BYTE
FREE
SPACE
YOLUUE
SEL. ALL SELECT

SAVE /CANCEL PARAM.
+ PROG.
(s) When the following dialog is displayed, the loading is completed. Click "OK".
;X
Collet c4;
(1) Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key", and click "ROM WRITE".
esni; j.ifi'.-fr. TO zrp I |
; :
era Ml iCLZK reran i WSl'.*’
(u) Click "YES".

! PW wire •" -• X
• TStflPiAflV »H3KY
Cd.lt or CfCAHIC
1J
I'-Alt t> CREA11»;
IV) >co tr It* it In RGB?
(v) When a message that prompts you to comfirm overwriting ROM is displayed, click
"ALL YES".
wsm
AM data in the lar get *i 1 1 be deleted,
Ihe program rersory dale oil I bs written into ISe target.
Do you lly *on( to execute? YES NO
(w) When the following dialog is displayed, the ROM writing is completed. Click "OK".
126
ry.
C«*ol«leiJ.
a
$
'
llilll
rÿ
(x) Click "PLC RUN/STOP,,.
¥ i i «i
troi SAVE !I VIR1FY KM
wire IGITC rcfÿi
-&> | gg |
f
(y) Click "YES"
m
xl
STATUS [SlS
NO
Is PLC started?
(2) Return to the following screen pressing "F1 key" once.

i | SOI
? i i
rnr Ltfotn tcvict p«wi. KlAGfCi. « j tar
(aa) Click "ENVIRON. SETTING". (This work is not necessary when there is no COS2
side. Jump to (dd), and end the ladder monitor.)
i I ail
!
FILE
i
«;
fits. l/iCtT*
JL
soviet rlf-JU. ?|ACME.
fii •nr M)
(bb) Select " MOT' from the list, and press "SET" on "CONNECT NC SETTING".
CONNECT NO SETTING
'TTTT'f! Tj
- f
\* X
Miasa«g«8afflHI SET
Wa rn i ng :
(cc) Operate (c) to (z). and save the COS2 side ladder.
(dd) End the ladder monitor clicking "END".

1 I dt
FILL } “Sr UiCCP i :evKt iff}*. C- IfirtZ. SI'S j -w Dfl
127
2-6 Replacing the HD
2-6-1 Replacing the HD

Preparation
• HDD unit for replacement (Installed NC system (MAIN-B) of the same version as customer)
When MAIN-B has not been installed in the HDD unit, prepare NC system for upgrading
by the USB memory etc.
• USB memory for data backup
The replacement procedure of HD is shown below.

Note: This method assumes that the NC is running properly. If Windows does not start, this
method cannot be used.
START
Back up the customer’s current data.

Backup of the saved data Back up all data according to "1-5 Backing Up the
Saved Data.".
4
Backup of HDD internal data
Backup the HDD internal data.
Refer to section "2-6-2 Backup data of HD" for details.
The HDD unit is removed, and it is replaced by a

Replacement of HDD unit new HDD unit.
At this time, replace a front cover of a new HDD
unit to a front cover of former HDD unit (The name
plate and the WindowsCOA seal are affixed).
V
Upgrading of NC application When MAIN-B has not been installed to replaced
HDD or when the version should be upgraded to
the latest version, install prepared MAIN-B
according to "2-2-4 Upgrading PC Side System
\7 (MAIN-B)".
All erase in program area Erase the all program area on PROGRAM FILE
screen. Refer to section "1-8-2 Initializing the
Programs" for details.
Restoration of backup data Restore the backed up data by following steps.

(T) Restore the backed up data to HDD according
to "2-6-3 Restoring the Backed up Data”.
© Restore the all saved data according to "1-5-4
Restoring the Saved Data" .
V
Back up the NC side data to new HDD.
Data backup to HDD
Refer to section "2-6-4 Backing up the NC Side
Data to HD" for details.
END
128
sv*
2-6-2 Backup data of HD
Copy the specific files in HD to an external memory of the USB memory etc. by the Explorer.
List of data backed up (If the folder/file do not exist, the backup is unnecessary.)
Data details Folder (file) name

...
operation _
3 Gantry programs_ C:\MC GL Data
4 Machining programs for backup C:\MC Backup
5 Sampling data, tool data related C:\MC sdg
6 Operation control screen data C:\RUMMNG
7 Display data for NC screen C:\nm64mdata
8 Data for graphic maintenance/
alarm navigation _ C:\m6y_ymw\Mplc

10 3D interference check- Real C:\MC_Machine Database
simulator-3D data for setup
11 Real simulator INIFILE C:\m6y_ymw\M7401Bin\Release\realsim.ini
13 J2-CT parameters C:\j2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat
C:\j2ctbusV“*.prm
14 Maintenance data C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat _
15 Option data C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt.old
16 SRAM backup C:\mainte\srambkf.dat _
17 PLC internal memory backup C:\mainte\plcbkf11.dat (other than NEXUS)
C:\mainte\plcbkf01.dat (NEXUS)_
Note: For applications installed after shipment and the network settings made after shipment,
check with Yamazaki and backup if necessary.
129
HI
2-6-3 Restoring the Backed up Data
The backed up data according to "Backup of HDD internal data" is restored to replaced HD.
List of data restord

(If the folders/files listed in the table below do not exist at backup, it is unnecessary to restore.)
Items marked with
• under [Resore] in the table below are restored.
It is unnecessary for the items with O to restore, because these items are directly restored from
NC internal data by the maintenance tool in the next step.
Data details Restore Folder (file) name

operation _
3 Gantry programs C:\MC GL Data
4 Machining programs for backup C:\MC_Backup
5 Sampling data, tool data related C:\MC_sdg
6 Operation control screen data C:\RUMMNG
7 Display data for NC screen C:\nm64mdata
8 Data for graphic maintenance/ C:\m6y_ymw\Mplc
alarm navigation _
10 3D interference check- Real C:\MC_Machine Database
simulator-3D data for setup
11 Real simulator INIFILE C:\m6y ymw\M740\Bin\Release\realsim.ini
13 J2-CT parameters C:\j2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat
C:\j2ctbus\***.prm
14 Maintenance data O C:\rnainte\mnt bkup.dat
15 Option data O C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt
SRAM backup C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt.old
16 PLC internal memory backup O C:\mainte\srambkf.dat
17 Machining programs O C:\mainte\plcbkf1 1.dat (Other than NEXUS)
O C:\mainte\plcbkf01.dat (NEXUS)_
Note: For applications installed after shipment and the network settings made after shipment,
check with Yamazaki and reset if necessary.
130
2-6-4 Backing up the NC Side Data to HD
The data of the item with O in the previous page is restored by backing up to HD in which NC
side data has been exchanged.
(1) SRAM data and PLC internal memory backup

Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open
the maintenance tool.
Select the "BACKUP" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS".
t
'.‘;l
•SACK®?
s i
FLASH KOX
JJ
ECT-DATA IxO
_id C do t
l
&-V BACKUP
a OPTIOK
L EXIT
Click the [>] button on the lower right.

Backup the some all SRAM data (2MB) in NC and PLC internal memory area to HDD.
Refer to the ® of "1 -4-2 Backing Up and Restoring the SRAM" for detail.
(2) FLROM maintenance data (the NC model, serial No. and option, etc.) backup
Select "MAINTENANCE" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS".
/
m KAIUTTJJAiiCE
r-
KC MODEL
LXA7SI1P e- m?
COKTKDJ. TJK t T TYPE
LUIIV-KASI
/<i n
!
PY-mi;1
a.-irrsoi. mi JT TYPE
KCU7-MA!.
KC CiERI AL* Df:i A; VC SERIAL*
X7001234S6?
OPTIOK DATA
/
/
f1
K? 123*56783
OPTlOIf DATA
/ i
A production bJt KC KODKI. ttrpltr
note to o service ijJoxt IT
\ COKTHOL
1
IJIflT TTKK IKKITT
/ V
KC SESIAL* IHrUT
I
\
>
C.-» UPDATE 3 n,M;rTE)iA;Ki|| SJOSIP OCTIOK EXIT
\
Click the [>] button on the upper right.
The NC model, serial No. and option data registered in FLROM are backed up to HD.
The Names of backup files are fixed as "C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat" and " (NC serial
No).opt".
Refer to the (a) of ”2-4 Servicing with the Maintenance Tool" for details.
131
2-7 Replacing Control Unit
2-7-1 Replacing Control Unit

Preparation
• HDD unit for replacement (Installed NC system (MAIN-B) of the same version as customer)
When MAIN-B has not been installed in the HDD unit, prepare NC system for upgrading
by the USB memory etc.
• USB memory for data backup
The replacement procedure of NC unit is shown below.
CÿSTARTÿ)
Backup of the saved data Back up the customer's current data

Back up all data according to "1-5 Backing Up the
Saved Data".
£
Backup of the NC unit internal data
Backup the NC unit internal data.
The target data is the following data.
(D All SRAM data and internal PLC data
@ The maintenance data in FLROM (including the
options)
® The ladders in FLROM
Refer to section "2-7-2 Backing up the NC Unit
Internal Da1a" for details.
V The control unit is removed, and it is replaced by a new
Replacement the control unit control unit.
At this time, replace a front cover of a new control unit
to a front cover of former control unit (The name plate is
affixed).
r Clearing of SRAM area Clear the data in the SRAM mounted in the
replaced control unit's HR482. Refer to section "1-2
<0
Installation of NC system
Completely Erasing the Memory" for details.
Install the NC system software to NC unit's

FLROM. Refer to section "2-2-3 Upgrading NC
system (MAIN A)" for details.
Restore the backed up data by following steps.

Restoration of backup data
(D Restore the backed up data according to "2-7-3
Loading the Backup Data" .
® Restore the all saved data according to "1-5-4
Restoring the Saved Data" .
Calender setting Set the date and time.
Refer to section "1-7-1 Setting the Date and Time"
A for details.
Data backup for emergency Back up a part of the SRAM data like the parameter
etc. to FLROM in preparation for various data
areas' breaking down. Refer to section "2-7-4
Backing Up Data for Emergency Purposes" for
END
deÿis.
132
2-7-2 Backing up the NC Unit Internal Data
The following NC unit internal data is backed up.
© All SRAM data and internal PLC data
(2) The maintenance data in FLROM (Including the options)
(3) The ladders in FLROM
r
(1) SRAM data and PLC internal memory backup
Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open
the maintenance tool.
Select the "BACKUP" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS".
/
3iUEfnH«K£;rqG6.s
-BACXOF
D
FLASK ROX
IZLii /
/
SBAX
EXT-I'ATÿI-0
_LJ CD C :s
/tc' 51-mLOc t
*
/
/
/
Uft'iTE Mill lAHCEj j DACJOIP J|| OfTICH j EXIT

Backup the some all SRAM data (2MB) in NC and PLC internal memory area to FIDD.
Refer to the (3) of "1-4-2 Backing Up and Restoring the SRAM" for detail.
(2) FLROM maintenance data (the NC model, serial No. and option, etc.) backup
Select "MAINTENANCE" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS”.
/
mm mm H
HAIHTEHMCZ:
JtC
i BACK'D?
KC KODEi / HC MODEL
PY-KD2
CO XT KOI liKIT TYPfii /TQ J--Y- im 2
COlfTKOL 1131 IT TYPE
PCIIT-XAM:*-?? / k) KD7-HA513-3?
I/
KC SERIAL/ i-
)rt: SERIAL/
X/001234567 f H7123A5i785
OPTICS DATA OPT I OH DATA
A product icA i KC XOOKL ItiPbT j

&ote to a »crv :co port
'l COKTROI. UK I T TVPK l jrpirr |
; \
/
/
1
S-V irTOXTEj mi;iTEMiMCz|| !i ornoir EXIT
,.;l ...
i
Click the [>] button on the upper right.
The NC model, serial No. and option data registered in FLROM are backed up to HD.
The Names of backup files are fixed as "C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat" and " (NC serial
No).opt".
Refer to the (a) of "2-4 Servicing with the Maintenance Tool" for details.
133
(3) FLROM ladder backup

Backup the ladders on "LADDER MONITOR" screen of NC.
Refer to the section "2-5-1 Saving to External Media" of "2-5 Inputting and Outputting
Ladders" for details.
Two ladders exist because the ladders are operated by two CPUs in NC unit.
The ladder must backup both COS1 and COS2.
(Example)
The step (i) of the drive, path and project name settings are as follows:
Drive/path C:\mainte\ladder
Project name COS1 side—>cos1
COS2 side—>cos2
134
2-7-3 Loading the Backup Data
The following backed up data is loaded to NC unit.
® All RAM data and PLC internal data
(D The maintenance data in FLROM (including the options)
(3) The ladders in FLROM
(1) Loading SRAM data

Stard the maintenance tool, and select the BACKUP screen.
J
si05
BACiCUP
ST) m
FU5K J»X
sax
IDCT-DATi/l/Q
C:\JW
/
ijax e*v5TWLb>:( .dot
1
/
S'K UPDATE JjlAjfrTfflANCEj BACKUP |( OPTION j EXIT
Click the [<] button on the lower left.

"C:\mainte\srambkf.dat" and "C:\mainte\plcbkf11.dat" (or "plcbkf01.dat") in FIDD are loaded to
SRAM in NC unit.
(2) Loding FLROM maintenance data (the NC model, serial No. and option, etc.)
Select "MAINTENANCE" screen on "MAINTENANCE TOOLS".
/
fUS I
jJAIlITtKAJICE
KC i SAC y.vp
KC MODEL
KCA7SUEy- KUJ
COKTROS. UKtT TYPE
KU'/'K AS13*-??
/ÿ •
KC MCC'EX.
ECA75U PY-KUL’
cojrrKOL trsix TYPE
F(,U7-«A5N-7?
KC SERIA1* KC SERIAL*
H712345(B7B9
CTTIOK DATA / OPT DOM DATA
A pr<oduct ion r.uric-sr KC MODE!. IKFi;r

cote t o •» serv 1C«* JWl \ COIfTROJ. inur TYPE IK PUT J
>-
’
/ \ . .isEgr,’Z j
/
/ \
S'V UPDATE
*
j XAIIlTGUilCrjj OiCSXIl\ I OPTIOK EXIT
Click the [<] button on the upper left.

"C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat" in FIDD is loaded to FLROM in NC unit.
Refer to the (b) of "2-4 Servicing with the Maintenance Tool" for details.
135
(3) Loading FLROM ladder
Load the ladders on "LADDER MONITOR" screen of NC.
Refer to the section "2-5-2 Loading from External Media” of "2-5 Inputting and Outputting
Ladders" for details.
In the step (i) of the drive, path and project name settings, select the drive, path and
project name set in (3) of "2-7-2 Backing up the NC Unit Internal Data", and load both
COS1/COS2 ladders.
136
2-7-4 Backing Up Data for Emergency Purposes

Backup the parameters, etc., into the FLROM for emergency purposes.
Stard the maintenance tool, and select the BACKUP screen.

L
V.
Btcxvp
1
1
FUSS BOX
;
4
SJ?AH / /
EXT- DAfl 2x0
_lj_Lf c: .dot
/
M OPI'ATE LsÿINTfcUMCI BACKUP OPT It'S | EXIT
/
Backup the some SRAM data in NC to FLROM in NC.
137
Appendix 3
3 Appendix
3-1 Using the DIAGNOSIS Screen
3-1 -1 DIAGNOSIS (ALARM Screen)

This is the main diagnosis screen. Detailed information is given for up to 16 current alarms.
3-1-2 VERSION Screen

The system software, spindle version, servo version, system model name and serial No. are
displayed.
S3
; unta I sam mamnj umi txmtm j jtatnaar. mnita 1
V»I* rC07-MA&13-Xl iJliJUM. M7i73*567B9 HGOti. »-CA7 50(*Y'K0l

'
tr»i VOttJ nta MprpR HMTOJTR iiwi
WUX-JI lOOIVlTOO- BÿMtl BUY ’J J < ) i ) JTCS-l
MXIJt-B 1DOJW001-A*V« fiRV-f < ) < ) J2tT-2
loOJDDU-fcXVfi PRY-iil < )
< ) .liCT-3
1-XDUtU-r t001U3T3’HX119 BHV
3, < ) < ) ,7?£»~4
LMiDtn-U IOOIB373-HXL15 SRV < ).< ) JZC3-S
ix;y s«-x? < ) < > .ItCT-C
ear-jr?
<c ) < ) atcr-i
BRY-C? ) < ) CZCT-B
BRV-W i ) < ) JTct-y
8RY-10 < ) < ) J?Ct-10
BRY-H 4 ) < } JZCT-11
flnv-12 4 > < ) Jtcr-ii
H*V- 13
»Mt lfl
< )
) (
i >
)
JtCT-13
.J2CT1*
4
»»V- J5 4 >) < >
BRV-J6 (
) <
< )
BPM-1 4 )
< ) < >
8f»»-3 < ) 1 )
STM-4 .< ) < )
-1
Hyp
< ) i )
-
B PM 6 i >4 1
iim-i < ) 4 )
nrp-o 4 ) < )
SI IS1* TP* U yoos/io/n u. 00:34

TTL& V-M O . OPIn/adi
r DJÿCKOC TL'RJ JCJM P I AC NO3 OPTION RT:»TO SPJMIMJT. liAsJ.DMajti:
HMJTMl HdHlTPIl HUM ITO* WOHUOY. WOM IT OR
L
No. Display item Details
1 UNIT Control unit type
2 SERIAL Serial No.
3 MODEL NC model
4 MAIN-A NC software version
5 MAIN-B Screen software version
6 LG- Currently selected language version
7 LADDER-F Ladder (COS1 side) version
8 LADDER-B Ladder (COS2 side)ÿyersion
9 LGP Currently selected PLC language version
10 SRV-1 to 16 Servo unit software version
11 SPN-1 to 8 Spindle unit software version
12 J2CT-1 to 14 J2CT unit software version
138
Appendix 3
3-1-3 HARDWARE MONITOR Screen
The hardware mounted on the control unit and board is displayed.
MIW; antrm - gtw mmjrm- twiwj wn* »*r»»x ion rt» •
IW 1 1 VLC | t W* 1
1 **1
154n <l.03) tfUlBi K
? tra 1S4
*
( *»* | 11C- } et»n« i
x*n»3| IRIO ?i i*i« >| lint ii (DID ij IBH> ti )iw tf B|

X
7
3 kxlA3 Bifrtd
[ETHER] is displayed when

031-Bit4 is ON.
Display item Details

CNC HN163 The CNC card name and sub-version are displayed.
HN123 The C NC card name and sub-version are displayed.
PLC The PLC card name and sub-version are displayed.
MEM HN482 The SRAM/FROM card name and sub-version are displayed.
EXT HN531 The axis extension card name and sub-version are displayed.
IC USB HN251 The front IC card/USB l/F card name and sub-version are
displayed. _
ETHER Only the item is displayed when there is an Ethernet option.
RIO RIO 1 RIO 2 RIO 3 RIO 4 RIO 5 RIO 6 RIO 7 RIO 8
1
2
3 HN203 HN203
4
5
6 I
The IC card name used each part system or channel is

displayed.
139
Appendix 3
3-1 -4 SERVO MONITOR Screen
The servo monitor is configured of the following five screens. The status of the servo is
displayed on each screen.
- SERVO MONITOR screen (Servo monitor) 1/2
SERVO MONITOR screen (Servo monitor) 2/2
• ABSOLUTE MONITOR screen (Absolute value monitor)
• SERVO DIAGNOSIS screen (Servo diagnosis)
• SERVO STATUS screen (Servo status)
The screens can be changed in the following order with the page feed keys.
SERVO MONITOR screen 1/2

I NEXT key T BACK key
SERVO MONITOR screen 2/2
l NEXT key T BACK key
ABSOLUTE MONITOR screen
i NEXT key t BACK key
SERVO DIAGNOSIS screen
I NEXT key t BACK key
SERVO STATUS screen
Note: The SPINDLE STATUS screen is displayed only while releasing the key lock.
140
Appendix
(1) SERVO MONITOR (Servo monitor)

The servo status is displayed on this screen.
fir •frriow
WBi* wasurtii wtn*! »n« Soxsv ywtnsrm i vcmi mtMj B»

1
SKJIVO wowrrcuu/?)
li] iX) m |A| 1C)
CM* M/m) 0 <> *c 0 0
(>UOOP (1J 0 o 9 0
SPUKD 0 9 0 0
FTID XJVT £(««/ÿ in) o 9 e a <»
fnrjiRTHT O) 0 9 0 9 0
MAX CUM «*> 0 o c D 0
WAX niR2 0 9 0 0 9
MAX Olh3 0 9 o 0 «
0VTR LOW <AI o 9 e o o
OYilH b£C i *) 0 9 0 0 9
OPT. rover. <*> 0 9 9 6 6
WAX nst.pc*ct: (*> 0 0 D -0 a
JWRTtA WLTIO {V) 0 o o 0 a
ATUT . <BJ>) 0 9 9 9
*0 i
ATJ.I <WU* (dB) 0 0 0 0
AMP PIVP 90 O 09 00 0o
M-lUKW .00 00 00 00 09 00 00 09 00 00 00 DO 00 .00 <H> 00 00 00 00 00
1/ *0 >1

The status of the position loop gain is displayed. Position
loop gain refers to the following:
1 GAIN (1/sec) Gain [1/SEC]
Feedrate (mm/sec,)
Tracking delay error (mm))
2 DROOP (i) Droop [Command unit]
commanded position is called droop. _
The error of the actual machine position to the
3 SPEED (1 /min) Speed [1/min] This is the actual motor speed.

4 FEED RATE (mm/s) Feed rate [mm/s] The feed rate of machine end is displayed. (Only Vx)
5 CURRENT (%) Load current [%]

conversion during stalling. __
The motor current is displayed with a continuous current
The current FB percentage in respect to the current limit

6 MAX CUR1 is displayed.
(%) Max. current 1 (%]
_
The peak value is constantly sampled, and updated
every second.
The currenl FB percentage in respect to the current limit
is displayed.
7 MAX CUR2 (%) Max. current 2 [%] The max. value of the current FB peak sampled after the
power is turned ON is displayed. _
The FB value of the motor current in terms of continuous
8 MAX CUR3 (%)
current during stalling is displayed.
Max. current 3 [%]
An absolute value of the current FB peak value sampled
in most recent 2 seconds is displayed.
9 OVER LOAD (%! Overload 1%1 This data is used for monitoring the motor overload. _
This dala is used for monitoring the resistance load state
10 OVER REG (%) Regenerative load [%] when the power supply for resistor regeneration is
connected.
The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall rated
11 DST FORCE (%)
Estimated torque when the disturbance observer is valid is
[%}
disturbance torque displayed.
The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall rated
torque when the collision detection function is adjusted is
MAX estimated displayed.
12 MAX DST FORCE <%) [%]
disturbance torque An absolute value of the estimated disturbance torque
peak value sampled in most recent 2 seconds is
displayed.
13 INERTIA RATIO The estimated load inertia ratio when the collision
(%) Load inertia ratio [%] __
detection function is adjusted is displayed.
14 AFLT FREQ (Hz) AFLT frequency [Hz]
displayed. ___
The present operation frequency of the adaptive filter is
15 AFLT GAIN (dB) AFLT gain IdB]

_
The present filter depth of the adaptive filter is displayed.
16
17
AMP DISP
ALARM
Amplifier display
Alarm
displayed.
___
__
The driver's 7-segment LED display is shown.
_
Alarms and warnings other than the amplifier display are
141
Appendix 3
(2) SERVO MONITOR (Servo monitor) 2/2
The servo status is displayed on this screen.
W*s;ta« } uioctu >u»s {' Bnioi sxrvt BiaKTOa yamm >! taa&ta* *n*rTa»|
fERYO H0*JTGR<2/J?)
W |vj 1=1 IA) l<-'1
irTnr cwr *P) 0 0 0 0 0
CRIP MATT <**) I. *.
twin <**) © o. 0. P. 0.
*XC JOK (ÿ») <5. c, 0,.
acv* ro
pod *ÿ».]
<•»)
o.
o<
©.
0.
0.
0.
0. J:
n>«A]a
WfltJK RO?
l“)
|mj
o,
•31.*-
0.
2»1*.
o’
0.
J?
'*10*
fWMKL IT !ÿ»> 0, © 0, s>. 0.
PS tr.BO* (1) 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
ftn*. CW? U> 0. o. 6. .0, £>.
CHOI cw>ooo<»<>ooo<>olJ OOWWOOOOOWWll OCWTOOOOOPGOOOll 000000090000001 J. <XKX«O»OOOWOOI
CWD2 OOOO11«OS>OOO<K><X> ooooUoooooooooo OoeolJOOOOOOOCOO OOOOlJuOOOOOOOQO oo&ollbcoooooooo
cxX>o Jr->o<xÿ>c«> 1 r*x> oooolooooocaJtJofi o<XH>Jo<>ooo<JolOpo oot>oiooooooo3 ooo o©i»!o*><*HW>3<>c>o
CWD>* POOOW®9PIMW9IV cJCBJOOOOOOOOPOaOCa <JOOOOO*>«0<HX>OCX>0 PC f ico owioooowwwo
oe» C<S3<>OOC«OOOC»C><>CK)0 OOOOOOOOOOOCKXXXX OOOOOOOXVXXKKXtO OOOOOOOOOOOCOOOP OCKJOpOPOOOOPPOOP
oai«i OOOOOOOOOtXXSOolO ooooooooooootjolo OUOOOOpOAO&OO&lx) rximMVKXVXxjobo1a (Xoooooooooocwlo
«al POOOQOOOPPPPPPOO 001X)pQ<X»0000(X«> OOOOOOQOOOOpQpOti #**>«KjOWOWO«W
PT*2 CÿXXXXHKXXXXXKXIO OOCQOOWOOOOOOOO OOOOOCKKKXIOPPOOO OOOPOpboOOPOOCWJ (WWOOWOOOOCWOO
trt S3 D00000cx>0000oc>00 OOOOPoOOOOOPOOOO OOOOOOOOOoCOOOOO oooooooooooouooa oooooooooooooooo
=73* i)oo<jcx>cÿk><w3ot3o iwwcoooooooopofi ppp»*H?oc>PP«=<><*a*{><> o**>o<H3«>»c<>oooo<x» OO<ÿ>OO<X>O<)0CK>O<><J
ST5S OOOCPOMWXWOOO OOOCWÿO<>OPOO<><K>9«> o,*>4>CH?W>pOO(>«*;wo u-WOWWWIHW POOOCkOPOOCOOPOOO
»TfS* D»V>«>C<><>X>OC>0©<>00 OOOOOOOOOOOOIXKXJ OOOCOOOOUOOOOOrtO OOOOOOiVJOOtKWOOO oooooooooooooooo
*/>* II

The position per rotation of the encoder delector is
displayed.
1 CYC CNT (P) Cycle counter [pulse] The grid point's value is used as the 0 position and the
_
position per rotation is displayed in the range of 0 to RNG
(movement unit) multiplied by 1000.
2 GRID SPACE (mm) Grid spacing [mm]
The unit is [deg] when using a rotary axis. _
The grid spacing for reference point return is displayed.
The distance from the dog off to grid point when dog-type
3 GRID (mm) Grid distance [mm] reference point return has been carried out is displayed.
The grid mask distance is not included. _
4 MAC POS (mm) Machine position [mm]
system. _
This is the position on the NC’s basic machine coordinate
5 MOTOR POS (mm) Motor end FB [mm] The feedback position of the speed detector is displayed.
6 SCA FB (mm) Machine end FB [mm] l The feedback position of the position detector is displayed.
REMAIN (mm) Remain
7 [mm] The remain command value is displayed.
command
WORK POS Current position
8 (mm) [mm] The current position is displayed.
J2L
9 MANUAL IT (mm)
Manual interrupt
|mm] The amount of manual interrupt is displayed.
amount
10 FB ERROR (i) FB error [Command unit]
the error of between the motor end FB and machine end
FB is displayed. _
The compensation pulse amount for dual feedback control
11 DFB COMP (0 DFB error [Command unit]
is displayed.
12 CMP1 Control input 1
16 CMP5 Control inp ut 5
17 STS1 Control output 1
142
Appendix 3
(3) ABSOLUTE MONITOR Screen (Absolute value monitor)

The servo’s absolute position is displayed on this screen.
i
vtasini i tnatmn »»n* ! DTTTW aw> wann* Isnjnt* »t*rrsi [ Konax w*m»|
PXacOLtrtt MPMITPU
W1 Vt. J 3z\ [A1 ICJ
A65 sta
t*t>r voa (ÿ**> o. #. o. 0. t.
row M>8 0. ft. 0. o i o.
KM: W)B <ÿ») ft. ft, 0. ft. ft,
no a o o ft o
to 1) ft ft ft ft
EO CP) 0 ft ft p ft
fin (P> ft 0 ft 0
Fn
Ko
<p)

ft
ft
ft
ft
ft
ft
0
0
si
0
ABSft o O o D ft
ABSn 0 9 o ft
M5*Q«
<*> 0 ft 0 p ft
V 7* *5 \

1 ABS SYS Detection system The state of the absolute position detection system on the
servo side is displayed.
ES : Semi-closed encoder
EC : Ball screw end encoder
LS : Linear scale
MP : MP scale
ESS : Semi-closed high-speed serial encoder
ECS : Ball screw end high-speed serial encoder
INC : Incremental
2 POP POS (mm) Power OFF position [mm] The absolute position at NC power OFF is displayed.
3 PON POS Power ON position [mm] The absolute position at NC power ON is displayed.
MAC POS
(mm)
__
This is created from the absolute position when the NC
power is turned ON.
4
(mm)
Current position [mm]
_
The coordinate value at the NC basic machine coordinate
system is displayed.
5 RO
6 PO
7 EO
8 Rn Cumulative number of The cumulative number of the motor rotation is displayed.
rotation
9 Pn Phase The position in one rotation is displayed.
Each rotation is divided by 4096, The range is 0 to 4095.
10 ABS0 Basic point The absolute position basic point is displayed.
This is the FB position memorized during basic point
setting.
11 ABSn Current position The current absolute position is displayed.
12 , MPOS Scale offset The initial offset distance for the MP scale is displayed.
143
Appendix 3
(4) SERVO DIAGNOSIS Screen (Servo diagnosis)
The servo mounting state and alarm history are displayed on this screen.
r— vri rrm-
ratior. Hiooiii t«*m« } arum OTTO »anw|irn*« mntn!SJ*»SB» HSIIW }
rxi IYJ IS! [A1 1C)

tin IT r«*£
OMIT Ho.
S/W VTIVSICHI
comrnoi.
KMCrTYV*
r.wc. oinjtAj, m>.
eCiWLE TYTU
SCA1X 8ZK1KL Ho;
MOTOR
WOtOC 7 D« 0 P 0 0 0
AJ*f JJf3* I JO-OJ o w) p. !0OI 0 IPOJ 0 |00) 0
100) 0 100} o JOOI 0 |OOJ 0 1001 0
3 100) 0 IPO I 0 100) 0 IOC) 0 100] 0
« 100) o 100) 0 1001 0 rooj 0 IO0) 0
5 100) n 10QJ 0 1001 0 |00| 0 100) 0
i 100) o fOP) o (0C) 0 I00J 0 fOO) 9
7 100) o )O0) 0 100) 0 )0OJ 0 r«»p) 9
a 100] 0 |O01 a JO0) 0 100] 0 I»0) 0
HAurrE nisi Ov oo oo oo 00 00 00 00 00 CO 0D 00 OO OO CO 00 (7000 00 OO
oa oo oo oo 00 oo Co 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 00 00 <70
HAwrrins 00 00 oo oo 00
13/ 7°

1 UNIT TYPE Amplifier type This is the servo amplifier type.
2 UNIT No. Amplifier serial No. This is the servo amplifier serial No.
3 S/W VERSION. Software version This is the servo amplifier software version.
4 CONTROL Control method SEM1 : Semi-closed loop
CLOSED : Closed loop
DUAL : Dual feedback
5 ENC TYPE Motor end detector This is the motor end detector name
6 ENC SERIAL No. Motor end detector This is the motor end detector serial No.
serial No.
7 MC DT Machine end This is the machine end detector type.
detector Only displayed when CLOSED or DUAL of control method.
8 SCALE SERIAL No. Machine end This is the machine end detector serial No.
detector serial No. Only displayed when CLOSED of control method.
9
10
MOTOR
WORK TIME __ Motor
Work time
This is the motor type.
T he cumulative ready-ON time is displayed.
11 ALM HIST 1 to 8 Alarm history The Nos. of the past servo alarms are displayed.
12 MAINTE HIST Maintenance record The amplifier’s maintenance history or NVRAM (special memory in
servo) status is displayed. _
13 MAINTE STS Maintenance status
144
Appendix 3
(5) SERVO STATUS (Servo status)
The servo statuses are displayed on this screen.
He WnSw _
|OJHQCSIS WBUW ; emm &>no HWJUW wm* j IWRWWK
_
enures J
SERVO STATUS
1X1 m m IA1 ICJ i
ALARM COO XT 1 too, OOJ o |0o,ooj 0 [00,CO| 0 100,001 0 100,00) 0
2 [00,00) 0 J00,00) 0 [00,001 0 coo, 00) 0 |00 j 00) o
3 [00,00) 0 |00,00) 0 [00,001 0 100,00) 0 100,00) c
4 [00,001 0 100,00) 0 [OO, 00| 0 100,00} 0 100,00) 0
5 [00,00) 0 100,00) 0 [00,001 0 100,00} 0 100,00) 0
[00,001 0 100,00)
7
6 [00,00)
100,00)
O
0
100,00)
100,00}
0
0 [00,00)
0
0
J00,00)
100,00} 0 100,00)
°0 ly
0 [00,00) 0 J0o, oq) 0 100, ©0} 0 CoO,Oo) 0 100,00) 0

3 [00,00) 0 JOO,O0) 0 [00,00| 0 100,00) 0 [00,00) 0
10 too, 00) 0 100,00) 0 [00,003 0 )00, 00} 0 100,00)
IDO ,00 J
0 1
si
11 [00,00| 0 100,00) 0 [00,001 0 100,00) 0 0
IP. [00,00) 0 [00, 00) 0 [00,001 0 100, 00 J 0 100, OOJ P
DA ADDRESS 1 OOOO 0000 ODDO 0000 0000

DA OUTPUT 1 0 o 0 0 0
oopo oopo l
»A ADPMS99 2 0000 0000
c
0000 I
DA OUTPUT 2 0 0 0 0
1
17/ 20 £j
!
1 ALARM COUNT Alarm No. The servo alarm No.
2 DA output L
Count
DA ADDRESS
amplifier power ON. _
The number of times of servo alarm condition implemented after servo
Servo parameter svQ61 setting value (address)

DA OUTPUT Servo parameter svQ61 setting address data
DA ADDRESS Servo parameter sv063 setting value (address)
DA OUTPUT Servo parameter sv063 setting address data
145
Appendix 3
3-1-5 SPINDLE MONITOR Screen
The spindle monitor is configured of the following five screens. The status of the spindle is
displayed on each screen.
- SPINDLE MONITOR screen (Spindle monitor) 1/2
• SPINDLE MONITOR screen (Spindle monitor) 2/2
• SPINDLE DIAGNOSIS screen (Spindle diagnosis)
• PS DIAGNOSIS screen (Power supply diagnosis)
SPINDLE STATUS screen (Spindle status)
The screens can be changed in the following order with the page feed keys.
SPINDLE MONITOR screen 1/2

I NEXT key T BACK key
SPINDLE MONITOR screen 2/2
SPINDLE DIAGNOSIS screen
1 NEXT key t BACK key
PS DIAGNOSIS screen
SPINDLE STATUS screen
Note: The SPINDLE STATUS screen is displayed only while releasing the key lock.
146
Appendix 3
(1) SPINDLE MONITOR (Spindle monitor)
—
The spindle status is displayed on this screen.
fm »ViV»
vaana ; IUOQD i tn»; inis ; IOW KMJT» S»J

»l
SPIXDU2 MOtUTOK . U/2>.
IHKIKDIJCI | 151MWDU!?) IBPinotro fSD 1*01*5 J
CAIB (.1/300) t> 0 0 0 0
&nv>O0 U) 0 & p tv 0
fipcna (ÿill- 1) 9 a 0 0 ©
rtr.D o o o o o
LOUD 0 0 0 0 0
MM nm i <*> 0 0 0 0 »
MIU ctmi <*> 0 0 0 Q 6
MM CUBS o 0 0 0 o
(rtm tixxt> <•0 0 0 0 0 0
OVXR REK c*> 0 & 0 0 0
.
nrrr roues
MM Dttr.»x>«ci; ( *»>
C’O 0 0 0 0 9
0 0 0 0 0
OffiXTM RATIO (V) 9 9 0 9 t>
ATX.T rPLQ. «*«) p 0 0 C 0
ATLT CL 3* iatt) 0 0 o 0 0
r*%e>EtuiTtni£ tft> 0 o o 0 0
D1SP 00 00 00 00 00
00 co no oo 00 OR 00 00 00 00 Oo 00 00 00 t>-0 00 00 00 00 00

1 GAIN (1/msec) Gain [1/msec] The spindle position loop gain (1/s) is displayed. The
2 DROOP (i) Droop [Command

position loop control. _
value is not set when in control modes other than
The feedback tracking delay to Ihe commanded

unit] position is displayed.
This is valid only during position loop control as with
item 1.
3 SPEED (1/min) Speed [1/min] This is the actual motor speed.
4 FEED RATE (mm/min) Feed rate [mm/s] The feed rate of machine end is displayed. (Only Vx)
5
6
LOAD
MAX CUR1
(%)
(%)
Load [%]
conversion during stalling. __
The motor load is displayed with a continuous current
The current FB percentage in respect to the current

limit is displayed.
MAX current 1 [%]
every second. ____
The peak value is constantly sampled, and updated
___
7 MAX CUR2 (%) The current FB percentage in respect to the current
limit is displayed.
MAX current 2 [%]
_
The max. value of the current FB peak sampled after
the power is turned ON is displayed.
3 MAX CUR3 (%) The FB value of the motor current in terms of
continuous current during stalling is displayed.
MAX current 3 l%]
An absolute value of the current FB peak value
sampled in most recent 2 seconds is displayed. _
9 OVER LOAD {%) Overload (%] This data is used for monitoring the motor overload.
10 OVER REG {%) This data is used for monitoring the resistance load
Regenerative
[%] slate when the power supply for resistor regeneration
load
is connected.
11 DST. FORCE (%) Estimated The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall
12 MAX DST FORCE (%)

disturbance
torque __ [%]
displayed. _
rated lorque when the disturbance observer is valid is
The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall

MAX
rated torque when the collision detection function is
estimated
[%] adjusted is displayed. An absolute value of the
disturbance estimated disturbance torque peak value sampled in
torque
most recent 2 seconds is displayed.
13 INER1IA RATIO (%) Load inertia The estimated load inertia ratio when the collision
ratio
(%J
detection function is adjusted is displayed. _
14 AFLT FREQ (Hz) AFLT
frequency
[Hz]
displayed. _
The present operation frequency of the adaptive filter is
15 AFLT GAIN (db) The present filter depth of the adaptive filter is
AFLT gain [dB] displayed.
16 TEMPERATURE (X) Spindle motor [°C] The spindle motor temperatureis displayed.
temperature
17 AMP DISP Amplifier display The driver's 7 -segment LED display is shown
18 ALARM”’” Alarm This item is displayed when alarms and warnings other
than the amplifier display is occurring simultaneously.
147
Appendix 3
(2) SPINDLE MONITOR (Spindle monitor)
The spindle status is displayed.
r*m Wfrij~ St$
IKKU*; >IK*TVIS mini] arm*- VKD warm* PT*U ***!«* jjanwrax Banna;
SfJHtU.1 MOM ITOH <2/7)
jspiKDtca j l«:p*MDur2j tKt>XMDlX3) ispixomi 12SPJ#D».E5J
eve cur <»> 0 o 0 o o
CRIO SPACE (M> O- o. 0, 9. 0.
GRID In) O. 0. 0. 9. 0.
KXC VOJf (M) 0. 0, e. o,
MOTOR P03 <*-) 0. o. 0. 0. 0.
SCA TV fwO o. o 0. 0. 0.
KEMAXH <wo p. 0. 0- 0. 0.
WORK 1*08. («*) o. 0. 0. 9. 0.
MANUAL IT |w) 0. 0. 0. 0.
ns riwou m o. 0, 0. 9. 0.
W.'C COMJ* <4) o. 0. ©. O- 0.
:>ct)i 0O0OOO0WX3OO000O ooi>«w>oooooooooo oooooooooooooooo 1
DJD2 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOCOOOOOOOOOOOQ
CMD3 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
CHD4 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
o®$ OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO ©OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
CHM OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 0. OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Stal oooloooooooooooT *
STS2 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOl OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
ST S3 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
ST 5 4 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO cocoooooooooocoo
STS5 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
STBS

This displays the position within one rotation of the encoder
detector. The position is displayed within one rotation in the
1 CYC CNT (P) Cycle counter [Pulse]
_
range of "0" to "RNG (movement units) * 1000" using the
grid point value as "0"
The grid space for the reference position return is
2 GRID SPACE (mm) Grid space [mm] displayed.
When rotary axis, the unit is [degj._
This displays the distance from the dog-off point to the grid
3 GRID (mm) Grid [mm]
_
point when the dog-type reference position return is
displayed. The grid mask amount is not included
4
5
MAC POS
MOTOR POS
(mm)
(mm)
Machine position
Motor end FB
[mm]
.mm]
displayed. __
The NC basic machine coordinate system position is
The feedback value of the speed detector is displayed.

6 REMAIN Remain command [mm]
7 WORK POS Current posirion
[mm]
121
8 MANUAL IT Manual interrupl
[mm]
amount
9 SCAFB (mm) Machine end FB [mm] The feedback value of the position detector is displayed.
10 FB ERROR (i) FB error
[Command
_
unit] FB is displayed. _
The error of between the motor end FB and machine end
[Command The compensation pulse amount for dual feedback control

11 DFB COMP (i) DFB error _
unit] is displayed. _
148
Appendix 3
(3) SPINDLE DIAGNOSIS Screen (Spindle diagnosis)
The spindle mounting state and alarm history are displayed on this screen.
i4e xwbM t-kfe
tfvxwMje
imrr TYEE
MACHOS*
j j
VZKCTOB } (M»K MGWrnat 0 mad «RW3 *«CHai
[SpjMZ7|ÿ>]
«WT« ! KW»CO* WJflTOB t
:
ISP lJ*P*-*4)
I
UK IT Bo.
8/W YFRSJO*
C6BTK03U
!
r* KKC.TYPE
EBC.6ER3WL Mo.
|81TB ENC. IYTE
SUB EMC.8Ea.Mo.
tOTOft
*010t TXX* 0 0 0 0 0
I
ALM HIST 1
z
100] 0 [001 0 [001 0 100) 0 [00]
100]
M
3
4
[00]
100]
100)
0
0
0
100]
100)
100)
0
0
0
[00J
[001
[00)
0
0
0
IOO)
tool
100)
0
0
0
100)
too)
Si
0
5 |00) 9 100) 0 [00J 0 [00 J 0 100) 0 ?
6 [00] 0 [00] 0 [001 0 [00) 0 [00] o|
7
0
too)
ioo)
0
0
[00]
1001
0
0
[001
[oOl
0
0
too)
tooj
0
0
100]
[00] M
0 S
MAXHTF BJST 00 00 00 oo 00 00 OO 06 00 00 OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 CO 00 DOrt -
00 00 00 oo 00 oo 00 00 00 00 oo CO 00 oo oo 00 00 00 00 oo .
WAXBJfc ft a 00 00 CO 00 oo I
j

1 UNIT TYPE Amplifier type This is the spindle amplifier type.
2 UNIT No. Amplifier serial No. This is the serial No. of the spindle amplifier.
3 S/W VERSION. Software version This is the version of the spindle side software.
SEM1 : Semi-closed loop
4 CONTROL Control method CLOSED : Closed loop
DUAL : Dual feedback
5 ENC. TYPE Motor end detector This is the motor end detector name.
Motor end detector serial
6 ENC SERIAL No. This is the motor end detector serial No.
No.
This is the machine end detector type.
7 SUB ENC TYPE Machine end detector Only displayed when CLOSED or DUAL of control method.
Machine end detector This is the machine end detector serial No.
8 SUB ENC SER No. Only displayed when CLOSED of control method.
serial No.
9 MOTOR Spindle motor This is the spindle motor type.
10 WORK TIME Work time The cumulative ready-ON time is displayed.
11 ALM HIST1 to 8 Alarm history The Nos. of the past spindle alarms are displayed.
12 MAINTE HIST Maintenance record The maintenance history is displayed.
13 MAINTE STS Status The NVRAM (special memory in servo) status is displayed.
149
Appendix 3
(4) PS DIAGNOSIS Screen (Power supply diagnosis)
The power supply mounting state and alarm history are displayed on this screen.
He "Mnicrm
vrasiat j Dr»a*sis HOT»T» j onwi j sjrjjvo mrrtw [xwxwx w*orn»|
*>» &X*CHOI;S
<1S> <17> -uav <19? <?o>
1131X1 TYPE
uxrr no.
s/w YEBaiox
COM AxX$
!:
HIM VOLT 1 <V> 0
MAX TOLT X <v) O
HIM VOLT Z
WAX VOLT 2 (X)
o
o :
WOttX 1JH8
AIM JBiKX 1 1001
9
0
\
2 100) 0
3 [001 0
J tooj 0
5 1001 0
« [001 0
7 1001 0
0 fool o
:HAn*TE urn 00 00 OQ «0
00 oo 00 <J0
HAXXrrg *1rs 0

1 UNIT TYPE Amplifier type This is the power supply unit type.
2 UNIT No. Amplifier serial No. This is the serial No. of the power supply unit.
3 SA/V VERSION Software version This is the version of the power supply side software.
4 CON AXIS Connected drive The driver connected power supply unit is displayed.
5 MIN VOLT 1 MIN voltage 1
J absolute value) ___
This displays the minimum PN bus voltage after the NC power ON.
6 MAX VOLT1 MAX voltage 1

(absolute value) _
This displays the maximum PN bus voltage after the NC power ON.
The minimum PN bus voltage in most recent 2 seconds is displayed.

7 MIN VOLT2 MIN voltage 2
_
(absolute value)
8 MAX VOLT2 MAX voltage 2
displayed, (absolute value)_
The maximum PN bus voltage in most recent 2 seconds is
9 WORK TIME Work time The cumulative ready-ON time is displayed.

10 ALM HIST1 to 8 Alarm history
are displayed.__
The history of the servo alarm No. and time generated in the past
11 MAINTE HIST Maintenance The maintenance history is displayed.

history _
12 MAINTE STS Maintenance The NVRAM (special memory in servo) status is displayed.
status
150
Appendix 3
(5) SPINDLE STATUS (Spindle status)

The spindle status is displayed.
r*» tmfc
OT3U*fMJ6*nis mon»Jttrrw| tawti H«n* ww |HWM K*JTO» )

SPIUDUE STATUS
r-> JlH>DtDT4:lJ fsiMjHnii:?) ISFIMOUÿ] [SP*XD1JIS)
KLH&4 COBHT 1 100,00) 0 [00,00} 0 100,00) 0 100,001 © too, 00) 0
i |C6, 00J 0 [60,00} 0 106,80) 0 [60,00) 0 160.001 0
3 100,00 J 0 (00,00) 0 JOO.OOJ 0 100,00) 0 100,00) ©
4 100.001 © 100,00] 0 {06.06) 0 100,001 0 100,60) 0
too, DO) 0 1.00,00). 0 too, o«) © too,©*) 0 loo, ©O) 0
100,00) 0 (60,001 6 100,001 0 100.001 0 100,60) o
'1 too, 00} 0 {00.001 o [00, ©0| 0 100.MJ 0 loo,oi»i 0
0 JOO.OOJ 0 1 OD , 0© 1 © [00,00) 0 106,00] a 100,001 6
100, OOJ 0 J06.06) © [00,60) 0) o [00,00)
}0
U
loo, 00)
100,00}
o
o
100,06)
(60,00)
a
0
100,001
ICP.OOl
a
0
|00,00)
<00,00)
o
0
[00.001
100.00)
l.
0
12 too, OO) 5 (06, OP) 0 loo, 00) O |Oo,0D) 0 joo.oo) 6
OK WMWEB8 1 0000 0006 000.0 ©006 0000 ;

DA DOT6 UT X 0 6 O 0 0
DA AOGSKSip * 0006 6000 oooo <060 0600
DA Otm>DT ?.• o o o 0 0

1 ALARM COUNT Alarm No. The servo alarm No.
Count
servo amplifier power ON. _
The number of times of servo alarm condition implemented after
2 DA output L DA ADDRESS Spindle parameter setting value (address)

DA OUTPUT Spindle parameter setting address data
DA ADDRESS Spindle parameter setting value (address)
DA OUTPUT Spindle parameter setting address data
151
152
153
154
y >.
r-* i |r? PPSPIAVW

Fit© v»V«3or* HfÿP
•'•A: I® m
i
2 PROGRAM {TOOLDATA *:
. [TKRCe ] [PROGRAM FIXE } [TOOL OFFSET 1 :
[El A MONITOR ] [TOOL PATH CHECK J [TOOL FILE ]
•[MACH III BIG
A|DRXLL MONITOR
-
: MONITORING ]
)
[SHAPE CHECK
[PROCESS CONTROL
* 1
J
[TOOL LAYOUT
:
[SPINDLE %0A£> GRAPH XC ] [PROGRAM XÿAYOUT
;\ilKAVIGATIOH T RESULT .
[AUTO MEASURE
. ]
—
[H A V IG AT ION PREDICT ION J [
I
WORK: OFFSET USER PARAMETER DATA I/O
! I ADDITIONAL WPC j [MACHINE PARAMETER [DATA I/O PARAMETER 3
[MACRO VARIABLE 3 [PLC PARAMETER )
[MKASXIPF 1 i
[STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH 3
3
;
•v
v
: CUTTING CONDITION i>IAGHOSIS (USER) !
[ CUTTING OoNDXXIOH LEARN 3 [DIAOWOSIS (MAKER) 3 1
[MAINTENANCE CHECK 1
[RUNNING CONTROL 3
(GRAPHIC MAINTENANCE )
:5
I)
...
i
f.
ru\;~oH i — n> 15 Gain1 NAM Omm/min <CUR SORXINP UI> ? i :

T~ ] i£
:
MAP
j
Operation Procedure : Display selector key > DISPLAY MAP
155
A\ÿYA'AY\\\W.Vi\NNW.Wk\\\V\\% YVYWkYVWV.WW (Y»'»VAYSYI'IY» \YY*Y.\\Y»YVA\
.WVYWAY urn*
1I Ccu./ÿ
&%> m
>
I &rfssft Vv>V >'.<ÿÿ H'->&

»
*
>
5 POSITION BUFFER NEXT COMMAND ! WHO- «Ei

*
TRS-CNK I
I
XX 0, XX 0. c ( ) ( )
0. 0. M UNO. 0 0 0 >
%
i zi
B
CX
0.
0.
P.
Zl
B
Cl
0.
0.
0,
T
NEXT CtttAXHKD XOW

I COUNTER
<W0DAt>
0( 0)
i
I X2 0» xz 0. G
: S 0 F 0. M 0
I
i
Z2 O- Z2 0. H G 1 G 17 G G 23 G98 G 21 G 40 \
C2 0- C2 0. T G G 80 G G G53.5 G 64 X
W 0, W 0, G 68 G 67 C 69.50 97 0X23 G :!?
i
.
G123 1G111 G50.2 G113 G13.1 %
\
:\
MACHINE REMAIN OFFSET .
© xi 0. XX 0. z 0.
I 0. 0, c 0. !
i
0. in 0. M. SPDIi 0 MIN-1 0 100 200
\
f$ B
ci
0.
0-
B
ci
0.
0.
;
! T
(0)
. SPDII
0 M/MXN
0 MIN'1
M. SPDL
T. SPDL l|
| 0
:t
© X2 0, X.2 0. ! (0) 0 M/MIN 5PDL Zj
I 0. Z2 O.
!
:
T . SPDI2 0 MIN1 T. 0
I
Il
© C2 0.
0-
C2
w
0.
0.
i
<0) C M/MIM
MM/MIN
XI-AX|
Y-AX |
Zl-Rxj
1 o I
i
t
; FEED 0.
TNO. 0 ->-> Tito. 0 MflGAZNPKNo. 6 i> i 0.
B-RX I
( ) ( ) (CIR-DR ) !; 13 0. * /»ln
LOW TNo. I Cl 0. " /a in Cl -AX| o
I X2-AX
WRIT : < ) j C2 0, * /»in 0 ;
!!
:
T -OFFSET DS ( 0) 0 * j LOW 0. MM/MIH Z2-AX
II# { 0) X 0. 0 MM/REV C2-AX B o
Y 0.
s i Z 0.
W-AX : 0
i
t
1I I.
K/v 5o% 1 s i fl> Crain - i
W\A Oiran/nin
m
C_J:*
.TPs - o;. mmmmm I:
1 i !
MACHINE V?0KK H . SPDL M. SPDL IPS
LOCK LIGNT JOG REV
L
'.VAVA'WM'. - /.V.W/W.VA
Operation Procedure : Display selector key — > POSITION
156
‘.YMÿWNWAVn:
•A~faitViWrr»yÿ aaÿas d££fc
l
I
( VERSIGMj DiaCSDSIS JSKITt® I OPriflH \ SERVO W3HITflR I 5PDE<LE i
i«M7W HJ3*mS££; IfDMTTfiR j
I >
pxm yyyyyÿyyyyyyyy SERIAL yyyyyyyyyyyyyy wox>eL ymryyy>ryyyyyy
ITEM
£ VERSION ITEM VERSION MOTOR MACH THE ITEM VERSION
?
MAIM -A 1001WOOO-A*WQ SRV--X ( ) < ) J2CT-X I
? MAXH-S lQQIMOOl-AÿO 9RV-V ;: < vvM( /: > J2CT-2
£ XG-ENG iooim>n~Axwo SRV-Z <( •ÿ
> :: > J2CT-3 \

<.
XADDER-F 1001W568-A0016 SRV“H :ÿ;ÿÿÿ•>; < V '•ÿ'•ÿ •
> •
I2CT-4 \
I LADDER- B SRV-A ( V < ) «J2CT-5 I
I SRV-6 ( ) ( ) J2CT-6 I
LCP
i SRV-7 ( > < ) J2CT-7
t- SRV-8 ( > < ) J2CT-8
£ SRV-3 ( > < > J2CT-9
!
* SRV-XO < > (< ) J2CT-10
J
SRV-11 ( > > J2CT-11
SRV-12 ( ) ( ) J2CT-12 t
f sRv-13 ; . C ) < ) J2CT-13
S.RV-X9 < > < > J2CT-14
1 SRV-15 ( ) < )
SRV~16 ( > ( )
) <
"
.
SPH-1
- . SRN-2
SRH-3
(
(
> <
>) <
>
>)
?
\
SP1I-4 ( > 5
3PM- 6 < > ( )
*
t
SPH-7 ( > ( > i
l SPH~8 ( ) c >
-
i
IPS 0 2005/10/31 11:16:03 i
I iI
:
!
KrC Q% c © ISOmln'1 WvA Own/sln
i i
OlAOHOS VCRSlOM OX AO NOS OPTION SERVO SRIMDIE HARDWARE LADDER
MOHXXOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR i
£
>
fty.WAV/AW»V
Operation procedure Display selector key --> DIAGNOS

.
—>
VERSION -> VERSION
157
I
i iMlM <\
fi* Wn,tx Htb f
jOFIXIMij SEHITO KDHTTtffi I KPJJfiOi BEMITOR [ H3HDVJCE lStNITCK| |
W3OTM I DljtfKOSIS JfflWITCR
:
1 ETA 29 GANTRY ROBOT CONTROL 51 RE-THREAD
HIGH SMOOTHING CONTROL 30 FLASH TOOL
! 2
3
4
SPIRAL
EIA 3D COMP.
31 INCH AM COM VEST
32 ROT- AXIS SHAPE COMP.
58 PROGRAM MEMORY EXPANSION
59 LOWER TURRET MA7.ATROL
60 MILL TURNING MAZATROL
?
!
5 ROTATION 33 COO SLOPE CONST. 61 HIGH SPEED SYNC. TAPPING
t
6 GEOMETRIC 34 SCALE FEED BACK 62
t i- T SCALING 35 SOB SP 1/1000 DEG POST. '
63
8 EXT-DATA I/O 36 VARIABLE 600 SETS 64
9 MA2ATROL 3D 31 SCALE F/B (A) 65 »
10 POLYGON MACHINING 38 CYLINDER 66 5
11 HOB MACHINING 39 SYNC. MAIN SP. TAPPING 61
I 12
13
5 -PLANE
HIOH SPEED
40 SIMULTANEOUS 5 AXIS
41 B AXIS CONTROL
68
69 s
14 SHAPE COMP. 42 IC CARD HUMMING '
70 }
;
THREAD ! 43 ETA ULRICA!, TAP CYCLE :.
16 SOB C-AXTK CONTROL 44 EIA PATTERN CYCLE 12
11 INVERSE TIME 45 PROTCOL B 73
\
1 .
18 DYNAMIC COMP. 46 SHAPING 74 1

:
1 41 2ND AOX. FUNCTIONS 75
70 -,To“ R0T-
48 NURBS IMTERPORATTOH 76 l
t
I
-
21 POLAR COORDINATES INPUT
22 COMPARISON STOP
49 TH.TED WORKING PLANE
50 SP/ROT. PARA. ADJUST
77
78 ::
23 HV CHTR. 51 TABLE UNBALANCE DETECT 15*
• :• 24 SYNC. CCHT . S2 5-AXIS TOOL COMP. 80
25 EIA CONVERSION 53 AUTO PECKING 81
26 SPLINE 54 ETHERNET RUNNING 82 t
i
1i
21 G54.1
78 SYNC. MILL TAPPING
55 TOOL CENTER POIHT CONTROL
56 THREAD START POINT COMP.
-r*v
;
83
Qd
0 : 20 05/10/31 ; IX: 13:*3

-
?'
:
7
KAy o* r lb 150min’s vW* OPUB/BIU
DLACHOS VERSION OIAGHOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER

:
\
I \
1
Operation Procedure. : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->

VERSION -> OPTION
158
mm
!?
•»'.-?' ‘•»>V«!j{>fU j"ÿ’?*
,VV
E-TO
m
:v r o'- 77"r OTÿIT,.;. To
I
| |
VERSItM DUU2H0SIS HDNITtJR OJTTCH SOIVO WCMITttR [sPQHKJB WfflttTJK j HSRDVSiJE MUnTtHt i
SERVO MONITOR (1/2)
1X1J m (Z1J JB) icx)
I
I
i
t:
CAIN
DROOP
SPEED
(1)
i
(»i_n-l)
(J/soc) 0
0
0
0
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<
FEED RATE (wm/win) 0 0 0 0 0
C-DKRENT (%) 0 0 0 0 0!J

: MAX ClfRl <%) 0 0 0 0 0
:: MAX CUR2 (h) 0 0 0 0 0
MAX CUR3 <*) 0 0 0 0 p
OVER LOAD <**> 0 0 0 0 0 j
OVER REG <*0 0 0 0 0 0 !
DST . FORCE <*) 0 0 0 0 0
i
: MAX DEFORCE <*) 0 0 0 0 0 I
J
INERTIA RATIO ih) 0 0 0 0 0 i
1
AFLT FREQ, (Hz) 0 O 0 o o
KFVt CAXH (<*B) o 0 0 0 p
AMP DISP 00 00 00 00 00
I ALARM 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
I
!
:
i rrnsrg
%
\
:
*
1
:
;
A?Y.1
50% !
LSLLiD Omin'1 :\W- Own/win
mmm TPS 0 j 2005/11/04 110:12:04
t
DXAGNOS VERSION DTAGNOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER
I
\
MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR t
>
:
WWAVWA1 ‘.v/w/.'.y.w.v.
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->

VERSION -> SERVO MONITOR
159
{•ife y'VjjjTs KVsp
|
VERSItBT DlftQfOJwIS ]
tSBCCTCK OfTItBf SERVO BUKITHR j SPIMDLE WDnTt» | MfiKEWMZE MMTTCR j
SERVO MONITOR<l/2)
(XI) tzi) IBJ CC1-J
CAIN (1/SOC) 0 0 0 0 0
DROOP U)
i 0 0 0 0 0
SPEED (min-l) 0 0 0 0 0
FEED RATE (JftM/jfcii) ) 0 0 0 0 0
|CURRENT <*> 0 0 0 0 0
MAX ami <*> 0 0 0 0 0
MAX CUR2 <*) 0 0 0 0 0
MAX CUR3 <%) 0 0 0 0 0
OVER LOAD <%) 0 0 0 0 0
OYER REG <*> 0 0 0 0 0
DST- FORCE <*) o 0 0 0 0
\mx DSX.FCRC£ <*>

INERTIA RATIO <%)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
IRFLT FREQ. (Hz) 0 0 0 0 0

RFLT CAIN <<iN) 0 0 Q 0 0
AMP DISP OO 00 00 00 00
ALARM 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 oo oo oo oo 00 00 00 00
1/ 16 -H
TPS 0: ! 200i/n/04 ,10:12:04
fW 50*5 isW.
s
Owin'1 VV\A 0»m/»in
DXAGN03 VERSION OIAGNOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER

Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS

VERSION SPINDLE MONITOR
— >
160
‘AWAV\YVVYÿ yiwiWM V,VA\
miitm i v 'it 11 \Y.\\>YASYiWiV/» V WYNWA’AÿWAVYi
I mmmmMt
i Wy*ivft s
* it* :K*'s
I
>
j | |
VERSION Diaorosis: WKITOR OFrrnH j SERVO MBflTCR SPIKDLE MJKITGS | KWÿDWSIHE MfflmUR
f
I
I :
I :-
% '
\
\
l CHC J ( Ptc ) ( HEM J X
1 HM1(>3 A (1.03) HW102 B HN402 ft
\
:
2 KK123 A I
g I
j
t EXT ] |xq USB j i
KH-531 A HR 251 A (0.02) f
|
i !
< (RIO 2] (RIO 5]
(RIO 1) [RIO 31 (RIO 4) (RIO 6] (RIO 7J (RIO 8]
1
X i
2 5
i 3 KM 2 03 HH203 !
i 4
i
: 5
:
f
1
f i
I
!
!
>•*•'
f\Aÿ 50%
—— 1
iili)
msmr TIPS 0 2005/11/04 ij 18 : I?: 46 ;
\
Omin *v 0jwn/«in
s ! *••/»••. I»tl,,lw>.«'i • •' V»’ 3
:
J 0I&CH08 VERSION DIAL*OS ORYXOH SERVO 3 PIN OLE HARDWARE LADDER I

5
?
V»V.v. /.W.S'AV. •/ WA’.’.VW AW

VERSION ~> HARDWARE MONITOR
—>
161
* MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI CNC
PLC PROGRAMMING TOOLS
V
COPYRIGHT. O 20D4 Ml ISUBIÿSHI El ECTRIC CORPORATION RIGHTS RFSFRVFn .

i ! I»!
eanm iKf
f RE me DI/W80S.
Operation Procedure : Display selector key — > DIAGNOS

VERSION -> LADDER MONITOR
—>
162
M\\\S\Yl\yAU
mtyrrrtiÿaaw “<YÿYAW«iYiYi
ttlftVittiWf •am
>
5
l fife
>
a? ft; iS
WVhfert
- -
mm I t
$ l
iLM3K
1 5LBJW msrana| f\jQ sionc [
;
I
5
MO. ALARM MESSAGE HEAD DATE TIME TYPE
i
5 471 .TOC toon not $mm IX. IS 10:47 OP&RATB
i
I
§ I
I
I I
i
I
I
I
I 1
5 5
$
I
f
i
•i
?;-
j
i
t
l
l
wmmm
-ÿ
i
ii
I 47 x mo mm HOT F01WB
I ov
m fvW* ioo% j
i
1
VERSION ALARM ALARM PIJC MAXWTtH RUSHING GRAPH Xc DATA ACCOM*! . i
i
HISTORY SIGNAL CHECK CONTROL MATNTEo ERASE T-THE !
I
l
Operation Procedure : Display selector key — > DIAGPTOS — > ALARM
163
;
i IWmmMm
Sotp Wrtfo*
milM t
file Hjfc
H.7BW [aLsrai HiJ.Ttiia J pi.c sum | i

I Ho. .
'
A.LIUUI MESSAGE DATE TIME TYPE 1
442 DATA RENEWAL HOT ALLOWED c -100, ) 10.31 10:22 OPERATE 1
406 MEMORY PROTECT 10.31 9:54 OPERATE
;; 442 DATA RENEWAL HOT SHOWED . ( 1, »I00, > 10.31 9:43 OPERATE
442 DATA REHEKM, HOT ALLOWED t 1, -100, ) 10-31 9: 38 OPERATE
1
ii 442
442
DATA RENEWAL HOT ALLOWED
DATA RENEWAL MOT ALLOWED
: {
£
1, -100,
1, -100,
)
)
10.31
10.31
9:32
9:27
OPERATE
OPERATE
\
\
406 MEMORY PROTECT 10.31 9:17 OPERATE
I 442 DATA RENEWAL tfOT ALLOWED c . .. l, -100, ) 10.31 9:15 OPERATE

439 MS2ATROL PROGRAM CKSlGHATBO 10-31 9:11 OPERATE
439 MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED 10.31 9: 8 OPERATE
439 MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED 10.31 9: 3 OPERATE
406 MEMORY PROTECT 10.31 B;59 OPERATE 1I
439 MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED 10.31 8:59 OPERATE
406 MEMORY PROTECT 10.31 8 : S3 OPERATE fe
'
dPSW
1i
'
OOSAOET
I -\&0.:CORROTX.S1C
58 DORROTT RI.C
130 HO OPERATION MODE

8LC
>
_ ,
i
£ .
4328,62700,
.t.SC
3)
10.31
10.31
10.31
10.31
8:49
8:49
8:46
8:45
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
MG
;
i 468 MAINTENANCE CHECK WBRMIHO ( 4, ) 10.31 8:45 OPERATE

1 642 DATA RENEWAL HOT ALLOWED < 10,31 8:45 OPERATE
10.31 8:45 SYSTEM
.
| ' 1 EMERGENCY STOP (&OOOOFFTE/ §0$ 2 ) 10.31
10.31
10.31
8:45
8:44
a; 44
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
U-
"
j"" 1/ 5 -M
i TpS O I 2005/10/31 10 : 23:37
1 rv/\> g*5 : ~~D 7 50 min ’1 VV'A OIUIL/JAIR

I
I VERSION AIi ARM nij'KM
HISTORY
pix;
SIGNAL
MA nn f.n
CHECK
PU; wimum;
CONTROL
GRAPHIC
MSIHTS,
TEXTPILE
DISPLAY
Operation Procedure Display selector key --> DIAGNOS

.
— > ALARM HISTORY
164
The Procedure Of Reset Alarm History And Extended Alarm History
1. Go to DIAGNOSIS screen and push DATA ERASE button.

X
ii+
Ui» mVTmnr ;Nr ilfcHal, {
Bn. AI.XKM KF..13WC DATE TIM TWB

I
:
|
!
j
:
1
I
:
IM 0 2(106/09/2* 22; 3?: 2#
;W 7*v> TTB Or[i» vVVS 1 .

VERSZOK Al.ARH IK wwm* RDIDJTHC cpj-.pmc DATA CtDW.
HISTORY Sir.HAf erase* OONTBCT, HAIKI BRBSB
2. Move cursor to ALARM HISTORY 3. Move cursor to COMPLETION J
and push INPUT key. INPUT -9999 and push INPUT key.
TOOL DATA CHUCK JAW TOOL DATA CHUCK JAW
TOOL FILE TOOL FILE
TOOL OFFSET TOOL OFFSET
CUTTING COND. ALARM HISTORY CUTTING COND. ALARM HISTORY
WORK OFFSET SJ WORK OFFSET MAINTENANCE
MACRO YAR. MACRO VAR.
COMPLETION <-9999 1NPUT> COMPLETION <-9999 INPUT>
START INIT . START INIT-
4. Open Explorer and Delete C:¥MC_sdg¥Alarm¥Alarm.txt file.

. 8SS 88
7
File Edit View Favorites Tools Help i:
WJ Back - -ft-
Search Folders
S
)Jÿ\ ~
A V :»•- - C: i MC _sdg\ Alar m vi
X Name Sire
_
Folders Type
+
+
__) MC_Gl Data
I M-I.Machine Oatabas
mm
_=J E xcbjdeAlarrri
89 KB Text Document
1 KB Text Document
*
- _
_j MC.Machine Program
| MC.sdg
___
A Alarm
I CiistOfnMenij
I cutest
) '. u* morn
_I ojties
_l dbl
_
_) tug
I Tocillnf or matron
V
(
> < >
165
166
Y '*•: |fwÿ.raS15AI»|p0;:
fife w .Wipÿ ___
m W-
m
EJSPK |sown MCSTORZ \
I I*.
Ho. Title Sts. Condition No.Title Sts. Condition i
1.MF1 0000 XZ30,X$30,X690,X930 19. RESET 0111 X1C$(X4ES,X845,X8ES
! . 2.HF2 0000 X231,X531,X891,X931 20. MX AXIS IHP - 1000 X1F9, X4F9 , X859 , X8F9
3.MF3 0000 X232 ,X532,X89?,X932 .
21 MJ.aXXS SMTH 1000 XlFA,X4FA,X85A,X8FA i
4,MF4 0000 X233,XS33, X893, *933 22.SYHC-Z 0000 X274 ,X5?4,X8D4 ,X974 >
1
| 5. SF
*\TF1
7.TF2
0000
0000
0000
X234,X534JX094,X934
X238 , X538 X898 ,X938
#
X239,X539,X899,X939
23. SYNC -c
24.SXKC-SP
25.SYHC
0000
0000
0000
X27S,X57S,XBD5,X97 5
X27fc,X57«.,X0D6,X976
X204,X504,X864,X904
1 .
8 HF
9.DEH
0000
1000
X23C,X53C,X89C,X93C
X1F8,X4F8,X858,XBF8
26.GOV. :
27-61 V
0000
0000
X200,X500,X860,X900
X20X,X501,X861,X901 :
10. JOG oooo xieoÿafio.xBio.xBeo ZB.XIIREADXHG 0000 X203 , X503 , XB63 ,X903
!
13. HANDLE 0000 XlEl,X4El,X84I,X6El 29. CONST 0000 X205 ,X505 , X865, X90S
12. STEP 0000 X1E2 ,X4E2,X842,X8E2 30. SKIP 0000 X206,X506,X866(X906
13.PTP 0000 X1E3,X4E3,X843,X8E3 31. OH ZERO RTH. 0000 X207,X5O7 ,XB67 ,X9D7
14. ZERO RJETORH 1000 X1E4,X4E4,X844,X884 32. FINISH 0000 X26O,X5GO,X0CO,X96O
X268,XS68,X8C8,X968
’ ’
IS. MEMORY
iCjTJVPE
17.MDT
' ““ SS:;S:S5J:ÿ
0000 X1EB,X4EB,X84Q,X8EI)
33. PRESSURE
34.HAXXHG
35-MFIHX
0000
0000
0000
X26C,X56C,X8CC,X96C '
Y226 , Y526 , Y9A6 , YAA6
!
IB . OPERATION OOQ0 X1E2 ,X4E2,X842,X8B2 36.MFXH2 0000 Y227,Y527,Y9A7,YAA7
1
I X/ "3~±J i
•inÿj.0]! 2005/10/3X j10 : 23; 43

: I
f\T\j 0A !ZJ 7 SO min’1 VV\A 0»m/»in
i VERSION ALARM ALARM

HISTORY
PIC
SIGNAL
MAINlEH
CHECK
PJ.C RtUtNXHG
CONTROL
i
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS — > PLC SIGNAL
167
* w
Fite Vfcteri
susm JCCSTCBCC nx: Slant,
HO. ALARM MESSAGE HEAD DATE TIKE TYPE

471 1TC »ATfc HOI TOmp 11.15 1B;'47 OPERATE
:*
w~v- : - _ •
'Q';VSO:.
•
• *:•:. .*>
i :
*;
il
TOOL. FILE
••-
__
TOOL OFFSET
.. ..
*ÿ
ClTTTTliG COHO. ALARM HISTORY
WORK OFFSET MftIHTE«JUiCB
MACRO VAR. •
l%0, . %ÿVVÿ>5v:J i£
. '•
ADD me
COMPLETIOH <-9999 XNPUT>.
START IH IT,
| 47 l »C DATA. MW FQ1W*> [IB: 48; 2:1

jVU 100% kW 100% } .
VERSION ALARM ALARM PIC MAINTEN RQNHING GRAPHIC DATA ACClJHlI.

HISTORY SIGNAL CHECK CONTROL MAIHTE. ERASE TIME
Operation Procedure : Display selector key — > DIAGNOS --> DATA ERASE
168
A. rfliV'ii niRivav‘'-y‘v'v‘ÿ}‘\)‘ÿYi '~'v-
.w«.ifr'>nvrii 6M.
-
;
<
Fite- WWSor* Hrÿ>
SXSJOI p««oi
j rrrcif ITJRIK j KEY MisTtaa|fO«w scan7.|
:-
l
i
i
i
i
Ol 0 019 01111011 037 0 055 toooooooo 073 00000000 091 jllOOOOOl
02 3 020 01000111 030 0 056 i 0 074 iOOQOQlQl 09Z loooooooo
03 4 021 10111111 039 ; OOOOOOOO 057 j IOOOOOOOO 075 j OOOOOOIO 093 [00000000
<
04 6 022 11101111 o40 iooiloioo 050 i' 0 076 jOlOOOOlO 094 j OOOOOOOO
05 8 023 11101111 041 jOOOOOOOl 059 j £00000000 077 loOOOlOOO 095 ioooooooo
06 4 024 10001110 042 OlOOOOOO 060 j o 070 j 10101000 096 10000000
07 1 025 10011111 043 00000000 061 : £00000000 07 9 i 0 097 0
oo 2 026 11111111 044 1000 062 ; 0 080 : 0 098 1
09 2 027 00111110 04 5 100 0 063 £00000000 OOl 0 09 9 O
oio 0 020 10100000 04 6 ?
250 064 0 002 0 0100 16
oil 0 029 10010100 047 0 065 0 OB3 j 0 0101 0
I 012 0 030 11110011 040 2000 066 0 084 :
0 0102 0 i
f 013 2 031 11100100 049 2000 067 j 0 os 5 | 0 0103 0
!5 014 1 032 OOOOOOIO 050 500 060 :j 0 006 | 1 0104 0 :
015 0 033 11001101 051 0 069 1 0 007 | 0 0105 • 0
i
016 : O 034 . 00010001 052 0 07 6 ; 0 088 j 0 0106 IOOOOOOOO

017 4 035 i 10000010 053 j o 071 ' £ 00000000 089 | o 0107 -OOOOOOOO
018 2 036 U 110010 054 0 072 UOQOOOOOO 096 5 0 OIQO 0
\
\:
i-
! EDI -rJ Ij#'?' |fg||ftjj2005/ll/15 1 18; 50: 58
r•:
i
\
s
j
Vv 100% WA ioo%
1
>
I
DIACHO# SYSTEM PITCH KEY MEMORY :
PA*Uki ERROR MI STORY SCOPE
<
5& I
DIAGNOS ->
Operation Procedure Display selector key
'
VERSION -> VERSION -> SYSTEMPARAM
169
rtfUH rirc»f zmam RTT mviwi' ; msfufn sn>n;
Ol « oi9 muon 03? 0 OS5 £0 0000 000 P?3 00000009 091 11000001
02 3 020 01010111 039 0 056 0 01 4 00000101 092 ooooo loo
03 d 021 10110111 039 08000000 057 tOOOOOOOO 07 5 00100011 093 00000000
04 6 022 11110111 040 00100000 056 0 07 6 9IOO0O1O 094 00000000
05 8 023 11111111 041 00000001 059 400000000 077 0O1O10OO 095 00000000
06 4 OS 4 immMt 04 £ 00010009 060 0 018 1010000 1 096 0 10OOO0O
07 1 OS 5 10011 043 OOOOOOOO 061 1,00000000 07 9 0 097 0
08 <> 0?6 11111ÿ1 044 0 062 0 OHO 0 096 2
09 ? O71 001111ÿ0 045 0 063 i.00000000 on i 0 099 0
OlO 0 020 111000019 046 0 D64 0 082 0 0100 16
on o 029 11 VJOloA 04? 0 065 O 003 0 OlBl ?
012 0 030 11111111 \ 048 2000 066 0 084 0 010 2 0
01.1 oil 10000100 \ 049 2000 067 0 08 f. u 0103 0
Oil 1 032 00000010 050 \ 0 068 0 086 1 0103 0
015
016
017
01Q
0
0
3
•>
033 01900001
034 0091 oq 01
035 00000110
o36 01010000
s
VlSl
cfcp
OtU
0
29
0
O
069
OlO
071
O? 2
4OO0OOOOO
0
0
L 00000000
087
088
089
090
0
0
0
0
010 5
0106 00000090
O107
oioa
8
00000090
C
!
\
i
\
\
\
>- v
oiM y '*£? ® 2006/12/01 09:52:31
rV\* so % Hfl >AAA 1 46 tsi/mS

.
\\ HIT
\ r*r
\
Cursor to the coirect. 0 parameter
Press BIT INPUT-"'
170
'M v ; fejg 4: I
F$* 'ÿitev* twp
SYSTEM rmm|nttDt mum } I&Y tfusreaa* ) lasas# %tmm J
03 B 019 XI 111011 033 9 055 & 00 00 0000 073 00000000 m% 1100 OGOL
of 3 020 010X0111 038 8 05$ 0 074 00000103 092 G 9000100
03 4 021 10110111 039 00000000 057 *08009900 075 00100011 093 j 0 0000000
04 6 0.22 lillOlll 040 00100000 058 0 076 01000010 0.94 00000000
OS 0 023 11. trio X 041 00000001 059 £09000090 077 OO1010OD 00800000
06 4 024 I 11**1011 042 00010008 060 0 078 10100001 096 O1OO0OOO
07 t 0*5 1001.1 m 043 00000 D 00 mi *00000000 079 0 097 0
08 2 026 I I nun 044 8 062 o 000 0 mb 2
m ? 027 001X1110 045 0 063 £00080000 081 0 099 0
OIP 0 Of0 11100000 04$ 0 cm 0 002 D 01.60 : 1$
Oil 0 029 XI I18100 047 0 065 0 003 0 0X81
012 0 030 llilllll 040 2880 06$ 0 OQ 4 0 0.1Of 8
013 2 031 10088100 049 2098 067 0 005 8 0X83 8
014 1 032 OOOOOOiO 050 0 068 0 086 i 0104 0
0X5 D 033 01000001 051 0 069 0 087 0 01.05 0
016 0 034 000X0001 052 29 070 0 008 0 0186 00880808
017 5 m% 00000110 053 0 Oil 400000000 009 0 0187 08000000
oin ? 036 010X0000 054 8 072 £00000000 O90 0 0180 8
on :;V/| iwi 2006/12/01 09:52:50

A/V. 50% lift Orpm VW*‘ .1 , 4 in /m in
..
I-
1
BIT- f
J /
4 3r-
X
EX
IHPIST
Select, the bit. you want, on ur off ... Highlighted = 1 or On Not Highlighted = 0 or Off
171
mu
\YÿAVTlYlVA*>YtYYn VTYtT.YlYlT tYYYi V/Yl Y\ YiWr>1Yl T vw«vWftwiWft\YTÿ
&£&$&£ '
T. 'J&%‘.Zp***r ~ •
FI** Hrt>
5
SYSTEM FWtfO* FITCH EKH£R KEY JCISTflJOf j | KQCJHY SCOfE| \
:
go #130 #150 #102 #208 #234 -;
#2G #52 #70 #101 >
XI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
AXIS s
i
j
PI j 1000000 : -13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 <
P2 13 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
:
P3 10 -1 ! 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0
PI 0 -6 0 0 0 \ 0 0 0 0 0 0 \
-7
j 0 ! 0 l 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
P5 0 :
-7 i
!
0 0 \ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 !
-7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o '
-1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
\ -10 0 0 0 0 ; 0 •< 0 0 0 0
—
-18 0 0 o o 0 o 0 0 0
>
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
;
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 \
0 0 ; 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 \
i
I 0 0 0 ! 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I
.....
0 0 0 \ 0 0 0 ! 0 o : 0 0 i
I i 0 ; o 0 o 0 0 ! 0 0 0 0
j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 •: :
;
1
0 i 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
? i
0 i 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 i 0
:
J
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
! 0
0 0 0 0 0
1/16 jj
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2J
I !
I \
Tl I !!ÿ' I
fc.ÿ*r.v5«cn.‘v." .*.y
vW'ioo* :
man sar™ i
1X8:51; 17 5
I
5
;
DIACMOS SYSTEM JPXTClt KEY MEMORY DMrK Ko.
S ERROR HISTORY SCOPE SEARCH
Si RHBBRBR TJjJJ.'JAWWX'.'AWA'AW/AVW .V.’.V

VERSION - - > VERSION - - > PITCH ERROR
172
fR-tif
F7? R;T % \o -O
rÿiLLi
f
SYSTEM rwam| men unm KEY msTmor iwoarior SCOPE |
1 2 3 4 5 <5 ? 8 0 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 10 20
0 MS 5ft MS MS Fl MS F3 F3 F4 CR F4 DS 48 Fl Ml CR DS DS DS F7
20 Fl DS F3 DS Fl DS F3 DS FB Ml CR UD UR FS UR UR UD UR F3 DS
40 FG FG FG FG FG F6 F6 FG FG FG F6 FG MS DS FG F7 DS F4 F4 UD
60 UD UD UD WD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD *D TB TB UD UD UD UD
80 UD Ml MO CR UD DS F3 FG Fl F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2
100 F2 F? F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 DS F7 Fl DS Ffi F3 F9 AX AH AT AE CR
120 F2 FA DS Fl DS Fl F2 F2 F3 F2 F3 F2 f3 F? F2 F3 F2 UR UR UR
140 UR UR 48 40 4A 41 41 42 43 45 44 42 42 4B 51 40 51 4B 4A 4C
160 53 48 5B 5B 55 55 53 53 56 56 54 54 F2 DS F3 UD F4 DS F7 DS
180 FG FA UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD M0 CR DS F6 DS MS DS
200 Fl MS DS F7 F2 DS FG FA UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD Ml
220 CR DS DS 08 FT Fl FA 40 F3 F4 F5 OS FG FA UD UD UD UD UD UD
240 UD UD UD UD UD HO CR DS F7 Pi FA F3 F4 F5 DS F6 FA UD UD UD
260 UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD Ml CR DS MS DS Fl DS FB Fl Fl DS DS
280 DS FS Fl DS F8 F2 DS F8 F3 DS F8 F4 DS FS FG DS FB F7 DS F8
300 FA DS FG F6 FG MS DS Fl DS FG FA UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD
320 UD UD MO CR DS FS Fl DS FO F2 DS F8 F3 DS F8 F4 DS FO F4 DS
340 FO F6 DS F» F? DS Ffi FS DS F6 FA UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD
360 UD UD Ml CR DS DS DS F7 F8 F8 FB FR Fl DS Fl DS FA DS F7 FS
300 DS Fl DS F4 Fl DS F3 FA PD PD PD PD PD PD PU PU PU PU PD DC
400 F4 F4 FA F2 H4 H. M3 CR CL CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CR 40 DS F4
420 Fl DS FO PD PD PU PU CR F2 Fl CR CR CR CR CR CR Fl DS F3 UD
440 F4 DS F7 DS FG FA UD UD UD UD UD UD UD 1ID UD UD UD MO CR DS
460 F7 DS DS DS FG FA UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD Ml CR DS
400 Fl DS F? Fl FA F3 F4 F5 DS DS F6 FA UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD
500 UD UD UD HO CR DS Fl Fl FA F3 F4
mmmi :TPS 0 (2005/11/15 18:51:35
EE E
PXA0H03 BYSTF.W PITCH RET MEMORY

P ARAM ERROR HISTORY SCOPE
Operation Procedure : Display selector key

VERSION -> VERSION -> KEY HISTORY
DIAGPTOS —>
173
LYftmvWlWWYlWYlVW.W yVA*>ViV.,S*VV»%\VISNNWIV.VIWTVV>V.VAW,/VAV\WVS
jMliaF
i i
i Fite WWwf Hfr9f>- *
serra* r«a« ) ?XTCM ERROR j KEY rasrraac vaxsci scare i
t* l
\
i
TRIGGER No. 0 IIP SAMPLING CYCLE 0 X I.TBS
i Ho. QZGHKL
* +ÿ + •*-ÿ + -+ 4-ÿ
* +- + +
I i
$
1 00000000-0
IJ
2 oooooooo-o I
l
3 00000000-0
i 4
5
oooooooo-o
00000000-0
I
?
fi 00000000-0
Ii
<
:: 7 00000000-0
i
£
:?
i a oooooooo-o
i
i i
\
1 1
;
\
i
i
i
ioos/ii/is jiafsi: sa
l
t
! FW ioo% ['VIZ vV*A ioo%
SYSTEM pxtm KEY MEMORY RTRRT i
ERROR H.TS20RY SCOPE
i
WBB W TW/.ViV.V.VAW.'.V WWÿHWX'IWW.'ÿTO mu«i
Operation Procedure Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->

VERSION -> VERSION -> MEMORY SCOPE
174
Memory Scope
•Primary Function
Digital Recorder
-Ability to monitor 8 (eight) signals set to anything that is

an address
•inputs, outputs, latches, etc..
175
Memory Scope
176
Cursor down to the desired signal number!!

In this example, signal No. 1
M DIAGNQSIS(MAKER2)
File Window. y Help '
Hi » i
mm
SYSTEM -P AR'Mr I PITCH EPP.0P. | KEY HISTORY. >v;KEK0RY \3rftW
rS:
TRIGGER Wo.C
. Wo. SIGNAL , +
1 00000000-0 ;
M
f.ly,
M 3
$
2 .00000000-0 V -: Hi 3
3 00000000-0
*!ÿ
4 00000000-0
ft}.
5 00000000-0
'
6 00000000-0' , . V'lllifPSiii
m
ISW*y.
;v
£
> . K
7 00000000-0 •*
&
S Jslfvfe,
: %
8 00000000-0 * «
A:-
m- VVVilitl
•.
m mm \ iHM aMfimB
£
iVfii
vy •
i ij'-y.’"/-;;'1 \ «* vy;- •
-“- : ‘-‘i "*"v
}'ÿ' ’’ WW \ \ “:v -7',l/,‘V;7 % v ’
33 EMERGENCY STOP
rVV 10 0% [xjj Orpm WA 100 SiiHiP •r,
ss;
is-:
iiiiiin
?ÿ Y’
VVV--‘
A B- '
C D E j? 8.V iiiiil
------
V.;
>
A4
X A; i
‘S'-VT
•$
Memory Scope
Input the desired address, example X140-0

(For X146, type X146-0 input)
i DIAGNDSISIMAKER2)
3
Rle Window Help
mrntmmmmmt
SYSTEM ».<£AK| PITCH ERROR | KEY HISTORY MEMORY 3C OPE
v-'H’-W r '>ÿ .
: ;
--
:
TRIGGER No. 0 DOWN SAMPLING- CYCLE

Ho. SIGNAL + +; T; + +
1 00000000-0
2 00000000-0
iiiMiiiMHi silS
lilgi li
3 00000000-0 f . - r*S€: j
$
4 00000000-0
S 00000000-0
6 00000000-0
.7 ooo.ooqoo-o : I;;
M
..
8 00000000-0 Yg, m
gift
&
m
33 EMERGENCY STOP [ j ~'.:7 ]lÿpgjg ['2000/03/25' [12:52
!Vv To 05 |xj} Orpm [WvA 100 X14D-0
A . B C D E ?
177
Memory Scope
178
Insert up to 8 address’s
1 DIAGNOSISJMAKER2)
File VÿindoW' Help
3V3TEH PARAH
No SIGNAL,
PITCH ERP.0R KE'2 HISTORY
TRIGGER No. 0
:f; +ÿ
DOWN
+
.......
.ICCKORY-
jmmmmummmmmmmm
: ;
111
1: X0140 -0
2 00000000-0 mmmmmssmmSBmrnmmsi i'm

3 00000000-0 ii 9y
Cy'ti
4 00000000-0
A l§g§
5 00000000-0 fM •ÿi;’
s 'V;
$ & -w
6 00000000-0 >•
•0
£1 a&
7 00000000-0
8 ooodoooo-o
m mk
X
§*#« 2#
wmmm. y-: f?
Ni
33 EMERGENCY STOP ; '.(2,
I'vv’iaos
’
jxQ] Orpm fvWv 100
§§*
mmm
A:. •• B C D f
«r
WM
si
Memory Scope
XI 40-0 through X147-0
J DIAGNOSISIMAKER2)
File Window Help __
m
3Y3TEK PAR AH | PITCH EBP OR ] KEY KISTOP.Y HEHORY SCOPE: .
Mo.
1 X0140
SIGNAL
2 X0140
-0
-1
TRIGGER Mo. 0
+ +
-------- ----
DOUN SAMPLING CYCLE
+ +-—~+ + ----
tie
3
~+
wimmm
I
X'
®1§®M
%
3 X0140 -2
:ÿ i
4 X0140 -3
5 X0140 -4
/ >\\; ;§
6 X014D -5
IV?
v,m
7 X0140 -6 -
m- XX& X xMWB
8 X0140 -7 .-ÿÿ-•
'
:> ;
'
.,-
... .
&
33ÿEMER(ÿHCY. !7- aMMHMM [ v

'
, 2303/03/29 f 12: 57
P'/v 100% [Vjjr Or pm "100
_
:£\ _£jr
m
• •
DIAGHOS ; SYSTEM PITCH KEY. HEMORYf; *

'START,,, >i
PAPsAM ERROR HISTORY SCOPE 1 & X'iv
179
X140=Reset
Memory Scope
180
Enter the No. for the desired trigger signal
(MAKER2) i pi
File Window Help
ue. Tr¬
] | KEY MEMORY SCOPE:
Vvv'
______
SYSTEM PAJ..UI PITCH EPROP. HISTORY
No.
1X0140
.2X0140
SIGNAL
-0
-1;
.
-------- — ----
TRIGGER: Ho. 6
+ + -yw, +
DP SAMPLING CYCLE
+ r-
'•'5
+
.
20
.
W3M
x 7.,1m? ' ‘
.
$
> .
iu;
3 X0140 ~2
H
4 X0140 x3;
.5 XOl'lO -4.
6 X0140 £5: Illiii M

7..X0140 ;B6:
fSililil; :ÿ $
wsg®
8 XOi.iO: -7
liii 11
. 0:M -
I-;
33 EMERGENCY STOP
|vw ioo'
r~~~ I :2P0p/03/2ÿ. rls,; 02
fvv 1005 [zSQf Orpm
DIAGIJOS SYSTEM .PITCH ;,KEY, MEMORY START

PARAM ERROR HISTORY SCOEfel ?7$
u l
In this example, signal No. 6 will be used as the trigger

signal. (X145)
Memory Scope
ENTER 0 TO USE THE RISING EDGE
ENTER 1 TO USE THE FALLING EDGE
C DIAGN0SIS(MAKER2) U
File Window Help WmsmmF wmmwmmmmmmmmm
SYSTEM P ARMI:.|‘:P ITCH ERROP. KEY HISTORY MEMORY SCOPE 1 $ g tip w . ..: /.
'.
; /*?*•; ;; ‘
. ;; :V ;:ÿ-< >avi ;
TRIGGER No. 5 DOTO
No. . ; SIGNAL. -
-:4 - +V I- -;+ -:+i - mmmm
:TUW;
+ y + .V:.
1 X0140 . ..-0 I' ;v;,it
l|raHn| W
2 X014Q ~i
. 3' X0140 =rs2 '-..

r|®
:
‘l
'.'O’
-ÿ•ÿ
4 X0140 -3 Jg m$ mm My
i
W: mm
. 5 \X0140 -4 lltiSIfllll I
6 X0140 5
-A
7 X0140; -6 i mt istsi l
Vtvy/
3 X0140 -7
lliil®«a
33 EMERGENCY STOP V ] . ( IPlT 0 f 2000/C3/29 [“12: 58
j-W 100% p® Orpm |WA 100 •;* M
3*
jDIAGNOS SYS TEH PITCH KEY -START
SCORE®I
[ •
. - ;
i 'S’
I PARAH ERROR. HISTORY M i
THIS EXAMPLE USES THE FALLING EDGE

181
Memory Scope
182
INSERT TIME
(20 = .14 SECONDS)?
/ PIAGNOSIS|MAKEH2)
File .Window. Help
SYSTEM PAR All j PITCH ERROR
_
|KEVHIST0RV «wn?co»]
'
[E3
.........
wmmmmBi
TRIGGER Ho . S DO'JW SAMPLING CYCLE 0 7.1ns
No. SIGNAL
i
1 XOl'lO
2 XOi-4.0
-G
IP ,7
.
‘
IS § I
3X0140 -2
Wm ; gf|
4 XCI140 -3
\
gmxgMmmmmm
‘
B
<•
as p is
§i I M w®
5 X0H0
6 X0140
-4
-5
I M 8 11
7 X014U
8 X0140
-6
-.? W:
Wi§i® 11111 ; li
i® u w,US M m jg
II
EHEBGEMCY" SIOT
'
: [ [T2:S3PI?
i 33 i jTPS 0 2000/03/29
|w 1005 gj Orpin fWA ioo' p
I| s m .
DIAGNOS SVSTFW- I PTTfK TCFY MFWriRV' LTÿÿi START
PRESS START
'i
Memory Scope
The sampling cycle begins after the
desired trigger occurs.
,g DjABN0SIS|MAKER2| [$£}
File . Window Help 1
y W" V , t wmm
SYSTEM PAPAM ] PITCH ERROR] KEY HISTORY SCOPE

y -
j : . :v yw.-y.;.,.y .
-
j, ;'V
----
•
20 . x 7.1m 3
No;
1 XG14G
SIGNAL
-0;
TRIGGER No. 6
+----+
UP SAPLING. CYCLE
-
/ ,
'V
v“
-+
— .
2 X0140 -1
U'
M m WJ! :-7:
3 X0140 -2 mmmmi
4 X0140 -3
__
_
_ _ ;
S X0140 -4 ~~
:__
6 X0140, 5
~~
7 X0140 -6
8 X0140 -7
j ' '
- 7
yj33TEHERGENCY 2,
'
fl IÿPS 0 [-2000703/39 FÿTof

|vv'l00% prjjj 10 o" 1
"
Orpin. jy-M •• " : ' '
- !
' O ' -o • V.w- y.
DIAGNOS SYS T Ell

m EH»vraa
PITCH KEY HEHOEY |
PA RAH ERROR HISTORY ECPE
The result of signals will be displayed after the sampling

183
time cycle expires.

184
Maintenance Check
3l“fc
••ÿÿÿÿ$
;#§
.....
.
Vi
ivMmm®
U®2
i
l&raf
X1
il;
VI ?*
“65.3. .10
•'• 'v- •ÿ;.*•ÿ
3Bflgigj[
•
~
*
H
•. py- •
IBB
•-...
2
-
'ÿÿ
'
||||j|P
.' FT witm
SLIS
"
lliflf
EJ 5.'. mi
I
1
%
1
m
"ÿ
aJ* BE
'
J,,
1
f.
©i
,
t
;:'4& A :ÿ
Z1 -0.023
! .:
( »m
oc
k,
itf
m
il§S o c
X2
0.
0.
N
T13 nA 0
mm
*r :
... ...
•:ÿ
I*
I
11!
aw
» 22 0. :.•: PC .
. f • . 5....
•-!•' -
Si...
4W®8#L m
si 1
-'ÿ;
1
ill I is
>ÿ A . . .; i*S
n- i;- •.* 1 M
•» i!inssi!&! If
Uj. •:i . *>
S ; 8 I »l fi
| xW
t.v
o
o
0.
u
**/&/ÿ’••ÿ'>
Molin’ ly'i i
aa
ilKg :
r-t'i
*:» r>\
0 i -Ill SSlSMlt-i m 111 1$
vi
i
IHWHI ;>v
Ai-
•
3ÿ1
i*V'\ :
Maintenance X*%< K
Jr
.'I '
•
V
<
£
:9*
'r-
.
Check .
•
mu&zBx
.~ .. A? A- •*<'
*Y-»
.?
v.
?ÿ' ;
V '.<
H
•C--
,r
*
:1 u H it V 12 13
y 'ÿÿÿ-
muV
WfS
>£ •ÿ •
M I S| T
4 L+ 0
A !N
If K.i R F TV
•3TT. .
T/
i
:v;
Bii >. o.1

ft u
rXj°
.•-:i '•
m
i t i
;
A1 A pi A * I-
8 '•i m
iv w *|A..' «»* 1 1T* 8
Vi!
1 v?;“
:i;;8
T v V .« »W I V
TTT
t '. <* 1 E>
185
.
1
8HR .
ia««
Maintenance Check Display
186
|/*MWNIt;HMiK?E CHECK
Pil*.' Wrdcw Hob
Bo. mwrnmjci OTCK aiti.1 (»l pxmoua ana;
trot.
lSOp-HJfS' CHECK .1TOK 118 ELI 1593.. 6. A
3000
30C0-WS CHECK . 3TEH2
'
H82LJ 1998. 6. 4
c
l CHECK' GUIDE ’ BAY 1.18 2L1 1993. C. A
tUB-ou- 1 6;
CHICK BHMDiG I382LJ L953. C . 4
LUB-OIL
,3- CHICK COOldlTI XZVEL
0
I102L] . 1593.! C . 4
Function \4\ CHAN

S
cooijjri jiirzK
CHECK- aar- LcvEi t;;

IH CHIP SUCKl’T
6 am.HicHnajioÿRU
•
. f
f
i
_o
0
1 1821] .
I192L)
1 18 2L]
.1993,. C. 4
. 1993. C. 1
L993. C .4
'
•Periodic check of items .
: ."[.m 0:i 'l999/p5>3C . '34147

ri/~2'±i
fv.- Z0
SOI | Orpa )*V/ O.OClu/iU) K V.-f'-v;;
Last date of check POSITION DliGUOS

. .
if m Lonuiewi
mu
that has elapsed since the last Check
Machine function continues, even after the display of time

elapsed exceeds the target time
2 pages, 8 lines each, 16 items total

i
i r»k HC*
\t
I *• •
Ho. MJlXHTEHftJWCe CHECK DATA TIME <H) PREVIOUS CHECK

5 1500
:
15 QO-fiKS CHECK ITEMS ( 101] 2005. 10. 31
II VV 3000
f
l
5
l 1
3000-fcfcS CHECK ITEMS
* 1500
1 101]
l 101]
2005. 10. 31
2005. 10. 31
I
£
1500
..;* m •0
i ion 2005. 10. 31
%
3 l 101] 2005. 10. 31
:=
0
: 4 v t 1°1] 2005.10. 31
I 0
I
$ CD v.;
— "
o
1.
I 1013 2005. 10. 31
I
s 6 1 101] 2005. 10. 31
I
1/ 2 -iJ - \
Ij
!
V
; XM 0 2005/10/31 -10:23:57 l
/V\/ 0’s Iff 7 5 Owin'1 VW'- 07*m/j»in
s i
:
l’OSXTXOJI D1A0W0S - LOHGTCRW
1
i •''.DATA "
Operation Procedure : Display selector key DIAGNOS — > MAINTEN CHECK
187
; W
His
File Hr*.
ISOO-BRS CHECK ITEMS

HO
1 II
2 18
3 19
4 20
5 21
b 22
7 23
8 24
9 25
10 26
11 27
12 2B
13 29
14 30 o ?: /ÿ
15 31
16 32
1/ 2
1
irs o' 2005/10/31 ;10: 24; 06
0>» . .0? TSOBIJII"1 VAA Owm/nin
POSIT.tOH DtACHOS
PRTA
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->

MEINTEN CHECK -> LONGTERM DATA
188
'itnn'TR u
Mazatrol Fusion 640M MAINTENANCE CHECK Dtspl-ay
Function:
•Pertodls cfleet Herrs. the lasl dale of sheeting. and tie time that has elapsed since ine I3&1
dsie or cPEcv.lr-g are displayed.
• Periodls elect Items car ba regls'.arec.
£8.173 rtf-S:
Tne machine will net stop even rT:ne display df die. time wfclsh: has elapsed since tne last date oT
checking exc-aecs 'fie target lime.
Data display
1. Displayed data
IP WMBTCH*JKige OUECK m
FJ« ..*#W=W Hflp
Ho, ILkTfTtllTAJfC! CB1CK UAtA. . TOT&lHJj PJvI 71D VS 5HIC K
WEB
i
i
;t4i :
r
I I
%
1 Pd : 1
it; I
ia Si; m m
1
ns m [ ili %
iÿmm
i
t I:
f)
mmm;
»«»W4V«V>iV4MMm ». .
L. Hi j~ i jggvff/ jiggfe
fw i&et EUSHH ESZEEBHH 5A-,
1
D725S1CB3S
2. Display data description
Me. tem Ur It Data desedpflon

n Kc-. CAficK number
HA-IMTUCrvHCE.
3 Hvr# or a e«rti>:l- cr«3 Rem
CM to: HAT*
3 riMt Graph k:a; repreggnlaton cf ire rate et 1h» currer,! Brr-e la Bre targe l. rm e
•il Targcl irne haur Target fmt for the rxf.DO'c chxK HOT
189
53 CuTcnUme Hru’ CuTcrTt BmsfcfUiepenca'c chscK Itesa

S3 PREV30US OJZCK 'V M. 0 The art da% cf periodic cire-rt Hem
PJ<;C Page number
3. Registering the data for regular check itei
190
A. Presetting, the target time or the current time

f 1) Moÿ/e the cursor to r.he data item sstiere data is to c<= preset.
(2‘f Enter ‘me.
Example: Specify fc90" and press ihe INPUT icey to input 90.
Note: Entry cf toe current time updates the date of date item [5] (PREVIOUS CHECKS
Data display for Cong-term check items (1500 and 3000 hours check items)
1. Displayed data
CHECK Pi
Fib H«]p •;
1SD0-HJS CHECK IJLHS

Kto- /'ÿ
1 IT.
2 ii'
3
i CD >•
S V ti'
*5
VI S2J Ilf 123

LO u
It ZT
IS 2D
L3
U.
m
$0
LS £'*31 V
LG - DE¬
r;a~d
i ftJsTfl f is3®?B5?as ; neiia'
iw lfitil m luu* |W
07355-1:0692.

Na. MfifB U.Tit. Data descrpUon.
£i; Me . Cfteclc numa-r
K Check terns -oca terra ensefc Hsre.-
a; Fat* Fags minber
Display operations
The display status of cata item will reverse when- the oirrent time reaches the target, time. After
a:m per.cn of checking. rrÿ the cursor to "No.” using the cursor key and then press the INPUT
key. The display cf data item will then return from the .reverse status to Che rarmac status.
Entry of the check items to be displayed
The check items to fee displayed cannot be entered directly on the MAINTENANCE CHECK
display. This subsea cn cescrbes the procedure for adding cr deleting the check items to be
displayed.
1 ) Save the factory-set data cf display items beforehand into the file.
21 Execute the File Write function to create a file under the specified directory (see Item 2
below).
3) Edit the text file as required l see hen 1 betcw).
*5) Execute the File Read function tc fetch the data onto the display (see Item 2 below).
1. Registering the data of the check itemrs

Using a comnerciavy avalable edrtcr. open the text fi© of the folcwng format under the
spec flee directory tom 64mdstai engVnai rnenan ce.txt ).
(urcon] ; .n*stf*rof c-en'cai-c cr,czv. terns'
.Cc'ur-enr Vn»
i, CHECK -JUICE V&Y LUB-OIL
2-4,
[rail IS] ; n'es*ar Zff ate c£ ,Tdm z
I.CKAHJE HVDFJtULIC UNIT OIL
32.
[TW13-0]; Weaker of KtC-nrs cnec*.terns
1, CHECK HACHItfE LEVEL
32,
Note: “eng' in the directory name conespends with the language currently selected for the
display mate.
191
\
192
Entry of the check items to be displayed
A. Data format of the periodic check items

[urconj P-ixic-ali-s ebacÿb icinto - lJp to 24 items can be registered.
1, -TÿE-TT: ma WAY LUP-OTL
- Set the description after the serial number and
comma.
24
Note: The description can oonsst of up to 4D characters (a two-byte code is counted as two
characters). Excess items or characters will be ignored.
B. Data form at of the lo ng-term ched! items

[insllS] r!h*c!c it.ana - Up to 32 items cam: be registered.
l, •:m>?eg HSHE53JLI£ SSSU. OIL - Set the description alter the serial number and
comma.
22
[BSil-Q] SCOO-hr* c Ic
2,. CHECK WACKIKE LEVEL
22,
Note: The description can consist of up to 40 characters {a two-byte code is counted as two
characters). Excess items or characters will be ignored.
__
2* Read and Write of check items’ text file
A> the check items presented cn the MAINTENANCE CHECK display can be read in from, and'
written into, the specified text file. Use a commercially avaBable ed&ar to prepare a text file
ccnlainirÿi the desired check items to be read m and presented cn the display.
A. File Read
Using a commercially available edftar< prepays a text file (containing the desired check items}
and copy it into the specified cirecsory.
j&>MAIMTEHAN6E CHECK
Film
iu7My,
! File ftead
• Filÿhoi zazcic.z
Select the option 'File Reac" through the item Tile" cn Ihe menu bar to start data loading. The
contents thus reaa In vrill be displayed as shown betow upon completion of loading.
:/«iMiinewawe cure*
Fib- Vrxlcw h.fc ssmÿ '• - - ' smm
wamnifle* DtECj-riiti.
'
.TIJIl
S2s;’*;-v
_
].POD.-}i0aÿHi.(;>tv;iTia5;
m
rHECXCUIOl-.WTf
UE'rQIL'.
‘
,
ySyy.-:
$£Sx).
VN*.
m >&y:
i ,
2- CB20t.SPI«l,n -v- : ;f S
•
LOT.-OItÿ:: : ; •
.
0
'"-t: ‘"”7
: "-31’-”
mmm
;E
-;:b
, ' :" ; m lit
Vst
.. ..
..----3:
B. Rle Write
Select the option Tile Write" through the item Tile' on the nvsnu bar to save the display data.
A text file containing the current display data will be created under the specified directory.
yfeMAIttfrewroE CHECK
filu, WrÿsTl-ksIp •.ÿ•?ÿ
H~d-”v fisrirar
193
r"
194
r*
, 'IY,'-'.V.'I'I VI'. Vi‘:V.'\ AMAMM .NA'.'I W AVA\\VA\WAÿYÿWÿÿSWjNSÿÿV
r* I mMm
SMU£322S.*-..ÿY__
F!
r
y
'
.. _/.....,- *
|| „ . -
L; - OY « Y v
r
» . •, j t .' J Gs&gggi
:h Vfafort IV&
! r ronfT | sen i
! UtHE/riCE/3D CO /ISO LIWT | SXSTCK<1I5UI) TURKISC HKMTHE TUS SCLJD
\
I ;
I
>
D1 30 D25 f 5 049 0 D73! 300 D97 00000000 0121 j 0
! i
02 10 D26 2 D50 0 D7 4 } 500 D98 00000000 D122 I 0 :
i >
$ 03 2 D27 0 D51 0 D7 5 I 1000 D99 00000000 D123 j 0 s
04 10 D20 5 052 O 976 10 DlCO OOOOOOOQ 01241j 0 1
r v i 029] 0 053 50 0101 00000000 0125 j 0
05 0 0 077 i
3 030 3 054 D7B 3 D102 0126 0
I 06
D? 5 031 0 055
0
0 D7 9 1 20 D103
00000000
00000000 D127 0
::
D8 32 D32 3 056 0 DBO I: 200 D104 oooooooo D128 0 5
Df) 45 D33 5 057 0 DB1] 500 D105 oooooooo 0129 0 \
63 034 0 058 j D106 oooooooo I 0
DIO 0 DQ2 700 0130} 5
t
?-
Dll 10 D35 20 059 0 DB3] 0 D107 oooooooo D131J 0 I
:
:
[ 012 5 036 100 060 0 984 0 D108 OOOOOOOO 0132
1 0
l\
l 013
014
015
10
3
5
037
D3B
D3$
100
2
20
D61
062
D63
0
0
0
OB 5 1
DBO 1
DB7 !
o
0
0
0109
0110
Dill
0
0
0
0133|
0134|
0135|
0
0
0
I
!:
I D16 2 D40 2 D64 0
I
DB8 j 0 D112 0 D136| 0
I
:
; D17
D10
D19
10
9
2
D41
D42
943 3
0
0
2
065
066
D67
0
0
0
D89 j
D90 j
091| 11110001
0
0
D113
D114
Dll 5
0
0
0
D13B
0139
i
D137 j
5
0
0
0
!
t
020 60 944 !1 0 960 0 D92 j 00001111 0116 0 D140 j 0
021 6 94 5 !I 100 069 0 D93 j OOOOOOOO 0117 0 0X41 : o
:
II D22 0 94 6| 100 070 0 D94| OOOOOOOO DUB 0 D142 j O .
1
o o
1 D95 j OOOOOOOO
:
! DZ3 D47 100 D7l 0 D119 0 0143 i i
024 2 048| 0 D72 0 D96 !- OOOOOOOO D120 0 0144] o
:
:
I
i 1
l
1 ]
M", ;i»; i3:53
i f\j\j 5Q%
!
sinr Omin WA:ÿ
0*u*i/nin
\
i
3 9OlH'7 LXH , FACE EIA/X30 son SYSTEM V TV AM.me MACH me SOLID Ptc MACH1HE
ID) 30 [£ J m Z.3MXtriX] [SU] ITC] TXM£ ISO] PARIIM- PAFAM. <
:
:
> t
w*m f mmmemmm vÿ. A'.'.' ;.VW/WWWWWJMU.WJ
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> PAPJy>vl POINT
195
iVi*yYAV»‘»‘>v‘.y»yr*
! ®s» •
:-.
fm. Vfafcri .C--:->V.-r
.
KEA'asa: l TJ3ILE CSH. WKRP iXH> VEL. TDC cmcr- SMOTHER | SrjHOLE I B2KWER
f.
:: K1 0 K25 0 yX49 0 K73 00000111 y:)'.KSlÿ] £00 < > K121 0 i

"
I K2 500 K26 0 #: K50 0 I; K7 4 0 K9B *00< > K122 0 i
•-:-V
: K3 0 K27 o f; x5i 0 : K75 0 K99 £4 2 K123 0
f •'\K4 ; 9 K20 0 KS2 0 K76 O A K100 £5A<Z> K124 0 ;

i K5 4 K29 o :• A K53 O K77 0 K101 *5B<X:> '><125 0 i 7;:. K80 0 K104 00 000 000 K128 o
: K9 0 -:K33.: 0 X57 o l- Kdi 0 KlOS 00000010 XI29 0 i
I
K10 0 ;'J :K34 j 0 $:;X58 0 K82 0 K106 10001000 K130 0
•:
Kll 0 j;. ¥35 | 0 X59 0 K83 0 K107 10100000 K131 0
> K12 0 , K36 | 0 X60 4 K84 0 K108 0 §•: K132 0
;
K13 30 K37 | 2000 K61 1 KB5 0 K1Q9 0 X133 0
;
X14 2000 K33 O K62 ! 1 Kfi$ 0 KUO 0 K134 0 S
K15 30 K39 O K63 1 K87 0 Kill 0 y X135 0 ;
s
i 2000 K40 0 K64 2 K08 0 kii 2 0 K136 0 :
i
£
5
K1V
K18
K19
25
50
1000
K4X
K42
K43
120
120
K65
120 -:ÿk66!
K67
1
i
1
j
j
:--m&
K91
K89 0
100
0 K115
8ft 0
0
K138
K139
0
0 ;
K20 1000 X44 120 X6B 00000000 K92 0 KllS 0 *140 0
:
-
K21 100 X45 120 K69 00000001 K93 2 V/ K1.17 0 XI 41 0
K22 1 ...;V-V46 0 K7 0 00000011 4*94 IOO< > V; K118 0 K142 0 v.y. V;
' ;
K23 1 K47 0 Kll 00000111 K95 10001000 K119 0 Cviu.43 0 :
\
. . . K24 0 K48 0 K72 00000111 IC96 10000000 K120 0 XI 4 4 0
i
; HVS 0 2005/11/01 13; 24: 57

1'.
>
|/W 100% i- ifr 7 SOinin’1 Qxn/min i %s.3
-
.*••**> » .VA "If k*-.'
- i
l
MKA50RC TABtE WACKO PECO xiWBV,-:. ANOTHER SÿXWOXE USER
I
[KJ [1ÿ1 m V£L. JH) COHSXIMJ S\ m {SA1 i: . |BA] PAKAM. 2AKAI1-
V;V ;;'iV
mm miiujjxiw V.VMV.VM’-'-VXV.WAV/.V.W//.',”
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> PARAM -->

DLA.CHINE PARAM. IvIEASURE
196
:
I n? V: \
J F.S"
|
TXH ns ! KL KB
j
{
$ J
urn j 30 TXM25 0 TIM49 10 0 T1M73 50 TXM97 0 TXM121 0 TXM145 j 0
TIM?
TIM3
:
!
Ii
30
50
TIM26
TIM27
0
0
TIM50
TIM51
0
0
TIM74
TIM75
0
SO
TIM98
TIM99
0
0
TIM122
TIK123
0 TXM146
0 TIM147
J
j
0
0
i
TXH4 j 20 TIM2B 0 TXX52 0 TIM76 50 TIM100 0 THH24 0 TIMldd o
TIMS | 20 TIM2J> 0 TIW53 0 TIM77 600 T1M10X 0 TIKI 2 5 0 TIM149 ; o
TIM6 i 200 TDflO 30 TIM54 0 TIM78 30 TIM102 0 TIM126 0 TH4150 0
TIM7 20 TIM31 30 TIMS 5 0 TIM79 60 TXM103 0 TIM127 0 TIMlSlj 0
TIM8 : 100 TIM32 30 TIM56 1 0 T2M80 0 TIM104 0 TXM12B 0 TJM152 o
:
TIW9 | 20 TIM33 30 TXH57 ! 0 T3M81 P T1M105 0 TIM129 o rmx53 o i
TJMlO j 300 TIM34 300 TIM50 10 TIM82 0 TIM106 0 TIM130 0 TIM154 0

TIMll j 150 TH<£35 3600 TTM59j 10 TIM83 0 TXM107 0 TIM131 0 TTM155 0 :
TXMl? } 30 0 T3M36 20 T3M60
1 10 T3M84 0 TXMlOB 0 TIH132 0 T1M156 0
: TXMI3 fJ
1.50 XIH37 600 TXM61 10 TDW05 0 TXM109 0 T3DMI33 o tmisi 0
TIM14 | 50 TIH30 10000 TIM62 70 TIM06 0 TIM110 0 TIM134 P TIM150 o
TIMlS !I 1000 T3M39 10 T3M63 1 10 THI87 0 TIM111 0 TIM135 0 TIM1S9 0 c
i
TIMI6 0 TIM40 15 T3M64 0 TXW88 0 TIM112 0 TIM136 O TIM160 0 j
nmxi : 0 TXM41 10 TXM65 0 TIM89 0 TXM113 j 0 TXM137 0 TXM161 o
Tima i 1 TIM42 15 TIM66 0 TIM90 0 TIM114 0 TIM138 0 TJM162 0
TIM19 j 70 TIM43 600 TIM67 0 TIM91 0 TXM115 j 0 TIM139 0 TIM163 0
i TIM20 100 TIM44 1800 T3M68 5 10 T3M92 0 TXMH6 j 0 TIM140 0 TIH164 I 0
I TIM21
TXM22
TIM23
TIM24
0
0
3
4 TXH45
TIM46
TIM47
T3M4B
600 TXM69
3000 TIM70;
100 TIM71
50 TIM"/ 2
;
10
0
0
50
TTM93
TXM94
TIM95
TIM96
0 TTMIX7|
0 TXM110
0 TIMll!)
0 TIM120
I !
O
0
0
0
TTK141I
TIMll 2
TIMl43i
TIM144
j
j
O
0
0
O
T1X165
T1M166
T1X167 !
TIM168 :!
;
0
0
0
0
:
•:
<
t
i- i
:
gmspr J 10 ; 15; 50 i•:
1
>
50% ljS3) drain* vwr~ Omro/saiit
:
USER MftCttlitE
[TIM] IRS] [RX.J [«»]
:
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> PARAM

PLC PARAMETER -> TIM
197
5 5
17. T
% MS
fi* \f** VftVKkr, H*ÿ>
?
$
« »
i
PROGRAM
HC
i? i
#|
r
I
:
PROGRAM
— DIRECTORY:
m\ %
Ji *f
l
i !
; !
| '
!
:
1\ ;
i :
i
!
I
I ;
SAVE 1 i
l ! \ 1 \ \
:
i \ i
I
: ! !
%
! V
i
\
!
i
I
I
I
!
: :
I
aI 91 Jfi l
§
1 T
>
OTHER DATA - OTHER DATA
I ] ?
l !
I
i
! T \
i :<
i
I
I
I I .*.-ÿ•.*:• • \-L~ Jr-sr.ÿr* -T-J.
\
i
i
i
*
I IfPS-O ;200S/ja/15 jwYss : 35
I
1 *
i BB3SMB— p/<M ioo% !
i
i
CARD SWM)
MSK
ii$fi FLOPPY TAPE CMT CAH DATA
swe
sI
5
..«•-»•ÿ-—
---
---
------
-- ------
»«
- —
----- "•
--
’-»-—•
---—
-ÿ -«» •- dJ 55
198
199
200
y.y;.\-.-.\ .. .vN>.; •ÿW S>>KSS>
! POSITION PR2J H*
rite Ym* Settp Window Hefc
POSITION BUFFER NEXT COMMAND \ WHO , US
xi 0. XI 0 . G ( ) < )
Y 0. Y 0. M UNO, Qj *,
0 ~ 0
21 w4 . 5 21 0. T
B 0. B 0. COUNTER ot 0)
Cl 0. Cl 0. NEXT COMMAND LOW <MODAL IOW >
X2 13.30 X2 6. G S 0 F 0* M 0
Z2 15.14567 Z2 0. M G 0 G 18 G G 23 G 98 G 20 G 40
C2 0. C’2 0 , T G G 80 G G 653 5 . G 64
w 0. w 0. G 68 G 67 G €9.56 97 6123 G
6123.16111 &5Q , 2 €1.13 613.1
MACHINE REMAIN OFFSET LOW i
Q xx 0. XI 0, z 4, S . i
Q o. Y 0. C 0. ;
Q zi 0. Zl 0. ft*. SPDL 0 MXN’1 0 100 200

9 B 0. B 0. 
.
0 FT /MIN M, iPDIi
o Mor1 T.r SPDL Ij
0
0 cl 0. Cl 0. T SPBLl 0
Q X2 0. X2 0. <1> 0 FT /MIN
9 22 0. 22 0. T , SPDL2 o Miir1 T *• BWBL 2\ 0
0 C2 0, C2 0. <15 0 FT /MIN Xl-lixj 0
Q w 0. w 0. YrUX | 0
FEED 0* IN /MIN 0
T No , 1B- ->-> TNo . 0 MRGAZNPKHo. 12 0. Xftf/REY 8-AX !
( GENERAL OUT ) < ) ( B 0* * /min
Cl-ftxj 0
LOW 108 Cl 0, * /min
UNIT : < C2 * /min X2-AX 0
LOW 0. IN /MIN Z2-AX
0» IM/REV C2-AX| 0
w'tr
W-AX | 8
CE1 mm \ «El:Z006/12/13 69:44:27
m
&
:
V\J o% O.
rprn iVWo.Ot
s in /min •tvw W/A' y-yff
* •/?,
POSITION SET UP PROGRAM TOOL C-COHD. PARAM DIAGNOS DATA TOOL DISPLAY
INFO, DATA I/O LAYOUT MAP
Select DIAGNOS
201
''
/•DIAGNOSiSjUSW) M Wm. m FV
pile View Setup WirxizM Help
202
.
;aLWi W*iRM KISTOEOT i PLC SIGNAL
No, ALARM MESSAGE HEAD DATE TIME TYPE
!
:
m •V? !
,I
O/Yr 0% 0 rpm VV\A 0 , 00 in /min
VERSION ALARM ALARM PLC MAINTEN SXIHHIHG GRAPHIC. DATA ACCCTMU ,

HISTORY SIGNAL CHECK CONTROL MAINTE . ERASE TIME
Select VERSION
Jlmmmmm Wmlm1 P§|| Pl§ •<&£ m
Fie
Help Winejgwi
VERSION ; DIAGNOSIS iJONITOR j OPTION j SERVO MONITOR | SPIKDLE MONITOR j KiRD-VOlKE WDHITGR
UNIT FCU7-MA513-22 SERIAL M73682107 61 MODEL FC&750RY-NQ3
j ITEM VERS ION ITEM VERSION MOTOR MACHINE ITEM VERSION

MAIM -A 10O1WOO0-B4A SRV-Xl ( ) < ) J2CT-1
MAIN-B 1001W001-BO SRV-Y ( ) { > J2CT-2
LG -ENG 1001W011-BO
1001W37 4 - A1310
SRV-Zl < ) ( ) J2CT-3
LADDER-F SRV-B < > ( > J2CT-4
LAD D£ R S — 1001W37 4 - A1310 SRV-C1 ( ) < > J2CT-5
LGPENG I001W011- BRV-X2 ( ) < J2CT-6
37 4A1300 2 8RV-Z2 ( ) ( ) J2CT-7
SRV-C2 ( ) { > J2CT-8
SRV-W ( ) ( >) J2CT-9
SRV-10 ( ) ( J2CT-10
SRV-11 ( ) ( ) J2CT-11
SRV-12 ( > ( } J2CT-12
SRV-13 < ) ( > J2CT-13
SRV-14 i ) ( ) J2CT-14
SUV IS ( ) ( >
SRV-16 ( ) < >
SPN-1
SPN-2
<
(
>) {
(
>
i
SPM-3 ( ) ( }
SPN-4 < ) ( )
y
SFN-5 ( ) <
SPN-6 c ) ( )
SPM-7 c ) < >
:: SPH-B ( ) < >
Ell mr TPS 0 2006/12/13 09:44:55

r-i Oh s •» i ID Or pm :\AM o . 00 in /min II
DIAGHOS VERSION DIAGNOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER

Select DIAGNOS MONITOR

203
gggaa;
File Window Help

204
i VERSIQH MACHOSIS MBflTOft j OPTION ! SERVO MONITOR | SPTtffiLE MONITOR j HARDWARE ICOIIITGE.
MEMORY MONITOR 0ISP I/O MONITOR I) ISP t/o nmttm ntsp

ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADR35 FEDCEA98765432I0 HEX SHORT LONG xm%% wx SHORT WWG
1 KKOOOOOOOO oaoooooo 00 XGQ510 OOOOODOOOOODOOOO 0000 0 o TOO110 aaloooolaloooaal 2 111 8513 8513
KKOOOGODD1 oooooooo 00 X00520 oooooooooooooooo 0000 d TOO120 OQDDOOOOODOOOQOD 0000 G
KHOOOOO0O2 csaoooooo DO X005 3O ocscicic>e‘DOOQec?CidJCj<3 BOQG 0 Q TOO 130 eoÿOOOO<MWob'OQ!l»& 0000 Q -mzomsm
I KK00000003 00000000 00 XQ054Q 0000 ODDOOO DDQOQO 0000 0 TQ0140 tlrnntl&QaoomQ CF00 ~t2W
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ARR33 FEDCBA96‘765432 10 HEX SHORT MJWG XWm T&VG$MSW?G5*$ZIQ MX SHORT tom
j KKOOOOOOOO OOODOOOO 00 XOOIQO oooo DO lo IO-OOOD11 0283 643 643 TOO 3 40 oootsoo0OODOOoid<fO 0000 0 Q
j KHOOOOODOl OO&OOOOO 00 X00110 0000000000000000 D000 a T003SD OOOOOOOOOGOOCIOOO 0000 0
KKOOOQ00O2 gooDDCioo 00 X003.2Q ooooooooooftooood 0000 a Q TOO 3 60 O«moOOOOMdO!i»N»0 oooo Q 0
KKOOOO0GO3 00000000 00 XOO130 oooooooooooooooo 0000 0 TOO 370 OOOOOOCIOÿOOOOOOD 0005
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADR55 FEDCSA98765432I0 HEX SHORT L<MQ IB RSS F EDGE A98?6543310 HEX SHORT LONG
i
KKOOOOOOOO OQOOOOOQ 00 X00140 oooooooooo-oooooo 0000 0 -2147463648 TOO0OO ocNÿooooooloool11 0047 71 71
j KHOOOOODOl oaoooooo DO XD0150 looooooooo oooooo 6000 -32768 T0001D OO*DOOOOOODOOQC)00 0000 0
I KKOOOOOGD2 00000000 oo XOO16 D 0000000000000000 DODO a o wmZQ OOOO u Q
KK00009003 oaoooooo 00 X00170 oooo C'Oooooo:D oooo 0000 0 TOO 03 0 aoooooooo-oooocioo 0000 0
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS FEDCEA987654321D HEX SHORT L-mo kms% FEDCHA987654S21P HEX SHORT LW3
| KKOOOOOOOO oaoooooo GO 3301040 0000000000000000 DOOO 0 0 ¥00530 aoooooooDoooQoao 0000 M 0
! KHOOOaOOOl oaoooooo 00 HO10 5 6 oooaaoooooaooooQ DODO a TOOB40 oaaoooooooooooao OOOO o
KH0QQ00D02 00000000 00 H01072 aoooaaooooaoooaa oooo o a ¥00650 0000000000000000 OOOO O 0
HHOOOO00O3 oaoooooo 00 330108© ooooaoooooaooooo OOOO 0 ¥00860 0000000000000000 GOOD 9
f
; MEMORY MONITOR If RITE I/O MONITOR WRITE
ADD RESS 7 6 $4.3 2 10 HEX ADR38 FEDC BA987 65432 id HEX SHORT LONG
I KHOOOQOOOO oooooooo DO R02 100 oooaoooooaaooooo DOOO 0 0
P02101 0000000000000000 OOOO Q
:
f
DB1 W 0 2006/12/13 I
09:45:13
r\f\ 0% ~sTT[o Or pm VV\A 0 . 00 lw /min I

DIAGNG5 VERSION DIAGNOS OPT ion SERVO SPXHDLE HARDWARE LADDER
HOHIT OR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR
WM
RWMMj
T POSITION [TR2] wswmttm vmm

fife Vew Setup Window Hep
POSITION BUFFER NEXT COMMAND i WMÿTM

xl 0. XI 0. G < ) < )
Y 0. Y 0. M mro, 0 0 “ 0
21 -4.5 21 0, T
B 0, 8 0, COUNTER 0( 05
Cl 0. Cl 0. NEXT COMMAND LOW <MOOflX LOW >
X2 13. 38 X2 0. G S 0 F 0. H 0
22 15.14567 22 0. M : G 0 G 18 G G 23 G 98 G 20 G 40
:
C2 0. C2 0. T G G 80 G G G53. 5 G 64
w 0. w 0. G 68 G 67 G 69.5G 97 G123 G
G123 . XG1X1 <350 .« 2 G113 G13.1
MACHINE REMAIN OFFSET LOW
0 xi 0. XI 0. z 4,5
®1 0. Y 0, C 0,
Q Zl 0. Zl 0. M, SPDL 0 MXN'1 0 100 200
?
0 cl
B 0.
0.
B
Cl
0.
o.
<15
T , SPDLl
0
0
FT/MIN Mt RPDL
MXJT1
0
Tv SPDL Xi 0
0 X2 0. X2 0. <15 0 FT/MXH T SJPDL 2]
0 Z2 0, Z2 O r
. T . 8PDL2 0 MIN ”1 * 0
0 C2 0, 02 0 V <15 0 FT /MIN 0
0 W O. W 0, Y~*« ! 0
FEED 0, IM/MIN Zl- 0
TNo. IB- 0 ->-> TNo, 0 MAGAZHPKHo* 12 O. IH/REY B~AX 0
(GENERAL OUT ) ( ) < LOT 108
)
o
B 0* * /min
* /min Cl-AX 0
i ci 0*
T
UNIT ( ) C2 0. *
/min 0
LOW O. IN /MIN Z2-AX] 0
0» IN/REV C2- 0
W-AX 0
r
nil P *BS 0 2006/12/13 09; 44: 27
n % HD rpm vWo.ooin /min
POSITION SET UP PROGRAM TOOL C-COKD , PARAM DIAGNOS DATA TOOL DISPLAY
In the 1131 Mode

205
Select DIAGNOS
/' DIAGNQSISflJSER)
Bte View Setup Window Help
206
j iLfcUM :j ftLftRM KISIGHY j FLC SIGTOL j

NO. ALARM MESSAGE HEAD DATE TIME TYPE
&
’ ; :
m TPS 0 2006/12/13 09:44:40
VV\A o . 00 in /min
0% MB Orpm
i
VERSION ALARM ALARM PLC MAINTEN RUNNING GRAPHIC DATA ACCOMU *
HISTORY SIGNAL CHECK CONTROL MAINTE . ERASE TIME
Select VERSION
mm
fi :fl<y
Rl? Window Hgfe?

I VERSION i DIAGNOSIS KOHITQP. ! OPTION i SERVO MONITOR f SyrWLE MONITOR I K&HDVaRE KQHITOR
:
‘
OH IT fan -ms13-22 SERIAL M73682I07 61 MODEL FC&7509Y~lf03
\
ITEM VERS ION ITEM VERSION MOTOR MACHINE ITEM VERSION
MAIN- A 1OO1WOO0-B4A SRV-X1 < ) ( ) J2CT-1
\ MAIN-B 1001W001-B0 SRV-Y < ) < > J2CT-2
LG-ENG 1Q01W011-BO SRV-Zl ( ) c J2CT-3
LABDER-F 10G1W37 4 - A131Q SRV-B ( > ( j J2CT-4
LADDER- B 10011937 4 - A1310 SRV-C1 > { > J2CT-5
LORE NO 1001W011- SEV-X2 c > i > J2CT-6
i 374A23QQ 2 8RV-ZZ C ) £ ) J2CT-7
; M Model 0373GM03300 SRV-C2 ( ) £ ) J2CT-8
S SRV-W C ) £ > J2CT-9
;
SRV-10 £ ) £ >) J2CT-10
SRV-11 ( ) < J2CTr-.ll
J2CT-12
SRV-12 ( ) £
;
SRV—13 ( ) £ ) 4J2CT-13
! 8RV-14 £ ) £ > J2CT-14
SRV’-' IS ) £ )
SRV-16 ( ) £ )
SPN-1 ( ) ( )
SPN-2 £ > £ )
SPN-3 < ) £ >
SFtf-4 ) £ )
SEN- 5 < ) £ )
SRN~6 £ ) £ >
SPN-7 ( ) £ J
SPN-B ( ) £ )
m TPS 0 2006/12/13 09:45: 55

r\KJt 0% sTf(a Orpm V# 0.00 ill /min v :-S
J*
DIAGNGS VERSION DIAGN0S OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER VERSION

The other VERSION will now appear ( one way you know you are IN the 1131 mode)
207
Select DIAGNOS MONITOR

-m*
/'DUMTO'UKff'' . .... m
Fil- Window He|p
208
I VERSION M&SH0SIS MONITOR j OPTION I

’
1
SERVO MHJITOR ! SPINDLE MHUTOR KSRtrtraRE KOHITOR
HE KORY HON I TOR D1SP I/O KCNITOR DISF I/O HOWltOR PISF
ADDRESS 765432 10 HEX ADR3S FED€§A9876S4321C! HEX' SHORT Larc APRS? FEW:!W£*7$543210 HEX SHORT LCW
KHOOOOOOOO oacoQOQQ 00 XOO-SIO ooaooooooooooooo 0000 0 0 TOO!10 ooloooololoooool 2111 8513 8513
:
j HHD0000B01 O€5-000000 00 X0Q520 0000000000000000 0000 a TOO120 0*0000000000000 OD 0000 D
| KHOOOQODP2 aooooooo 00 XOQ530 oooaÿDpdOdOooao 0000 0 a TOO130 3CKrooO$0$toQOOCM»i& 000P 0 -8220835i4
I HHQOO00OO3 oooooooo 00 HOO540 oa a a ©00000000000 0000 0 100140 lloolUlaooooQÿD CFO0. ?12544
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADR3S EEX'CE A98765432 10 HEX SHORT LCWQ mam TWQBtsmmwzm HEX SHORT mm
| KHOOOOOOOO o3oooooo 00 XOOlQO oooooo lo loo ODD11 0283 643 643 YQ034Q OQ oooooQOooooGioo OOOO 0 0
j KHOOOOOQOl OOQOOOOO 00 X00110 oooooooooooooooo oooa 0 TOO 3 50 OODOOOOQOOOOOOOO 0000 0
j KKOOGGQOG2 00000000 00 3CQOUO ooQQ0>OQ0Od$$QO09 0000 Q a TQ03§0 mmmamwomw QQQQ 0 0
} KHOQOO0QO3 00000000 00 XOO 130 oooooooooooooooo 0000 0 TOO 370 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOD 0000
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX AD PS 5 EEDCBA987 65432 10 HEX SHORT wm ADRSS F:EPCB&987&54'3 2 IP HEX SHORT mm
j KHOOOOOOOO QOOO00OO 00 HOG 1 40 oooooooooooooooo 0000 0 -2147483648 TOODOO 000000000!00011:1 0047 71 71
| KHOOOOOQOL 00 oaoooooo 1500150- lo oo 0-00000 a 00000 8000 -32768 TO0D.1O 0000000000000000 0000 0
| KHQOOQQQ02 oa&Poodd 00 XD016O 000000000000000a 0000 0 0 Y00Q20 0000000000000000 GOOD 0 0
I KHOOOOOOOO 00000000 00 XOG170 oooooooooooooooo 0000 0 TO0O9O 00000000a 00000 o o 0000
ADDRESS 765432 10 HEX APR3S FEPC8A987 6543210 HEX SHORT mm AD ESS FEDCBASP76543210 HEX SHORT hOm
j KHOOOOOGQO 00000000 00 HO10 40 oooooooooooooooo 0000 0 0 70083 0 0000000000000000 0000 0 0
| KHOOOOOQOl OOOOOOOO 00 HO10 5 6 oooooooooooooooo 0000 a Y00840 00000000*00000000 Oado 0
| KH000000D2 daooOoOO 00 HO IQ 7 2 0000 OPOPOOO 00000 0000 a T0O850 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OQQO 0 0
I KH00QD00G3 00000000 00 HO1088 oooooooooooooooo 0000 0 TQ086O oooooooooooooooo 0000 0
:
HE KORY KON I TOR WRITE I/O KONTTOR WRITE
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS r£DCBA9876S43210 HEX SHORT LCN&
I KHOOOOOOOO 00000000 00 £02100 oooooooooooooooo 0000
R02 2Q1 OOOOÿOOOOOO-OOOOd 0000
0
Q
0
I
.. • vW'
v 1 v> •»
i'>/>W <»ÿ rf *
V
n i
! flHk US 2006/12/13 109:46:52
I
OH s 1 i]D • Or pm :VW 0 , 0 Gin /min : I •

r
DIAGHOS VERSION BIAGNQS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER I/O WHITE:
MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR WRITE CANCEL
Now the I/O WRITE & WRITE CANCEL appears

.9 POSITION (TR1J
F?le View Setup- Window Help
POSITION BUFFER NEXT COMMAND WNo*
XI 45.912 xi o. G :
: < > 
X2 13.38 \ X2 0. G 1 6 0 F 0. M 0
i:
22 15.14567 \ 22 0, H
{
GOG 18 G G 23 G 98 G 20 G 40
i C2 0. C2 0* G G SO G G GS3.S 6 64
I w 0. w 0. G 66 G 67 G 69 . 5G 97 G123 G
G123. 1G111 G50*2 G113 G13 < 1
MACHINE MAIN OFFSET
gQ 121 o.
0. Y 0.
0,
c
Z 4. S
0. s
Q 21 0. Zl 0, ! M* SPDL 0 MIN 1 100 200

« 1 B 0, B 0. Cl) 0 FT /MIN M. SPDL | o
id ci
X2
0.
0.
Cl
X2
0.
0.
T, SP'DLI 0 MIN1 T , SPDL 0
i Cl) 0 FT /MIN ,
T SPDL 2 1
Z2 0. Z2 0. .
T SPDL2 0 MIN*1 0
m c2 0. C2 0. :
I (1) 0 FT /MIN XL-AX] I o
w 0. w :
Y-AX | I 0
FEED 0. IN /MIN Zl-Axj I 0
TNO .
16- 0 ~>~> TNO 0 MAGftZNPKNo. 12 0. m/&m
; (GENERAL OUT ) < > < > a 0. ° /min
i 1 I 0
-i
LOW 109 0 Cl Q* 9
/min ci-nxjj I o
UNIT : < C2 0. 9
/min X2~AXl I 0
LOW 0. IN/MIN
IN/REY
Z2~K&| I 0
C2~AX| Vm
«-
1 0
1
P1
'
ir — $0Mi “
®
: ».% ;;.v: vXvÿv.:y...
2006/11/30 j III 01: 29

W 10* SI [ 0r pm #A 0 . 98in/min
i'
POSITION SET UP PROGRAM TOOL' C-COND . P ARAM DIAGNOS DATA TOOL DISPLAY
INFO, DATA I/O LAYOUT MAP
Matrix now goes 5 places right of the decimal.

209
(Important to remember when changing R parameters)

itlilArNnCN/MAVFD
(§AKEgj:: ;
......
' -> ' v 3 ¥1
'
1 pg m
IB
I Fife Wm6:m Hdp
210
VEBSIQH DIJU2TOSIS MONITOR j OHIUH j SERVO MDKETOR SMMDIJB BOOTTOR { HSSDMKE 1MHITOR
|
?
HEHQP-Y BGNI70F DI3P I/O WCNITQsR BWF i/o ifjcwiTOE mm

ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS FE0CBA9876S43210 HEX SHORT LONG AMS* FEDCB A§B7 $S4 3210 BEST SHOW LONG i
HHOOOODOOO GGOOQQOG 00 XQ0 170 OOOOGOOOPODOOCl-QO 0000 o 7274496 YOO1I0 ODOlGQlOO1.00000 % 12 41 4673 4673 I
W1:1000 000 Q1 oooooo oo 00 XO0180 QO&OOOQgO 1101111 006 F mm# o m ommtmmmm o QOQO 0
HHOOOOOOOa oooooo-oo 00 XO019O 00000000000000-00 0000 O o; ¥0013O 0-OGOO o D= c«ooa o-oooo 0000 0 -e22083Se4
KH0OOOODQ3 OOOOOOOO QQ XQQ1A0 Q<WNSDOOO«K>OOQOCK> 0000 rm i4Q i ioo % i xioGQoaooQ CF OD ; -12S44
AH D RESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS FJE&C8*9e?6S43210 HEX SHORT ham S FEDC-BASO? 65432 .10 HEX SHORT hatm
HHOOOODDOO OOOOOQOG 00 MOO IDO QooooolQleooooli 0233 643 33555075 YOD34Q ©ODOGOOOOOOGOOOO GOOD 0 0
HHOOOOOQQl ODOOOODO DO X00110 oaÿooO loaooOoo#© 0200 512 Y00350 OOOGGÿOOOOOOOGO 0000 0
MH00000002 oooooooo 00 X00120 oaooooocwjioooooioo 0000 0 0 TOD3 6.0 OOOOOOOQGOGOOOGO 0000 o 0
MHG00OOOO3 0000000=0 00 XO013D OO©OGOOO0OGOQ0€*G 0000 0 YD03 7d 0000000800000000 GOOD 0
:
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS F E DCBAS8 76343 2 10 HEX SHORT LOWS ADSSS FEDCBAWR? 6543210 HEX SHORT ham
HHOOODOOOO GOOOOQOO 00 XO012D OOCHQOOOOOOOOOCKK3 0000 o o ODOOd =0=000000000000000 QQ'OD o 0
MHQQOOOOQ1 80000080 00 £00130 OOOO a OOQQQ fcO0oaÿ&oOQ«r$&OQ 0000 0
MH00O0OOO2 QoooooDD 00 £00140 000*0000000000000 OOOO 0 -2 147483 648 00000 0000000000000=000 0000 0 0
MHGQ0DOOQ3 0-0000000 00 XD015D 10=0=000000 000000=0 8QO0 -327 SB 0000.0 =000000=0=000000000 0000 0
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS FEIKBA9S76S43210 HEX SHORT LOMO ADRSS FE&CBJM7 6543210 HEX SHORT W.
HHDOODDOOO OOOOOQOO 00 >10011.0 oooooolooooooooo 0200 512 51.2 YDDDO0 0000000=001000111 0047 71 71
00
39H0OOOQOO1 0000000=0 XQ0120 oooooooo 0=0000000 OOOO 0 Y0OOIQ =0000000000000000 0000 0
HHOOOOOOG2 oooooooo 00 X0013O o0=0=0ooooooooooo-o 0000 0 ¥00020 0=000000000000000 0000 0 0
MHOO0DDOO3 000000=00 00 XO014O 000000000=000000=0 0000 Q ¥00030 0000000000000000 0000 0
tCEHORY MONITOR WRIT! I/O BCWITOR WRITE

ADDRESS76543210 HEX ADRSS FEDCEA937654321D HEX SHORT L me
HBOOOO0OO0 0OOOOO99 00 R02392 ooomoolleoidlo 1CCA 7370
R02 3 93 ooaooooooo loolo=o 002 4 36
I
nw«X<t<uW»«AvAvhMvM«<vÿi
jjMgtr
m •
•
TPS 0 2006/11/30 11:05:09
t\/\/ 10% ITIJi Orpm W\A 0 . 98 ill /min I
><•••»<>**ÿ c *‘*iv
DIAGUGS VERSION DIAGNOS OPT I SERVO SPXKDLE HARD1 LADDER I/O WRITE
MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR WRITE amCEL
Stay out of here unless instructed to.
Monitor all addresses in this area. X,Y,M,D etc.

O!AGNOSS(MAK£R|
1 Fie Wndaw Help
I [
Mats™ MMKOSIS M3KH0R OfflOM j SEKVO HOHTTOR j SMHBUB MMHTOR j MKSDlfSEE KHUTOR |
KEHO£Y MONITOR DI3P I/O HONITOF !D ISP I/O JJQNITOE MSP
j
ADDRESS
HHOOQ0DOOO
76S43210 HEX
oooooooo 00
ABRSS FEE>CBjL98?654321fli
ZOO170 0008000000000001 0001
HE I SHORT
1
LCM&-
7274497
mSS FH>CBJ»8?6S432iO HEX
mo110 1241
©OD loo lead ioootscJt
'
SB«!
4673'
LC«0
4673
:
j J3H0QQQQQQ1 OOOOOOP'Q QO zooiio 0000000001loin i ooer TOOtZO' OOOO Q
| HHOOODOD02 00000000 00 ZOO190 OQODOOOo a ooooooo 0000; 0 TOO130 ooooo€iooodod©ooo . 'OG0B 0 . -#22083184 I
j HB000DD003 OOOOOOOO 00 ZOO1AO aa & o oo oa O Dooaa o o 0000; O TOD140 1loo llllOOQOdOOO CFDO -12544
ADDRESS 7654321.0 HEX JLDRSS FE D CBMS 76$ 43 210 HEX SHORT LOMO M®m mi. SHOT*? tows'
I HHOOQOOOOO oooooooo 00 ZOO IDO 000800 iQlOOOOOll 0283 643 33555075 700340 OBOOOCWksopOOODOO OOOO 0 0
I HHOOQQQOQl oooooooo QO ZOO110 OO 0000 lOOOOOOOOO 02 00 512 Y00350 000o4«0ft60e«4000 Q0OQ 0
| HH00000002 00000000 00 ZOO120 0000000000000000 OOOO 0 Q TO03 60 .00000000000000.00: O'QOO 0 0
I ZH00000003 OOOOOOOO 00 ZOO130 oooooooooooooooo 0000 0 Y00370 000000:000000ÿ0000 0000 0
! ADDRESS 76543210 HEX 1DRSS F.E D CB A98 76543 2 10 HEX SHORT L.om km%s Tmcmmi6B4mio HEX SHORT wm
:
HHOOQOOOOO oooooooo 00 TOQ120 oaooooooooooaooo 0000 D o 00000OO O Q O0=00 OO 00-00 OO 00:00 a o
HHOOO 00001 00000000 QO X0Q13Q Q0O0>PO0O0PQ0Qa00 QOQO 0 OOOQQ wQomÿQQommoQ '€>000 0
moomoooz 00000000 00 ZOO 140 ooooooooooooooao 0000 0 -214748364# 00000 OOO00CJ0Q0OQ00DQO 00:00 0 0 i
| HHQ0000003 oooooooo 00 ZOO ISO lo a DOO OO0OOOOO0O 8000; ”32768 000.00 MDQQQ«0QQOQBO(3 OOOD 0
AX' D RESS 76543110 HEX AftftSS FE DCBA9878S43 210 HEX SHORT wm ..MMHSS FEDCBA9876S43210 MX. ABORT hotm /•!
HHOOOODOOO ODOOO0-&O 00 ZOO110 QOOeODlQOOOOQOOO 0200; 512 •512 YDOOOO 0D0O10'0001000111. 0547 ,'- mis
| HH0Q8QQ001 oooooooo 00 ZOO120 OPPdPdOdTOQQOdPd0000 0 WQQm . m&ammmmmm moQ 0
| Hfl00€GQ002 oooooooo 00 ZOO130 o oo ooooa oooooooo 000# 0 0 TO002 0 000000000000ÿ000 0000 0 :ÿV:iQ.-:|
I HHOaOODOOQ oooooooo 00 TOO 14.0 0300000000000000 00 QO 0 T0OO3O 080Q00;OO OOQ £S£i>0 Q O 0000 0
1
tCEHORY KGHITOR URITE I/O HONITOR WITH
ADDRESS 7654.3210 HEX JfcDRSS f EDCBA.9876543210 HEX SHORT LONG kt>m3 FEDCB AR876S432 10 HEX
HHQOCJOODOO OOOOOOOO 00 £02392 00o.lt lOOtl 00 Id 1-0 ICCA 7170 2$m$m Ig
£02393 oao&oooo&olooloo 0024 38 .
mm P mu. 0 2006/11/30 11:06:56

10% MB Or pm V# 0 . 9 Bin /Akin jr
!
DIAGROS VERSION BIAGN05 OPTION SERVO SPXRDLE H. JWARE: LADDER I/O irnmmSM
MONITOR MONITOR MOHITOR HbHITOR MONITOR .WRITE CmCEL
m
Use this area for forcing.
You may force up to 4 addresses.
211
XOO170-1 forces on XOO170-0 forces off

Powering off the control cancels all forces. Use this button to remove forces. WRITE CANCEL then INPUT.
r h A
mM
Fie Window Help
212
VERSION DIAGNOSIS MOUTIR | OP110*1 j SERVO MfMTTOR j SpntDUi MlMTfOR Hmmm Kfl&WTOJR |
MEMORY MONITOR MSP i/o MONITOR \m? i/o MONITOR vmp
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS F E DCBA9876S43 210 HEX SHORT Lorn ADRSS FEJ>CBA9e76S432iQ HEX SHORT LONG
HH0000000Q 80000000 00 200170 OGOQOQQOO OOOOO 00 0000: 0 7274496 YOD13LO coo 1 J j 1 c-o Lcocoo 1 1241 4673 4673
HHQQO0DQQ1 90000000 00 200180 ogdopood d 11©1111 POST 111 YOG12 Q <3-6OOOO«QOOOQOC»OO 0000 0
HH00000002 oooooooo 00 K00190 0000000000000000 0000 0 0 YOG130 oooooooooooaoooo 0000 0 -822083564
MH00000D03 DOGGOOOO 00 2001AO ClQ GO OOOOO DOOOOOO 0000 O TOO140 noollliooQOODOO CFOO -12544
! Alt DRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS FE DCBA9876543 210 HEX SHORT urn ADRSS FERCBM87 65432 10 HEX SHORT LONG
HHOQQOO0OO 0-0000000 00 2001 DO QQOOOOlOlOOOOOll 0233 643 33555075 Y0D340 OOOGOOOOOOOOOGOO 0000 0 0
HHOOQOPOOl o-ooooooo 00 >700110 ooooooioaoooaaoo 02.00 512 YDQ35Q 0000000000000000 0000 0
>
HHOQOOGOQ2 OOOGOOGO 00 X00120 000000000.0000000 0000: 0 0 Y003 60 0OOOOOOOOOOODOOO 0000 0 0
HHOOOOOOOl oooooooo 00 200130 0000000008000000 0000 0 Y00370 0000000000000000 Q0DO 0
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS FEDCBA9876543210 HEX SHORT LONG ADRSS FEDCBA9©? $543-210 HEX SHORT LONG
MHOQQOOOQQ GOOGOOGG 00 200120 OODGOOQOO-OOOOO'OO 0000 o 0 00000 000000-000000=0000 0000 0 M. o
HHOOOOOOOl 00000000 OP 200130 OOOOPOQO&ODOOO&O 0000 0 ooooo mmommzQQmm&o oo&Q 0
HHQ0000002 oooooooo 00 200140 oooooooooÿoooooao 00OO 0 -2147483648 00000 0000008000000000 0800 0.
HHOOOOOOOl OOOOQOOO 00 200150 IGOQOOOCIQ ooooo oo 3000 -32768 OOOOO C0OOQ080OGGO00OO 0800 0
ADDRESS 76543 2 iO HEX ADRSS FEDCB A9876543 210 HEX SHORT LONG ADRSS FEBCB A98? 6543 2 10 HEX SHORT LONG
BHOOQODOOa 0GGOGOOO 00 20011.0 OOOODGlOODDOGGOD 0208 512 512 YD 0000 000000800 loo 0111 0047 71 71
HHOQPOOPPl 000000-00 00 200120 aooooaaoa-oooaooo 0008 Q TOGO IP aooaaoooooaaooeo 0000 0
! HHOOOOOOOl OOOOQOOO 00 200130 O0OGOOOO0OOOOODO 0008 8 0 700020 0000000000008000 0000 0 o
HHOOOOOOOl OOOOOOOG 00 200140 0000000008000000 0008 D YD DO30 8000008000008000 OGDD 0
MEMORY MONITOR HR2TE I/O MONITOR RRITE

. ADDRESS765432 ID HEX ADRSS FEDCBA93765432 ID HEX SHORT LONG
HHQQOOOOQd 80000080 00 1 ooollloolloololo ICC A 7370
:'h ooooooooo-o loo lo o 002:4 36
S3 H P flft, 0 2006/11/30 11:02:36

f
\J \J 10 k mi rpm VV'-A 0 . & Bln /mill •:<,:*•//// vpx . : x vy,:
JX; ;; :v$ .<: :H:X -WVV*. •: I?
'
R D X Y F I* M iDRESS ADDRESS »>

4-
Use this area for searching R parameters. Force under I/O Write. Use this area for changing R parameters.
PIC PARAMETER (DATA TYPE)
ADDRESS
CON.Ml: NT STANDARD
M KM OK Y ACT J Vli
K 2350 H 2830
1 1
2 2
3 •\
•j
4 4
5 3
6 6
7 **«
i
8 8
9 y
Long type
R 2380 a 2880
I 1
2
3
4 •1
5 5>•
b 6 ns m /
TOOL LENGTH MEASURE SKIP SPEED 300
cn i n
8 8
TOOL LENGTH MEASURE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERPAID % 17
y
R 2390 R 2890
DISTANCE OF THE TOW SENSOR SKIP AND DEC. m 25000
I I < )
•> O
2 AXIS SKIP POSITION ni
3 3
4 4
1 AXIS START POSITION: Of TOOL LENGTH MEASURE m
5 o
6 6
*7
V AXIS START POSITION OF TOOL LENGTH MEASURE m
(
8 8
213
X AXIS START POSITION Of TOOL LENGTH MEASURE m

9 y
R 3980
s.
TOOL BREAK AGE ALARM LIMIT m 20000
1 (7874)
214
Long type
PLC MIA dm TYPE) PARAMETER /

\ RS>
c:omm STANDARD RL OOMBHf mmm
1 BELUKE ATC BLOCK l AXIS POSITION of 1st AXIS Si
»>
BHBO KB ATC BLOCK l AXIS POSITION of 2nd AXIS $2
•s
BEFORE ATC BLOCK I AXIS POSITION of 3rd AXIS S3
4 BELL) V£ ATC BLOCK 1 AXIS POSITION of 1st AXIS 54
5 BE LUKE AtC BLOCK 2 AXIS POSITION of 1st AXIS 55
6 BELOKB ATC BLOCK 2 AXIS POSITION of 2nd AXIS m
*7
BbLURb AtC BLOCK 2 AXIS POSITION of 3rd AXIS 61
hi BBLOKB ATC BLOCK 1 AXIS POSITION of 1st AXIS SB
0 BEL 0KB A 1C BLOCK 1 AXIS POSITION of 2nd AXIS 50
10 BE I '0Kb ATC BLOCK 1 AXIS POSITION of 3rd AXIS 60
1i BEL UK B ATC BLOCK 2 AXIS POSITION of 1st AXIS 61
12 BEL UKB: ATC BLOCK 2 AXIS POSITION of 2nd AXIS 62
13 BbLUKb ATC BLOCK 2 AXIS POSITION of 3rd AXIS 63
U 64
15
lb
17
KB No. BIT
0
Short type
FIX BIT PARAMETER <RB1 RB8>

COMMENT
... I 0 PLC DEVICE
0 mom
i j
RI 1156 1 If 1001
2. Ml 002
3 ENABLE E NOR ILL TOOL MEASURE VALID INVALID 3 If 1003
4 TYPE OF FEEDBACK X ABSOLUTE INCREMENTAL 4 Mi 004
5 TYPE OF FEEDBACK V ABSOLUTE INCREMENTAL c
D SO 005
6 TYPE OF FEEDBACK 1 ABSOLUTE INCREMENTAL 6 10006
7 TYPE OF FEEDBACK 4 ABSOLUTE INCREMENTAL 7 Ml 007
•i 0 8 10008
*}
MAGAZINE MAX TOOL NUMBER < NOTE 1 9 111009
A Ml 010
Ml OH NG. MAGAZ INE TOOL DETECTOR D1SAVA I'LABLE A V A I TABLE B in oi i
4 c Ml 012
5 SELECT TEE T CODE *M06T**" <N0TE2> B Mi 013
6 NOT *M06T**T*** E MIDI 4
7 AXIS MOVE AT ATC BY PLC ONLY PROGRAM BY PLC F Ml 015
0 2 PALLET CHENG ER VALID INVALID 0 Ml 016
Rill 57 I Ml 017
n
2 MI018
3 3 Ml.019
4 COOLANT MENU AT POWER ON *
AUTO "ON "AUTO "OFF 4 Ml 020
5 ONE CYCLE SW. OF PALLET CHANGER LH SAVA 1LABLE AVAILABLE 5 Ml 021
G 6 MI 022
i TOOL MES. EQUIPMENT AT ATC ARM FIX *T
> Ml 023
0 8 Ml 024
4 j
9 Ml 025
9
El A ATC METHOD T CODE MO 6 A Ml 026
3 B MI 027
4 C Ml 028
i: AXIS MOVE PATTERN AT ATC

AXIS MOVE PATTERN AT PALL ETCH ANGE
Z-XY
Y— X
XV z
Z
— V
D
E
F
B1029
Ml 030
M 103 1
215
216
Short type
PLC-CMN PALAMETER TABLE

R El T COMMENT I 0
0 MANUAL MEASURE VALID INVALID
2'M.10
TOOL 11) VALID INVALID
VARIABLE TIMER VALID INVALID
3 VI 00 ONLY VALID INVALID
4 Vi 00 ONLY VALID INVALID
u Vi 00 ONLY VALID INVALID
I;v m: CONTROL. VALID INVALID
FMS PALLET ID VALID INVALID
8 EMC CONTROL ID VALID INVALID
9 RS232C 1 PORT TYPE VALID INVALID
n TOOL ID R RESISTOR LOAM- VALID INVALID
B THERMAL DISPLACEMENT OFF SET VALID INVALID
€ THERMAL DISPLACEMENT MACRO VARIABLE WRITE VALID INVALID
D VI 00 ONLY VALID INVALID
L TOOL ID SERIAL TYPE VALID INVALID
F TOOL ID EUCHINER VALID INVALID
0 TOOL i, ENGTK TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ VALID INVALID
3301
i. TOOL LENGTH TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ VALID INVALID
TOOL LENGTH AT WRITE LIFE CONTROL TOOL DATA
3 TOOL LENGTH TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ OFF SET NO. COMPENSATION
4 TOOL LENGTH TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ OFF SET NO. COMPENSATION
& TOOL DIAMETER AT WRITE LIFE CONTROL TOOL DATA
6 TIME TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ VALID INVALID
f LIFE AT WRITE LIFE CONTROL TOOL DATA
8 FLAG TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ VALID INVALID
9 FLAG AT WRITE LIFE m TOOL TOOL DATA
a ID NO. AT WRITE VALID INVALID
B DATA AT MANUAL WRITE ONLY FLAG ALL DATA
C PROTECT SPINDLE TOOL AND NEXT TOOL NO. OF MUTE VALID INVALID
1) READ AND WRITE TO LIFE CONTROL DISPLAY VALID INVALID
READ AND WRITE TO ID NO. GROUP NO, VALID INVALID
TOOL DIAMETER READ AND WRITE TOOL COM, TYPE A VALID INVALID
217
9 9LZ£~ 0009 OS T 002
W
ItfOHS
/' .]
.
\>0
I
/
s /
/ 1
/
\s
•v
X
/ \ \
\
\
/
/ i
\
\
i’
j
i \
/ \
9ESS9 ItOICI mWI 88CKS 9iSm)I ISUCOI t’OCt’ilt’ 80988C8 9Uiii.9I CCM-SSCC f9880K9 SEitUni 9St’j£*893 I160L89CS t-C8If'iLC i.01 8t9(.8t.fi:
POOO oooo-oooooooooooo o>TOOX

DN01 J.80HS X2H
I Z t 8 91 Zt *9 8ZI 9$Z Z\S KOI St-QZ 960ÿ c6I8 t’8£9I Q9LZZ
o
S»1
0
i
99LZ£~ 0008 ooooooooooooocc ~
0
mu £
0000
......
o-ooooooooooooooo
os T 002
OH COX
0000 ooooooooooooO'irevr'oc 1 002
0000 0-000000 O OOOO 0 0 CO OCT 002
xJH o i "O' $ 9 L 9 ms ;> 131 s ?; 
ja
JA
MR-JT-CT
SAVING PARAMETERS
221
222
MR-J2-CT DRIVES
Wm '
P
§
|MJUtCt
m a1
III ;
#4 I IfiaSt i
I
K*!»W. f
s A
‘ft
is
mlmM
V-ÿ
m*
m I if
*- ' •
BIS •MU w
•
KPS
.f it
Kl
X. Hv'ft
fi
.. • .. 0 •
JNSH
iftÿce
iiaiisiP
»S fee Cl
!5'i
9
91 :ÿÿÿ
1
Mi
Mil
A
1
‘
1
»SM s? & as
mmmmmmmMMMmMMMmmfmmMMmMMtlMM u*M
c
\
xt
is-
PMSMMMMW
wÿyyÿ>ÿyÿÿwsyyyÿÿyyÿÿÿyyÿ%yÿy>ÿ%yÿ>wÿyÿyÿ
MMMIMMMMM
:<
iMMMiiMiiMM
a
>Xx?K-S wmt
Kg
2 ss
K3 >
sm
i*:- 2fc X-.

5
x* SSSB
I«1mMMfMWiWMMMWM0ÿMlWÿMMM SS23KK iS
VJ
«v <-xc tÿSxS >*X\
MWW1MWWWWMWW1 /,TL
,sv
K
*3
>X'
X
s?
§5 ssSS
«X><J
*3
s &
mm
$3
m >Xr 3? 3SKS&;
f:Fil
»SSS
r«im W W'
flfel
sS
»-J53
te# m m fil &*
l#Llat*%M
MSM
-™-ÿr!=?,0
|»»|S >>Xx-
»M
L%
;n
|jli
*!Slf£SMmmmm.Itafe*
#»P?
1
\ B
•:Xx?
J&m
V»ÿ*A*T«J>--*.«*>
VÿiSlI IOTS
V >y$
rm /r
HD
co
%
223
224
n
m
§
S
mmmmmmmmmrnmmmmm
SR 352
KaK>
ig Desktop On-Call for Masak
mmmmm MB m
K
2SJ tgj Intel LÿN+Modem PC Card
' <* s $1 Lg KEY HISTORY MMMMI
!»ÿ K
ig Main
g MAZATROL FUSION 640
:
-' ,«: «
£ -ri— /
1
3
IS MR-J2-CT-M6 Setup S_W
g NetOp Remote Control
ill .ÿ: E Ml
illtlieJ
a f>.
§
P
4ÿ#
S| WinZip »/S* » /«' ftp/
«
g Online Services
!
Programs
tfj Documents
i _g
'
lg ORiWOCO
& Hi
E gi
MS
/I
< Printkejj
jS Settings
g Startup
Q Pin:
g WinZip
| Help
Internet Explorer
•tills
E
iU Run...
| l|yil Shut Down...
-
CS
MS-DOS Prompt
Outlook Express
mi
Hltari (oQ Windows Explorer
_
IffI'FjFile
_*i
|>r*M«Mtsp
(S.)S efcup lWlMonitor. lAJAIarm Qpiagncsis

B
;
:
A'-0~:<V, ',,••ÿ
i.i‘,
i
•
'
•:-ÿ : I
Select CptT rn A vie Tnh

cplppt SetUp-Axis 1 abs'K"
HHBBBHBMHi
UIIAlifUipSAI*ÿ
Siaiii*
:
;.* - ,
:ÿ.
225
iÿj'Aaa iÿAeUACTUvAy fvu,;: A

IBIBiiS
MR-J2-CT Setup Softwaie (Foi MG)—"MAGAZINE[Rotary Axis Spec.)"
226
| (F)File (S)Setup (MlMonitor (A)Alarm (D)Diagnosis fPjF'arameter [T )T est-operation | (U)SetUp-Axis (H)Help

MAGAZINEQJ Axis Select(C)
S Axis Spec.(S)
&
a*-
lisffiir HH
-
1 n Si
MU a
mm m9m m
w *
»
AMR.J2CT Setup Software 1st Axis* Liner Axis Spec.
(P)Fite ©Setup (ÿMonitor (A)Alartn (PPsgnoss (P)Paramefcer (T)T$$fc-operat:iof« OUjSettfe-Ms (HjHefci
'
L
'L.ijj
BB
Il H
I
S HHB
MBS
I
w
:Krh:
nil
niH : W
: ills lit
i
227
SELECT PARAMETER
228
o' r. UTO , iPV’.Vd'WfcSf '

iÿtw:iÿÿX, sIHjHgsp
~
Paÿ.aUe
sr-ss:
Nuirfee N-srmc
1
—
_______
sif
Rtename ;
r—
*i*ui
llli!
TTr:
1 1 in#
As
...
~ ~trr
i s *
~*1
SIS
SiSSSKSS®
——
s“ 1
j»:>ÿ:“
'.m;:
‘
:
::•.V >ÿ••: :siiPs/:sV::::;-S::::;;
: r
— S':
PARAMETERS ARE BROUGHT OUT ;EROM THE MR-12 DRIVE
_
___
_
_
: S- S'
': '
wmm - -
----
SS ''ISIS',;
' '
: SS'SS'Sÿ
S : i:SS. . 'ÿÿS'.
'ÿ .-ÿ
i; : ::
—
r~~~.....
Si \
,
' A i iMsm
is:
-
M
, 'M '*ÿ
iiss I >*< 0> < , < h- "
r
<
SSiSSsii:' SSliS li
i PMNM i
V/f kEfat) !. Compareÿl Al read© wv*$m. Chants fed lÿialSeifl
«'ÿ
.
Detailed): ADS Poi Erd&l
Press All read
Pop up window will appear....maintenance; All parameters will be read. Is it O.K.?
Press O.K.
Parameters are brought out from the MR-J2 Drive

- . ~ .. ..* - .I' l M ni.
i :
(P)Fite ©Setup ('ÿMonitor fAjAlarm (Diagnosis (Pparm&ter (TiTest-operation (UJSetiÿWs (HjHete

TTY aasa
mrnmm sap ,.
in
WtfM f
s
"•• •'»-
sH
Parameter table- N •
File name:
t
[
j Nurrfce Name Set value
'ÿ
U rd Setting rang©
'll
™n 1
'
-J
I 111:
1
\
Yvi
. . ...
1
i
!
i
1
':ÿ
iTCTl
T%*i\
ill — »/ÿ| .?
:D:i:?5K:::S::::::sS;-S:::::i:s
3
I:
t\
I ’V
Please turn eft the servo ampfe after seating the parameter vath the 8,t-“ tga '
~r iiilili111
! f I 1 '
WrrtelWf Ccrrc‘afe.10 AJl read© All wrlÿJ Change kill] Mial Sei||]
—
I
\ \\
Detail Inf (I) 1 End©)
iP
I
.
|1, - I .
-
T
: '.ÿ
SELECT File
SELECT Save
229
230
11
Save in-
My Accent
Docurnesnte
a
pÿINGSTONfEl
:Zd LADDER
!
zi *> —
mmam
is O’ in*
'
s**™*
_ N
j
mi
m\
Desktop »ji
:
~~
3 Z 1 ~
1
. \
My Documents I
__
9>
My Computer
_ .
: zJI
«3
My Nelwoik
fife HiSfn«:
Save as (ypts *pfl* *
$vto
Cancel
1
Races
i
•. _ . ;
s
' '
- ••
VrsteMI Competed All >e4*® AJ\ffltfQ chaw lastly hfcidSeS

Drtrfw..m
-ÿJ .
ii«a|fl*( U:;
MSi
i
Save in (Where you want to save) C: or E: etc.

File name (A name you will remember)
Press Save
Parameters should now be saved.
Use Windows Explorer to verify.

•'"'Si
•5r
A ;»
Swi
f
- ,'•;
wis*>
~v
§2S a'H
Cra1
V* I’
I$
MR-J2-CT
UPLOADING PARAMETERS
231
MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For MGJ—"MAGAZIHEfRotary Axis Spec.}" - [Parameter list} liiaiPi
232
& (FJFile (S)Setup iMJMonitor (AjAlarm [DJDiagnosis IPjF’arameter il)T est-operatiori (J ]S etU p-Axis , [H)H elp - It?!
'
.
V-j:
si
t
MlltSm *1
I ''A''
4.
ave[S] u. HE
intfP)
ir table File name :
vj •v
mmm W
\<* s.i
t
vOi
,; r«
nd(Q] /•
Set value Unit Setting range
.............
............
..........
IS
v;
II
------
1
.......
- .. . i“ ......
Select Open on File
—— Fab . p T" . !
I
%
;•
II
m
m
1
I
!
T I
Iill
I
4- 4-
i t, tfi
\ i
\ 1 II
! I I
I |1 >
M
m
& !
s mmmmmmsmm
/;Y;’
!•!/
.
. i&n V
- M
Please turn off the servo airolifier after.. setting the. parameter.. with
. . • :
the
ppp • 'v: >::pp
sign.
II
. V V-V- ‘.‘.-i :<•W. >)» V/iM.
V,
I/-1 Hi! :
< 'ii;
i, ;<.rj
!•>)
Parameter value Ev !. m: X;
:• :iV /y 'Ay k d;
Write <W) Compare (C)

I ;Ml read.P):| all |Change list,L)g Initial I Set
writ>I;tKj
taissi C 8 p $$-1IIp pi |-/k) % End(Q.) M

V-
,
:
(E)
*V
rr
1#
S:
Detail Inf . (I)
1 !
ABS Pos. Repair (A) 1 r * * :i m

:
: V vl
Vs'l.f
.
'
1
i ;
V
:
v . . .
'
; iSlssSi-ii
.. -M
JT .’Lr''.
‘S.F .! .1 £..
i
'<* ~> C
’
|pfgy
S;.
\* t
I. '!. S / ;w .....
......
a. j
(F)Fite (S)Setup tMQMonibor IA)Alarrn (OSQÿnosis (P)Parafiteter (T)Te§t-operaUiÿ (ytSeitÿ-A>S (H)Heb
,
w _„
- * >.
v *
/ aaa
dBBhiwm.. ...... ~ .
i
wsmBL
: Parameter table'* Fib name : .
'
Mi pÿl »??F:ci I i
'
"'
'!j 1
tÿSSSf * S
i
[ Nurrtbe Nam©
_ Set value Unit S etting range [*
I
iu
_ .ÿ .;ÿ: i
M
WW
'
'
- I
I
.: • :
mm '
Mm
_ ___-
':'WM
:
1
- ......
i l
!
US
| Fie** turn ©fc the servo «**« mm
r-r~ mmmm
........
....---
.
—------
& Parameter ----
lil
the
— —- —
..........
sm
«*?
rWÿSKKHHSfSBSm
*—
•
bdl
,i
H
I
....
•ÿ•
•:
; liigliiM lililiiliililllPÿ 4-Si§t
. . .. . . . . . . .
Mil
Wiimao Compare© AJI read© All vwtdUS) Change Mi) initial $e® II
I MMi : ~
* * ** . I
:
! Detail W.flJ <ÿ*
.;
End®)
S
:
M— : :
! S I:: - ': :
s l:>
ijil mm MM.
m '
.; ,
:
SELECT Open on the File Tab

233
—1
234
Op.-n
locfc in' '*& KINGSTON |£ | Jli ** ia tit M*
SB! I
JjLADWA
3 - mMnlH i
MyRflccrt
Documents;
>i
D GSkkp :
SeÿlirpgTiwiÿa
3
:
“Hj
Q -
OP
My Dcewients
m
&
My Computer
ili
Mjp Network Fite name; Opsn

Races
Fites oHype: jfcprm Cancel
TOelST TSPSTS' Mit&m mmm Cbanpe I Intel Ss1(£(
D<W Inf (il

.. i irnm
HI
i';S
mm
saasifflis
I
j
WM1
mmmm
Look in (Where you saved it to) C: or E: etc
File name (the name you would remember)
Press Open
5>* MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For MS) -"MAGAZINE (Rotary AKIS Spec.)" - [Parameter list]
11 f£)File (S)Setup (M)Monitor (A'jAIarm (P)Parameter (I)Test-operation (U]SetUp-Axi$ [H]Help
[jyDiagimg
~ - lr?( Xj
Magazine Selectede? Q
Eile name : ft: \INDEX. PRM
Parameter table
IndexJPRM
Numbe Name 5
m 'at Ifni Setting range
#001 |*MSR :Motor series HE 0000-FEEFh
I
:
#002 *RTY : Regenerative r
0000-FFEFh
f
1
#003 *PC1 : Motor gear ra 1-32767 H
I I
#004 *PC2 : Machine gear : 1 1-32767 1
I
i
#005 *PIT :Feed pitch 1 f 36. 1-32767 I
#006 INP
#007 ftTTf
: In-position Verify-enoi
: ftuto tuning
a deg!1-32767
0000-EFEFh
I
g
ii
#008 PG1
#009
#010 EMG
: Position lo
: EMG-decel t
&
i
#007 #008 #01 9 #020 #021 #022
\
!C 4-1000
0-20000
0-32767
I
3
m
OK 1 ShQvhidPjffeijyices
Please turn off the servo ai%
#001 *MSR
Write <W)
: Motor series
Conpare<C) ftll read<P)

0000
|All write <K)

©
I Change list (L) I Initial Set(E)
Detail Inf . <I)

I is. Repair (ft) End<H)
235
0 Press Compare mm
236
Go to SetUp-Axis and change Drive
Select Compare Again
237
1* MR-J2-CT Selup SoHwaie (For M6] -"IMDEX TABLE(Rolary Axis Spec )" - [Patamelei fell HM.igixi
|'R]Parameter ;jT)Test-operation:;t;|tJjSetli)pÿAxis::::''!'(H)Help
it1* If] File [SjSetup [M )M onitor (A'lAlarm [D]Diaqnosis JffJ
238
m
'
» '
> ,
|IS
/V ,;v :; -:; v;,,,. vV;
i K' MM
Parameter table Bile name Mm ‘
Wmm,
Numbe Name Set value ¥nit Setting range ;w i;
#001 *MSR :Motor series 0000 0000-EEEEh ft!

&
#002 -RTY degenerative option type 0000 jOOOO-EFEEh §mm ;
#003 *PC1 : Motor gear ratio 1

l
l
i
4-
1-32767
4
&111-
1* if i A::
• ;
#004 *PC2 : Machine gear ratio 1 ; 1-32767

!
a$ I
#005 *PIT deed pitch 360 deg 1-32767 |
a
sSSSSe
m I
II
>.
•sWI 'w.rwi iv*vw *17
t
#006 INP : In-position det< Parameter-maintenance m flOOOdeg 1-32767 « §>
i
#007 AT¥ :Auto tuning
SMMMN 0000-EEEEh
I m II
:
m
%m
...
#008 PG1 : Position loop gii f 3
‘•/erifiJ was completed. t 3ud /sec 4-1000 M S
i
I i
#009
#010 EMG : EMG-decel time ( __
, " '";|
sec
0-20000
0-32767
— — ai
„
\ il
w
J’A
raft 1 1 "|
|§3 mmi
~
Please turn off the servo auplif :* -WMfssOK JJ4iV '
&i i
•.Vrf.r'* I’W' Vt -
#001 *MSR : Motor series 0000 (&MA

m 'A
WMim m
WM |||
v> •ÿ
Write <W) Coirpar e < All read(P) Ml write <K) 1 Change list (L ) I Initial
j?
:v.-;s
I Set<E)
A-A:
A
Be tail Inf . (I) hBS Pos . Repair "(B.) Endra) H'
A V-
Press ALL Write
|||MFN2-CT Setup Software (For MGJ—"IHDEX TABLE[Rolary Axis Spec.)*' - [Parameter, list]
k.V EJFile [S'jSetup [M)Monitor (AjAlarm (D)Diagnosis i'PIParanieter OTTest-operation fiJISetUp-Axis [HlHelp -Ifll'/
*1
m
$3
Pararneter table File narK : A:\iNBEX.PKM t,
Ax,
X X M
<
Nunbe Najre Set value Unit , J
m
m
§3
#001 *MSR
mm sc
:Motor series 0000 0000-EEFEh
I
#002 *RTY : Regenerative option type : 0000 ! !
0000-EFEEh I
I
III
#003 *PC1
l
I t«
: Motor gear ratio 1 1 1-32767
#004 *PC2 : Machine gear ratio !l i
_ 1-32767
I
1 i it
!i
>
I
#005 *PIT : Feed pit ch. 360 ideg 1 1-32767 gj Cl

«A»fr;/r'/,A\vVAWVAV\V MVCIM bi\4:r*'3 tl\t 9 JLV/M
g
#006
#007
INP
ATU
: In-positio:
: Auto tunin
JParameter-maintenance 1 Leg 1-32767
0000-FFEFh
.
Y •t
V:
I3 Im
Ill
#008
#009
PCI : Posit ion 1
& All parameters will be written. I sit OK?
fflrag •V
1
4-1000
0-20000
I
t
m I
Xt&
- :v
m
•ÿXI
mi k im * * }?'/$< iSi
#010 EMC : EMG-decel
:
0-32767
; 1 $$/ii
.AY-
N;.. it nit*
V:
lliiif iim
|
-
WiiMmiMi wmx
If m
.X-
m Wm:&§§§§ the g||

I#
Please turn off the servo a*ÿ XT;
iYi
sign..
i/:: VIA;
#001 *MSR Motor series 0000 mSs /> m gx

:M it
'A
«'Su. ini
Write <W) ] Compare (C) fill read CP, )

I iSlsll*Wa 'iWBIliM
A
1*1
§
$1
•&2
m¥i:
iilill*
Detail Inf. (I) MS Pos. Repair
239
MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6)-~"INDEX TABLE[Rot3i)i Axis Spec )“ - (Parametei list! .lelxl
Iffl -
240
fFjFile (SISelup- (M )M onitor (A'lAlarm |U)Diaqnosis .fPJF'arameter ©Test-operation (UlSetUp-Axis [H )H elp
;:v- / g -; :. :
Parameter table : Tile-;\::jiame
v ;ÿ
•
>:
- • ••
:.y ;; r.t T»Ny e.y
t;(.\say*u «• v v .»/.;* )>$
v/ •’«••£:.»; &* AiVvf/fcv-.i 'x•? 'Jci /; yw vyr.v.;*iV>*vi
«•:d*»« tl
• .* ? u»,v.-' <<c>.*> v/,< i? -/:CCA > y/? */y;
$
• i
Numbe Name
#001 *MSR :Motor series
Set value Unit
0000
I I Sett ing
0000-EEEEh
range
111
ill!n 8
il
i 0000 ii
#002 *RTY : Regenerative option type ! 0000-EFEEh
1
5
EH i i3i
#003 *PC1 : Motor gear ratio 1 i 11-32767
#004 *PC2 : Machine gear ratio 1 11-32767 ,: MMm11 !.
Mm :: fc
#005 *PIT :Feed pitch I
360 ideg 1-32767 1
II
n
V’Z X t* W&.1:*• Ml i
#006 INP : In-position det r1000deg 1-32767 I H;

Parameter-maintenance a il I ?ÿ:
m
m
#007 MU : Auto tuning 0000-EEEEh I i
:• ft
#008 PG1 : Position loop g rJHWtt9L

!vVriting:was-.c.orupleted. id/sec
F„
t
4-1000
1
IS m
si
s
t8
:
#009 ;0\i\
i 0-2 0 0 0 0 BI i ;5
#010 EMG : EMG-decel tine

:I
1 .......
S.
-=-, uc 0-32767
il
w-vyy:ÿ
'it-
*.V: SJ
S!a*IIiifiBi
:ÿ••’ÿ
v2ÿi\>.'c.i i-i'Jc-C' ',

I
—
Please turn off the servo airplit inleter I 11''sigh. miisssf
HHHM|
•'•>,•.ÿ ('/;ÿ.;.\V> J’wVOÿ.v/.'r.t /-v-.-r i',: •W'l.‘*V.WOl‘
#001 *MSR Motor series 0000

Kv
— _ __ ill
VTrite (W)
Detail Inf. (I)

Goirpare(G)
UBS Pos. Repair ( Bl)

Ml read | n . , . I
i
.
.. . , _,
i
i
;';v
Sc
v>;
I®
MR-J2-CT
SETTING ABSOLUTE HOME
241
I
# MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For MGJ—"MAGAZINEfRotary AKIS Spec.)" ' ' '
BBliil
242
IFjFile ISJSetup (M)Monitor. lAWaim (DjDiagriosis (R]Parameter ITJTest-operation (U)SetUp-Axis (HJHelp/ r

s
\MAG.AZINEil] Axis Select(C)

INDEX TABLE(2) , HI- r Spec 13J
WSmmEBB
m
m
M
1
1SI111III
Sii
j§R§jj I msP
243
I •ri;1
i
mm
m
m
i|
IIS i4«»0Siam i -
m mmmi151
%
m mm mm.
Ills :;V.V,
ISIS
'
•
ais
i
i:
sHSSi«J
i
H
mm m
SSlisiililS
HIS
mm giS iiM mmm
m
I r >
Sffii
VV:: "
|pf
1
y m
ujjeiÿV.I Joiiuow(w) dnjasts) s|!d(dJ
» -v'&'r
1
MSM-
1
WMi
3 is
CL
1
Pit
3 X
»
v<;V.
A;:
S*-
ui
§mm
wm
tpcjl
-rV-1W*v
| '
l
p. liSl*Hilfl sisp-
| 1
t
•p lilli
Sill* Jfl 111
I£f $
1 ii
f® I*
I*
AM. ;Mv-S
mm
«
s
* •
g BH
w $*®m
mm
s
'
®
igjU
win?*;
wAQffi * i
•S*w
•*: gill* ifeP®
I® PStH p - i& HiSi **
c ?•-; o tessiS 8 •
1
:
:s
i;; rmÿm
.
% ill piaS .Kv£
o
*' ”
,
**J3. Mrsi'
-* i i
Ij
2 H
»JD :
*S** £££ s wmm Si S §gp
m :P4
4 i-'io- %% "
o Vpjilj::/-;;
mvm.
to
cm JS
D>
... :m O '
Vfe=
4
OJ sss
i
m H II % c IS
Ir?1
: V>-V*.T'0 ,
0M
ms,
I? ”
i
IS® $
< . SI §i£
E? 5
'__v
ro 0>
.o £•u.
r\
~n ;• •'*!S / . ;;V-:* Vi &
3-,.. ,
;S
***
siss
QC »D ft
DL
;-:i c 0
-p
LU •D m
&-I
fe
a 00t
m .22
*»
o
•H o
o
-p
CD
< m Q
i-
CJl
.!2
4*-
L-l g .O
OJ
H
i§Sm
Ilfto o $80 iU LJI : -._y * w
3E
Q)
E
1
it
o o
g
to O O
2
o>
ID
CL CL
S5
ai
w
o
ft
W
fflSjH
msm
O CD cu
u. A «ll Q.
:.«
vm
m£
<J if tr>
•u
'U
-i.
to
o
OJ
Tl
P
H Hi
iWiis
5
:,o; ’c
O
is P. •H
cm P 01
:!i!l
>
O o
•fa
m
WM p«
«
>
m
*§I
>uli *4
I*TI
0.1 ai
mi
4-*»
cmV CL
3. !i<0* y\ J-l 4J 01
HI 111 H1 *iH
fPS •D
CJ CO ISS
la o p» p' *— I O
•-.I :.•- •iH OJ •H o 0J P-,
CM
r?
4ÿ2)
SI -P
•i— I
sz;
s ;Z3 01
i i
TH
P O
DC (D
11 01 5> l
as
•i— I M
X'
m tb.1 Ml
s«fc
Lu
O
MH PH
iij
PH L. —
1 I M
111
244
$$MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6)-"INDEX TABLE (Rotary Axis Spec.)" - [Test operation]
[pit; IMNcriilO; MIIIBSJ '0
wm
i;
- H
Baa
JX
i.
de-grfes
ypsx at, it o.J'J
Jog "1
/t
J
M
i: z l •: iia*.' i. fi L . Cii.‘ jlip
S
::'v 'cunetei: group 1 :ÿbc i V Vf ;
:
......
__
rit
—-1 I
I i'Lbboiuuo '
phsit tori init'iai set tl).

.
'
.
-
St II s;
ivV/,
i
Completion
...J
mu’ll!
...
-**S| I
•:
•>: : Isct. lifee
'
u I tie g re & ! *-"'iVf.r.ÿP. P's s ;; CP .O
-- CflPliStf
It 23 • to ;
iSHST *
245
MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For M6J—"INDEX TABLE (Rotary Axis Spec.)" [Test operation] - IIH
tV (F)File (SjSetup. fM)M onifcor [AjlAlarm iPjF'arameter
246
Position Operation
-J
73|
359.648 degree Step
Ref . return auuui
Parameter group Jog
m
"
W?
P a r am e t e r g r o u p
Step
-: : : ij§
....
Hanua r
Reverse
7 j
R°t.(R)J
kut/ 4
f~ Absolute position ini tit nr i'

Origin-Set (S )|
:ÿgmm i
Initial set
Origin Set
Initial set
Completion
rnmm .
:
stOB<0) 1
MMH
Zero Point (B)
0 . 000 degree
Machine edge
192.744
.
.
Plÿ—
a-—
iPM
f?
I
gsanatiÿM
mBM
. . Ufcv.•
The test operation node is selected.
I:::-.;--'. '
'
Position
359 . 648
Parameter group
degree
i..........
.........
# MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6)—"INDEX TABLE (Rotary Axis Spec.)" - [Test operation]
tV (E)File (S (Setup (M (Monitor [A}dlarm (D (Diagnosis fPParameter [THest-operation.; fU’lSetUp-Axis
Operation
Step
M
: Step 2Eiocle:l/f ee(a||l(

n—ÿg~
Sl&ill
i m><v
r-T-ÿ
m
Mm MHi
K-xy
#NfBS|Ri|L»
m
vv- mt
.1
;!/V.‘:'
l*
era $
v*v
P.v;<;'
'
iiV
.1*1x1
I'HlHelp -Iff!
..
P5wi
'•-••- W
t®
S®C
£?Si
v.-.
•Vt:
<0
$
2<J
mg
.
s
V
<-
.;-
'
Parameter group 1 degree

51i| 1 1 •ÿÿ
/dif s rt
1/ 1000 degree :•
: DS / B
«
Absolute position ini.fc 1/100 degree
S® : :
I
1/10 degree
MlPli
-Set S ) < Jm 181111111
1 degree d v;r
lliili
I
.yv).v,
4 1ÿ*™
;
Initial . set Iiid> al set i.
Sill
);
Origin Set Piet ion

WMM% _d_mBm
Zero Point (B) .
Machine
, d;‘: :. •"V •'
.•••• v.
edge'
•”. .•/i-'.--;/.M.'...:i;:v:-/ Mm 'Mr#
ta
x-rivd
it i «flfE MHnHiR
aMtfÿlwwwM8ir V\
5) v
j-
/ÿ'
i
is
0 . 000 degree 192 744 . RJgfippi
d •"•"••
degree;-, InpL mip® P-.
*':••»•
•.<ÿÿ••.*. iVU'i l.V

failliti
Ad jg
v. :v A0;:- 1
ft /; !«ÿ
The moving destination station number in automatic operation is selected. m

?<
{$& m d:
If 0 is set. It is a special instruction as one station rotation.

/
•I
yi
*'A .V ••
MX
ft r ii
mm *
247
'••‘.V/At/ 1 Wm &
", || v ;:mL HR
;-•
mm: m &
• \;
vu livUi WSkw HrIffllSwiWM)

$$ MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6]—"INDEX TABLE[Rotaiy Axis Spec.)" - [Test operation]
- ( fij
248
I'FjFile (S)Setup (M)Monitor (AJAIerm [ÿDiagnosis [ÿParameter [DTest-operation flJISetUp-Axis iHIHelp
11 *
wM p
Posit ion
3 6 . 648 degree
Operation
Step
;iil I .
iNormal Rot. (G)

rm0&
V :
Parameter group Step inode feed : .
F1 ar ame t e r gr o up 1 1 degree j::l ?; . •;

a i 2
IPtFerse Rot . <R> I 2
& 1 t
I” Absolute position initial set (A)
Origin-Set <S)
v-‘‘R
IS'M
_ jsjI
JlfiSSiS
Initial set Initial set
lili! stop<0>
|«
•: V; '' “ .
Origin Set Completion
mar m
1
Zero Point (B)

0 . 000
Machine edge
i.
degree 192 . 744 degree
—J
;
;
It is possible to stop xiith the SHIFT key.

y >
: A : -i ,
-V;.
pti
:ui>y
/ÿ
' -:V
lllillilllillll
S'* MR-JZ-CT Setup Software (Foi M6J—"INDEX TABLEfRotaiy Axis Spec.]" - [T est opeiation]
kV (F)File (S]Setup (M)Monitor (AJAIarm (D)Diagnosis fPjP.arameter fTITest-operatiori fU IS etU p-Axis !'H 1H elp
— It? I
Position Operation
3 6 . 64ci degree : Step .l] 1

rnmmmM
, I I|
,n
8iaag»»il»laaiÿ{iii«aaii
Parameter group
P ar ame ter g r o up
1zl
Absolute position initial set (A)
Step
-**-£
1 degree
—3
rm Sr t/VtviCtv:-
•
.
1
j
Bev™. Eot
,
<»l
Origin-Set <S) ::
a i.§-
'
-OOP
Initial set. Initial set lilffpjlMII /ÿtop<0, tei tfjSpgi

m
Origin Set Completion m
Zero Point -(B) _-_
_______
Machine: edge
__A_
OdlPiApP
i .0,V:'
i Ena(S)
MMi
•
„ Tp:;' m 1 |1
0 . 000 degree 192 .744 ililllllflHMSRRMKM
It is possible to stop
,, <•
with
;
the
;
SHUT
ffi7 n;
key.
- Vi.
tv
‘?Jy!
m i
;
249
i
250
ftf?MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For M6)—"INDEX TABLEjRotagy Axis Spec.)" - [T est operation]
I.
!
iFFlis (S)S*4> up ; (MIMqpifcir (AiAlasra Ijipagnodf
-•. -..•.i.. l_i (
Pter£KS;t;e:feu'gro'up
•’.
a ;:arr \ e t e r g r o u p 1
|degree
>4‘
;
Click on Box
1113
.J o g
Ref
.
1
Up £•1C Sr t- l ull
o return
;30
Comp let: ice

i
I
'
v a:
=.
;&§g
SWSliiia* illllllÿÿ
dr let r ft
f r ,:
SelectJoa
_
&
A; 4
Udldd
mmmvÿ tm k<-
.......-
, in :;1
....
.: ,?Sty,
m
v-V..
.
";.
v'e:
.
.......
""ji
Bgia
..; V. 11. V'

-
is to Point •
ilsohine
I
.
192 744 degree ;ÿ
.
............
----... "vfKCT!-
'*
!
I'l'li.a best operation made is selected.
!s*ai a,
r t , <$M<W
IF
mggmmmm fil
>
g.' t-'crtc |
it® >'? s *»• 'Cs'J '

1
?$MR-J2-CT Setup Software [Foi MG]—"INDEX TABLEfRotary Axis Spec.)" - [Test operation] ||||||||j ;p|
•4 >• it ' TS-'iSÿtup.. i3bl]Hprtitor;-;-:(&jÿiscÿ/v UrJk* iayi, ;o:si* [Pÿracsigeÿ
.
. '•.ÿ•E-: '•*'•. .> .. - \ .’v
’
’?.- -.
: .•'-* V . •*.. '
••t1 . j\ -’ • i J '« .,*.-••-,•
_
m
i. If lift i
.......
!'-
;
“
i f ! ff
,"i _J
L
r ai:mm t e. r
s-i *iC:
•
Fftt?oKl7''pc=iSn
X will a1ppear
gr o-up.‘
u e r gr o up 1 up
• v./:
.....
:=;
ii
iSSSEtS
i-.,,,,,,..
insi.U-Bm-1
:
U£r
- ; ;
(;
*
/«' .....
;...>.,ÿ ......
L ......
.....
..-.N
,
'-
;ÿ
mm?
-Origin —nMMMpfc set
«ÿ»
.Zejro Po:i •I,.*

IfeOlmne ’'ecig;s _ .: j
degree '1 .
192 744 -
alii
'• '
/*
u
I\rSh.e 0- -V:: '
[machine .
is snanred in Jog or Step mode a.nd match to a sero point of the
riapHHi
jSisase push <Origin Sat < S ? >
L
button,
MHtttai
2a
251
$ÿMR-J2-CT Setup Software (Foi M6)---"INDEX TABLE(Rotaiy AK'IS Spec.)" - [Test operation] sin a
wr*i5
mmm
c.
252
U l„': £2 Lip-Op iM.jMo.4or l 'DLiÿno-r-; •

}T !l.ÿÿtnÿi:: ;.\;Lb
«:;,;
......
i t ion
4 r«u n
F a c sme t e.v grp
Pÿi— 1?
...
n
&
! F ar nme r. e r gr o up 1 : :y. i
Depress Origin-Set I ~ y •>/ÿ v V- !
1
* - <
‘
•*
>•«.<
| <v F.b s Q1 u :: e ;pos i *.> *1 n ;.ina i

••>» in ••I
-MM&MNi
-2? r
r~447~i'-
;
'
mi sat,
\ Origin s
'i L: ii,
Oar.trine edga
iv: -; v\m.
itSSlilf $0£ iniaÿpaSji

•The a>d.& is moved in Jog or Step usde and match
Imscft:i :ae ,
to a -zero point of the
.••••.'ÿ..
1S1SII
Op*
mmmm
please push JQrigin Set S ) > button. <
\
ivi
S“ =J.
:' :
r
:*!v’
MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For MS)—"INDEX TABLE[Rotary Axis Spec.)" - [T est operation]
tV iDFile gjSetup [M )M onitor (A'jAiarm
Position
330 .051
Parameter -group
P ar aicie t e r gr o up
IK
Initial set
degree
>zi
Absolute position initial set (A)
——
BP~
Operation-
Jog
Initial sat
I
, OMI
;f 1
!i:/k
• -• - \ygm '
(Si
Origan-Set
11
'ÿ
ilf
S)
“s*“
zJ
V 1 >•
*•’ÿ•» V .'
.
m
mm
—
-..oogpi
gVl
f®
<
j•
Ml
;
“*
Depress Norma! Rot.
'm
L
.
•“
$
i
.
I jNownal
y
:
>-ÿ
(G)J
;
.
_
..
Jfllxl
-“i
Origin Set- Origin set
Zero Point. (B)

.
0 000
Machine edge < End(a)
I
degree 192.744 degree
>0 ; ;.lv-
-
The axis is moved in Jog or Step mode and match to a zero point of the
machine ,
Please push <0r±g±n Set<S)> button.
_ lpll««p»
253
i
254
Axis will Rotate

Will Stop at Z Phase
ThisAt is1 not
£_kse c r
K ,1
new Home
66’ '// /'tÿ
Cycle Power on Machine

P
US wmMiiiiSi
I
{[ miim
fKfflSK
ttiist
mmm WiUfSMSSiSiit
MillMI
MiMiSMM
m m, NN"
:<sg?
=li
A
!!ÿ
%
%M£i W&m m iiiiiii

tar
IÿST/ i=‘ÿ'JS%
s»ssg
fyA
s* >A
aV'*' f
.M % r«
A s
;1:
mm,
<5
•4
g? H
iifiiiiii
Bill 2*
Si
mimmm IIIIISI
g§ 50
Sggg
!l
tMimMM
IS8ii ..... SIBII*
;•
i
iÿB Start
<3
mmmmm w Sa
A
ft
.. . •. •. .- . .
y. . -."” '' /. .
•X--N>
m
,9
w
>Xs\': &
is
<3
255
256
w% m %
g Accessories m*
fg
;<ÿ
g Desktop On-Call for Mazak S'

a
':c »
£4* £jjj
g Intel LA,N+Modem PC Card
Spls
&
g KEY HISTORY
§1§|
v'.sYV/-. •*%ÿ.//i‘A'A'y
vm.
liitili
3»
HH SwT1 ri™’?
Ig Main
g MAZATROL FUSION 640
HI
I I'J WiriZip
j
I
lÿj Programs
_ Is MR-J2-CT-M6 Setup S_W
g NetOp Remote Control
g Online Services
I MR-J2-CT-M6 Setup S_W
§3 MMMMmmm
. Documents " g ORiNOCO
g F'rintkey €•«
m.
-
© Settings
g StartUp :• *
| ,:3 Find g WinZip
V -
* 0 Help
. Internet Explorer
Run...
— MS-DOS Prompt
| IÿJ Shut Down... C3 Outlook Express •<;*ÿ
.
1113 l§) Windows Explorer
;r
HI
K.
,»’ÿÿ f ,
3je!SP
4-.
::
257
•:
"*ÿ
.
.....
.....
..........
.......
......
....... J b •>:t . sjsj
iliilÿdnps Pÿs
®£S® 'SJJ®:®®
I
S;j!.' hi§V ' b-
->n
.
M«nfe: ;
;
'; ?.
i.
gffttfHHl :' " ;
v'*,'\ i- i < i. .'**'' v. ;<-bV-\~bi:r'i:>

"*;®i|lil V-v
I i
i
ISM
M. IF' mt jiii >M
** MR-J2-CT Setup Software (Foi M6]-,'MAGAZINE(Rotary Axis Spec.)" mum
I
_[ ;
258
I'FjFi'e (S;Setup (M)Monitof (AjA'arm (D)Diagnosis (P)Parameter (IJTest-operation (U)SetUp-Axis iHIHelp,

.
||||M MAGAZINE II) I Axis Select(C)

JEB3E3BHII Axis Spec. (5)
m
m
SgfAg'S#
s mm a
t.
wgggsis
T;.;a
%
I ' ' '
.
. |ag«
I H
-J
iwi j.
1. & r, i
; V, v s'rk* ’ r j
#Sn •V!!i
.....
......
.ÿ
*
'rS- Ji-V.* i ',M5 Aa

i" A ;
1’FJFile (SJSetup [M]Monitqr I'Aÿ.larm fPJPararoeÿrF.r.QÿlTsM'ÿPÿtstipiiÿAlM-lS'e’tid'pjÿKi'C'AFfHOHelp.
;;5?!
259
i »wW1Si
><
IgfiSiarc i.v.v
##<' '/ÿÿ
• ij
F . A
'1
PWR!l2£r situp Software (FoijM6)i”MAGÿNElBotary Axis Spec r a
j CEFile [S)Setup (M)Monitor lAftlarm [D)Diagnosis PjPararneter '., .lljTest-operatÿ
260
WW#
r-r
s »Tÿflp«a,rph 3£* : :; *;ÿ

I'iv .'!;
vtf. .•ÿSX*J
sa
1
:ÿ:ÿ Position Operation .i l • ..." / •'
i
I Vjiv.V :
—d
ftjjv
i degree Jog
< 1
1
J i •> ta-
> Normal Ro t . G )
i
W> '•> '
I Parameter group "
. ..,.. *p.MUMP
p
18
;Vr
1 i . - *8 I
—
t
.pi,,
2
I
I
Par sane ter group 1 d .
mw 11 t ;
:v
$ P r
m
I - 81 :vi |. ;
% Re1verse - E)
s
3
I
P Absolute posi
T est-operation
WY3jn
H
®€®
ft
H
pi
I
!
I
Initial set
& Operation by the external input signal becomes invalid in the,test
operation. Is it UK ?
. _ f .
,11 »ft fiw:;:

'
i r "
as
OK ',$ Cancel
_1 B 1
v
MS
11Pi!
mmgmmmsmm
u Zero Point (B) •t smm
P
:,;.y;:-.
I£1 degree
prltAft#
a degree ;
i: j'jt-t Y-iV*-
*•> Julia ‘r
i P-tv'
1 fcV** ': PS .’.,
It is possible i to st
b
I Mi
vv. aj
I V;
isppfr
I X :llv;'Vvv.
.:V vV %i
s l.gulu*'
•A - vf! ’/ 1
prrS.iv •>>> .- ; ;<-f

i .1 ; •Pb,
I
1
1
f».
J
iai8Ills®;i« ;£ÿ
)
'lllil
$$MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For MB]-MINDEX TABLE(Rotary Axis Spec.)" iia
©File |S)5etup [MjMoriitor [Aÿlarrn [D'lDiagnosis (P)Parameter iTJTett-operation IJJ jS etU p-Axis lHjHelp \|
Test operation Im x
Position Operation . sjp?:
mm
A ‘ : .ÿ
68 . 689 degree Ref. return Ti

i I
EC mm A
; n; %
Normal **.<£>
Refÿ return
# m'M
{Parameter group
f*
m Wf$M
.. . . . dis® ’?>V
Para tie ter group 1 £\\ , 1

«I18
TMial }!r xil
fiuitornat ic
J.
& se JUjt;v<E)$ 81
r~
r Absolute position initial set (A) A
Origin-Set S) <
$
mm siistsis
jmmmmmmmmmmmMl
lii 8®
",y
o \<
»
'VVM >ÿ
Initial set Initial set foXsV
i
: v Vi,/' ..;.; v,V
Origin Set Completion
$
mi'.
;v
W-
I *111
Ov y:
iI Zero Point (B) Ilaohine edge M if.
1 V.
V
ft End(]l)
1:
0 . 000 degree 68 . 950 degree
SS
_ __
.
The test operation mode is selected.

llwpl®
m m
H
M
i
261
is
I
1|§fl
ri.;.'......:nÿ;,:,;:ÿ;;2: IVAA voo
262
Axis will home to new position

263
264
Servo Drives
• MDS DH
• Black in color
• 400 volt
• Quick disconnect of motor wiring
• Has a replaceable fuse for control line
voltage.
• New generation power module
• Fiber optic linked.
265
___
266
Comparison DH to CH
• r*'
_____
iWWjjffB#lTi4-iilli. J*—mrHmms
Interface FiberOptic
F Eectnca |
V.-
- I y . .
Motor temperature
measurement
Thermistor sensor Thermal swiÿgpl
Spindle Motor
I—
cv
Encoder( PLG ) Serial Interface

h 1
Anal°g sl°"al
;yz-?:
mm
HF/HP motor * HC motor
Servo Motor WM; 41
(4.000rpm) : (3,QOOrpm) i
sg
asm
-i
SisIHisalii m §§
Encoder pulse/rev 16 million p/r _
yj_ ui
ii
m . ; :
•i
Features and Enhancements

1mmmm
High
iw "
iTi i feTiS *3|11wii* r«

mML
i iffifftlwl*fiflf *mW&.
l
:: • T-V
w&w.
?vÿSi
M New CPC CNC unit and 1 6 million pulse encoder ensure high speed, •;
high precision operation in sub- micron control, A':-

:»V;
X,
B New servo system and 16 million pulse encoder with smooth interpolation'" AS,:
improves roundness by 38 %. (VARS,AXfS“500.,R25rnm.F1000mrn/mtn)

H New offset method has been developed to control stick-slip and spikes at quadrant
changes in circular interpolation.
fSW
-}f ; •• ;
.
iw sritf
*li m 2 1 mm MISS r arid Ihign Speed Current'Control
fi High efficiency spindle motor and 5 times higher frequency current control, amplifier
reduce motor heat generation by 12 % .( high speed , no- load operation)
IS;
w ...... ;
267
268
Mr-J2sB-CT4
• 400 volts available
• Enhanced and new parameters for better
performance
• Auto-Tuning is enhanced.
• New alarms, including overheat.
• Capabilility to upgrade the software of
drive.
• Easy disconnect instead of terminal blocks
A
MDS-DH
£ If £lgÿ
mm ‘•i
:..r
mm U‘. JÿmLJwSisl MM
r.vÿy
if
Ti '
1
K*
fill
mm H
issif
11
IIS
iw :
••••; Mil : <

ill t$&W
V Jlffl r!&
;i
1
jl
.1
!
I K-VT,: ij
:
J
lil A
ES I Mp J
illa •
>
ill
111 33S
iJ?'--
.
••J. : '
P-;
-'•ÿ'ÿÿ>
I I
tea
fV:'
£js
asm i¥
..'.vfr'fr
f
« v:f-‘
111 :|
-*
gS
p
: .f*
it
B Wz/ÿ |fljjf§ f L/U
f f;®
15
I Quick
w m >
'f-«
Disconnect
Motor
Leads
269
270
Top of_Drives_
Fiber optic connection
IB aaaauSSg
mam
.'-rb-*...
|gg3ÿg- 1 I
IB
R| $JL
I§ ir
9 .41
..-.••y'Mv. i
e 4: i
I JiA
IPIifcSSJ: *1
: r w.;ÿ. »*i<y--ÿ. '>../&.,
- :::; rit mem ft
liB . j, i
•
fy i
I
illil r
l'. .
i
L£F
,W4
'}
m «ÿ w-"-i
¥:i|
s
: !ÿ: K
£ i i .'
H; IfffiSS
I ui •:ÿ-
‘jSsi;
ll!gggÿ I?
V ;i p, <
mmI
'ÿÿÿ
t ****•;
I i-as a I :,;
E5? •
g?
>y
Wi
i;
Sji
n Mm
/ TP
IP'vvM
sllimKKS
It 3 l*jilr •r :•
JI? :;.'l$*.,(Ai.
iyg
S'J BoK*M»'
£
m m 'ÿfrcf ga !«3 |i
I gg m
'
k
1
I
! $.;4
m mum
u;
n
j
i
liiHi
;.V:-.*F .:•:
L
ilfazj
M
I
•
-£
$ rtÿ L .
m *: ;
>i~
'
If*
|H; ..« ;!|l
#la INIMi
r
%•]
UPSi p-~i -- ta|
"V -4:
li isc
.
v.. a •
Pgywjwn •v;
X:
>
Jpg ste :c; I~!T£ V
J-I ;
fip Srj
i ;J
m
Wot
•v smSSBi J
i;i,
can be in
io ri i
out of drive.
Battery for Absolute,
271
ik¥b4 t: -• TS *yj(
mS-SSS-l "ÿ
/ • 5-tf
i®
E£r~ &«gf S§«
WSBBM -.a
Mm
P*j <&j£
-ÿ. „-«";•
*3
w
A ip
1
,S
Oil
PR I*
M
ill
i :i
i
f.
illi
i!i
i
w & r.
on 1
m 4
it> :. f; j
—jjLjW;
=3?
rrr
«ÿ*«
.__ I
•; guLZEÿ
* gflflsl
*f|
MU* '-w|
v
m
i
»: § mm kfc
H*MA
:m ||feÿ J
ws**Wss'3c
•TO
j
L I
ns Mi i !
1
ppppl
KÿiMaBs»ra »
JilSTjf,
ii
i
I
SSMSSMI li
322MfflniH?Lt a st
3h 9H
8 ITH
sgs®
w
rSva
v- • :i 0 sgffli
i
pHawi
1
iiii
uoipeuuoo AO 0} OAjes
UMIS
;; -pam
I
IM
’;W~~
WMm
f \ , , :- •
Hit SUffil!
'
i-U
:4Wli9| Mi
1111 WÿBI§?V,TH P
aaa«
*£>•'*. >
Mi B a—“
IfeiaiaPa;. HR BE iii
o -.ÿ •:.Yv:'>
:V«
8®®i 118111?®'
. LÿJ Bltlgs
«ÿ“**
4
V,
;g2i
x
rr
;ÿÿ•“ •’
®
.
«»H1 11 £$l*5
i
- M §«.
B? r i ps *;
M
IC2
a*:ÿS’f.'>'-:. iss
fÿSm su.P*
' ;; v
5
•Iv
2
Si 1
Q'1 « g\ !f •
;
IS i§l; $* || '•ÿ
r‘
1 rj i«:,- , . .;..ÿ8S .;: .-j
fix'
ptefeaÿ. :ÿN'
o! « •€’ *4
si ) V ./; \ >r Xs Vrv
fmS\S
m
•;:
X-i *33 18 IE
ft 4|l’«tli
I - 31 .-; *V:
%Ht
Xv-ÿ :1 &n 1j ! ilp.-f
S 'Hri -d lifis
' ::ÿ$ÿÿ’ v.
w-v* -*•»ÿ• , *
-
cn
w* . * '. •. •- *. .*.• -
-
i* r* • *
»I
**•.-, :V.
i •
.
-' :.: ;. 'r.

& M®*K J
! vf si?[
•*••!
ft
o
x: ,i;
*; ;\'
-H-l- » • ;J<'X
si IS -
as
MS
y
':ÿ
— ~-
.:;-'ÿVX;Vr
:v ;X’.-<V' -
•y.
IS
-• •«''-i'
gigs
'
• •-ÿ <.a&
:e- Wi
OI
••: T*'ÿ *y.;Vv
...:'
.v <? - |- s’.j- a //..;.ÿÿ

g- il 1
O •
:'i
-
</; • . ' •
x till
CM lilSL.
(Xy.v>
* [ V;
>ÿ.- >-•'
s &§ÿ>
•.
a
&ÿ.
»
'.
III!
I3‘:>vv V
I ci.VXS
•X*
(/) % X:>-
BB
[K
|itx|i;||>|f!|v
III ...|I| ;
g
CM p»- ! pI!l l|i xi11|Iff xf 11!!1

jiXrXM :
: Iiiiteikifeif
<•
- ——
feiX •- gr.wr»w» ...- . r.ÿ; .'ÿ
v-‘
I tX-'X -
: •:..
'A'*:.'
..... •ÿ•
Qdii®- 1MBHiiiffl w&sfesaeD - 1

M l
r ‘laÿga M Kwm
* SA-yuro y yy:-:y yyyyÿ-s
ai: _-
{ÿ•ÿa rr*U. :ÿal j--..ÿ | I iniiiiiM
;lj
C ii
$
- wm h pi
'i '1' v *
v • f f I#.
- Qi'lÿS?
: JZZ S
'X*STf. • > " yv ::S'V
272
-9
'
;|
f:.
f.\
MR-J2S-200CT4 ,'v
*SM -J-Vtÿ:
111
: 1;
i.
•„'ÿ? -i'l. ;’;•.
J*I
400 volts
L-
j;
CV'.-tt Jfe “31.IIS!i: :V
Larger than the equivalent MR-J2 '

;i-
!! wim
Uses 24 Volt for Control voltage (MCC)
X
?: ;
:
i j Si 11 /
.
&
Has Quick Disconnects
i 1 11
•I! f 0 'Kith: '
«•: »wiS :-
& % %_ 1'V 0
**_ s
-T4- rf ii.
'
Quick i
Disconnects {•
l
.la
S’]
! I
L
ih?
IY I;
i : ill
t:
L
i
:: 5
<.
v.
rfC*
'1 -Li
m,
i; r
. i & 0 ;
Si:"-':
:i
[ W if
@1
f
1
FI
y
;
;
sa libs tiamaflirf 4
i«ipi
273
£r
:- -
j. is
' •
— fJVinsUBSSHI
274
•*10.aVci<<&::
Mr-J2S-350-CT4
400 volts
wBaB
/V''MBiiU|m
¥S®ffisg
V* ' v ’ v
w%m
AA' ''
A
M
IS
Terminal Strip SB*

if ,-&iu£
!ii
24 volt Control 11 I
n iif? if A
w.
,,:A-
i n iih I!
IE
a rip HB r> 1
s
| :
AA
v
ft 5?~S
>
!(«»
%
s ; I
*
AA
•AA-E.
PPL
AA
<l. 5*y #A
|A i
I
a
IS
rm
HI
P I
iy A
a
A:
if! - i
A,
•••'ÿ'-
>vy 'v '

if®*. BPU * V
.
'
i‘g
IE :IilE
EE tEÿu
........
I
WV A! {•;
ftm
l"; '
ET u
...
v E
t
g3»g«;en«' HMW «** I. E
aatag"- liÿPsT m
m'A:
£
jfe -j: .
'IwKatesgigBga V-V
fiK1,-'
: EE’
i
m
WMMM A':
y
A
a
m
*
1
ftiiifiiiafc
?,M'r>..mJ»
2
1111
;;
m HJHI
- -- J mBKSSBSBBm
WL iS-ÿlS EE..
<6 I A / Jill
$K<m A. 9, . 4A.;:w 3SStfSf*K
’
H rawiifcM BB
-UN
JsÿM
&
275
-* *• IKraggjg*
JP*
n
n
3 KM!
si KS||5
;*i
i
jf
./
$£
JE
f
p-
K.-;:,v'
f§
i r-:v
;ÿ* jfV| y-.
PSi
I K,.-' r
;- ..ÿ5
mil m
sum
Im
n
- am 9
.v;;::.-g:V: BB
j
a
'
a
•'ÿ*’
!'» ' •'ÿ'» „•ÿ' -v . ,..- - -1® iBiSSis
I
'I' ?:•"•ÿ ;.
‘
V Si - m
. ' * » " ,J 1
*
SiSllilSIgiil Kill
H-dH
L1
276
Spindle PLG
• Spindle Pig TS5690 is a serial type and is used
by Mazak. Every machine but Integrex
• Consists of a pig pickup and connects directly to
the spindle amplifier. (No PreAmp).
• Waveform adjustment is not needed. Only need
to set the gap distance of .3mm
» Cannot view waveform, so Mitsubishi is
preparing a diagnostic function in future to

determine whicn pig or drive.
Checks position and speed.
Spindle Pig cont.
• Used on Igx200 to 400 series ERM289 plus APE391 H
(H/H) Heidenhiem
• Reason that we use is that the Heidenhiem can get to
higher resolution than can be obtained from the regular
pig unit.
• Phase A waveform rides 2.5v with peak to peak of 1 .0

volt. Turn dial on pre-amp, one is for volume, other is for
phase-shiÿ.T
• Phase B has same adjustment.
• Adjust phase Z so that is 60 percent of Phase A.
277
278
Spindle Pig cont.

• Spindle Pig TS5691 is also a serial type
and is used by Mazak only on Mpx or Igx
machine for lower milling turret. Gap is
.15mm
MDS-D/DH-SP series
The adjustment manual for the spindle PLG
TS5691 (Spindle serial detector)
Tentative version
* The adjustment manual contents of the serial detector TS5691 series *
1.Application P2
2.Type name
3.Serial detector TS5691 composition
4.Adjustment procedure flow
5.Adjustmet method
-- P2
P2
P3
P4-P8
279
1. Application
This book applies the adjustment points of cereal detector TS5691 series (MDS-D/DH exclusive use).
2.Type name
TS5691 series
3. Serial detector TS5691 composition

(1) The serial detector TS5691 is composed of the sensor, the preamp, and the detection gear. The entire composition and the
closeup of PCB are shown in Figure 1, and the function of each volume is shown in Table 1 and the function of each check
pin is shown in Table 2.
M Whole composition chart

Sensor part
PCB ( refer to Figure! ) Closeup

Preamp part
Sensor holder
m9
\
i
1H3
__
Preamp connector
(White) ,
BJ e Detection gear
Sensor connector (white)
Check pin (PO)

|p)inted wiring board closeup iigurq
Check pin (PA.PB,PZ.PC)
PA PZ PO
15 5 r jTn
o I
PB PC •VR2: VR4 T
[©] I.
i
it
ilÿVRI L
VR3
VR5
'////
-J
Figure 1. Closeup of PCB and the composition of the entire detector
Table I. Function of volume Fable 2. Function of check pin

Volume Function l%i name Function Pin name Function
VRl A phase ofTset adjustment PA A phase signal PB B phase signal
VR2 A phase gain adjustment PZ Z phase signal PC Middle point Voltage
VR3 B phase offset adjustment PO Ground (0v)
VR4 B phase gain adjustment
VR5 (Z phase width adjustment) <ÿ Basically, It is not necessary.
(2) In this detector, A phase, B phase, and Z phase are output from the sensor to the preamp as the analogue signal.
It is output from the preamp to control amplifier (MDS-D/DPFSP) as the serial signal.
(3) Please use the sensor and the preamp by the same serial number’s combination.
(4) Please note handling enough so as not to apply the scar to each part.
280
4.Adjustment procedure flow
The confirmation and the adjustment of the output signal of TS5691 are done according
to the following flow.
Start
V
(Step.1) Install the sensor holder on the motor.
Sensor holder installation (Gap adjustment) The gap is 0.1 5mm between the sensor and detect gear.
X
(Step.2)
Preamp PCB Installation
v
(Step.3)
Connection of cables
V
(Step .4) Adjust the output amplitude of each A/B phase signals
Adjustment of A/B phase signal by using the volume to 2000mV ± 10mV.
V
(Step.4) It is not necessary to adjust it basically only
Check Z phase signal by a wavy confirmation.
V
END
281
5. Adjustment method
« Step 1 » Sensor holder installation (Gap adjustment)
M5 screw
Sensor holder
Sensor
Installation surface
Detect gear
Figure 2. Installation of the sensor holder
c
O
Sensor holder S
_ _j
n
Sensor
& Gap=0.15+0.01 mm
Detect surface /-\r}

Outer of detect gear
Detect gear
Figure 3. Adjustment of the gap
282
« Step 2 » Installation of Preamp PCB
Screw Protection cover
\
Preamp PCB
Don’t insert the insulation washer ]

into these spaces Stud
Y Y
Figure 4. Installation of preamp on stud
« Step 3 » Connection of cables
(1)Connect the sensor cable and Preamp connector
o I [TCD
I
1
l [©] [©]
P i To the spindle unite
L
I H EK BBS a
T
Preamp connector
ISensor cable connector(White)
To the Sensor
Figure 5. Connection of Preamp and Sensor connector
283
(2)Connect the preamp cable to PLG F/B cable (CNPE1 ).
Preamp
/ Connect to CN2A
a „
E
<
§
PI
(J) I
T I PLG cable (CNPE1)|
I'O)
[Preamp connector
iH
IP‘»n»v*H
Spindle unit
Figure 6. Connection of PLG cable
(3) The chart of PLG cable connecting wires Amplifier side connector (Japanese Molex Inc.)
54593-1 011(connector housing)
Detector side connector 54594-1 015(plug cover A)
Pin: 1 70363-4(AMP) 54595-1 005(plug cover B)
Housing: 172169- 1 (AMP) 58935-1 000(shell cover)
PLG cable (CNPE1) 58934-1 000(shell body)
58937-0000(cable clamping)
Signal name
0.2mm2 ;
5 7 SD
6 X X 0.2mm2
8 SD*
3 3 RQ
4 X X 4 RQ*
0.2mm2
H-H
2
I
>o< + 5
6
MTl
MT2
xzzx
0.5mm2
7
+5.0V
0.2 mm2
0.5mm2
8
X X+ 2 5G
0.2mm2
9 FG
Figure 7. Chart of PLG cable connecting wires
•MadeRecommended electric wire:

of Bandoudensen BD20288 (The shield cable of compound six pairs specification No. -17145)
284
« Step 4 » Adjustment of A/B phase signal
(1) Setting of the open loop control

*1) In case of IM motor (SP017=0xxx or 2xxx), Set bit1=1 ofSP018 parameter, then turn off/on the power line once.
*2) In case of IPM motor (SP017=1 xxx or 3xxx), Set bit1=1 of SP018 parameter, and set SP113=10 (speed setting
for open loop control), then turn off/on the power line once.
(2) Turn on the spindle unit and NC, rotate the spindle head to CCW direction by the standard rotation speed.
Parameter SP020 PLG gear type (p/ rev) Standard rotation speed (r/m in)
8000 512 100
6000 384 140
4000 256 200
2000 128 400
formula for the standard rotation speed.

* The calculation
The standard rotation speed(r/min)=200(r/min)x(256/PLG gear teeth number)
< Example > In case of PLG gear teeth number is 1 28 p/rev,
200x256/128=400r/min.
(3) Adjust A/B phase signals by using the volume to 2000mV±10mV.
V(TP 1000mV±5mV
B phase signal
A phase signal
Vdc 0±10mV
VP.p 2000mV±10mV
285
« Step 5 » Check Z phase signal
(1 ) Confirm whether the Z phase width is 60%±5 of A phase signal at one cycle.
A phase
;ÿ 100%
1
Z phase
60 ±5%
Z phase width becomes about 0.7ms at the standard rotation speed
When the adjustment ends, stop the motor rotation , and press the emergency stop button.
And return “0" to“1” of bit 1 of SP018 (SP113 is returned to 0 for IPM). Finally, turn off the power supply
of NC and the spindle unit ,and turn on it .
286
287
rt£M
bO
f-T
C\
-JCt
> *v>
<c ;?P : a>; |
a
i
n
!I Q
Q. t,
r
I &
.y.--
Y1 '
rf IK\\ r S-o ©i
•
t
K
/ ’V
Q H
CO
-ÿ3
1 / Jp- u.'
©ÿ
-
y L ©
i
•: s?
\ 5
i © <0* CJl
r
ss Up :
.<&
r V
\
\ I
©
i-I <J)
g"
>< p*
\1 CO
I
i
?•
wt >
%l
©s| 1 ~
my
I
— ;°
n ;
•
I
m
I CL
[
sJIXI
m
mm
JSHHÿP,
**
®ll
If i —
a
MB
I-
X
I
'
I
* |g
i
m ,
xy ;S'V©':|
rsÿias
jÿ. jg
5
£-Sr
NJ m
—
*r
!g |§ Zg. -
m
•• -~m
m
i
mm
9 ’
I
CO
3
0
gw 1 m
l r i
sa
I
;
1
IS 0
m
-' .
i I, |If |_X
* -i. < U V.
S ’
5
!f 1
: •
Si
StSPiiil 1
WffsÿpXSSffS? •r—
—
-~
MB
' .x©’.
8S8®i ii
'
.
‘
:
X .
.
m © -
a :/i: SCjsi §© .
si*
yyxm m
.- i , m & SSiiSSSS . X‘ v‘X" *
.Ifc;
288
Spindle Open Loop/Orient

• To place spindle in open loop, set SP018 bit 1 to on.
Parameters are different.
• This is now a servo type spindle, so parameters are greatly
different.
• Switches back and forth from speed command to position
command on CH, however on DH, will be automatic.
Spindle control signal for diagnostic display. See page 5-
25,26,27,28,29.
• Spindle Orient Shift is parameter SA96.
• If trouble with sync. Tapping, change SP 8, 9, and 1 0.
• NoAutoTune
Non-Interpolation. Interpolation mode. Same as Synchronization
Spindle mode- CH C-axis mode. Contains C- New for DH
Speed & Orient axis and Synchronous Tap.
mode
Pos. Gain SP001 (new for SP002 SP003
DH)
Speed Gain SP5.SP6.SP7 SP8.SP9.SP10 SP5.SP6.SP7
1«1
i.
mfr
289
fHif
IP=
4;'
&
II
&
i]
ggglU*
Wmb>J '
"4
i..*>
f
“y- ""
mm &
'
?pr ->ÿ«
*
!
a
f>
1
U 1tetcv n” IbL
I Ills
4
3R«ÿ- :* •
Jp
•
I-: lii Hl * &-

fsw%S %\ l
_
B ',- 4
ma.r : TL£ 8HS5B1 *•*
—
V
m. 44 •*..;-»ÿ4%%
JHfLd .- vn
>&•
•a
Ssa i® II (ÿ
f; V -.-' ••"•••* •• ;•/•• :.* .
TZ***
*wm ns jr
V,
*1£ ..
. . *r jpa%ggg tts
-•ir
8k*
IT!
.f *#11 It |
b (€g) -7:i
v«if t \
X '%ViX
leÿfcsi V> >;i I©
[ 3 j|p" a* s$. I If ;
"'•r-i
>••'
'
«&«>«««*£ '- -: -JW

HEP* 4:;:-“
saB Fit \ \ X. fi
fi
Jns,
i3
mIS:’ V V
.. 44 V
%
•• -4fl
fi IJ
t::
'••••.
<4 \ til
•
M'-•'4 :|§l X'

1
''Tj
'
[/ ;4
a KS Hggi
P8HP*
K
>iV4: ' tap
fWS
li*l 8 J 5S8
mm •:
h
Ift— -i!
;:ÿ
€5M
r;:» t'-
't
t srM ..jm (if.
KA
m • •>« i’.fM
X
X
SÿS m TJm If ’mlS
i C-lVt;
fs5V;;m
:ÿ':' .
XjH‘ ;/ £ .
HHII iffli •• ;
•a--. M
:- J
$mm
ainpid 6|d 1-96SS1

F-
k
290
Technical Notification
25. Sep, 2006
$ Model
H
Unit
7)
m Magnetic pole positioning of 1PM spindle motor with MDS-DH spindle drive unit
1. Outline
When the current model, MDS-C1/CH spindle drive unit, is equipped to a machine with an IPM spindle motor, magnetic pole
positioning is necessary during machine's setup* (Automatic phase Z tuning). In the automatic phase Z tuning function, the
mi? tuning result (magnetic pole shift amount) will be written in the spindle drive unit's memory at the completion of tuning, and
thereafter, the result in the memory will be used. Thus, when replacing the spindle drive unit whose automatic tuning is
complete, it is necessary to perform automatic tuning again for the new drive unit in order to write the tuning result in the
memory.
However, in the case of MDS-DH spindle drive unit, the tuning result mentioned above can be set in a parameter, so it is
unnecessary to perform magnetic pole positioning again at replacing drive units.
In addition, please refer to below for differences between MDS-DH and the current MDS-C1/CH in magnetic pole positioning
due to the change above.
’Magnetic pole positioning is to memorize the relative position of the detector's phase Z and motor’s magnetic pole position. As IPM spindle
motor is permanent magnet motor, it is necessary to constantly grasp the motor's magnetic pole position. Owing to magnetic pole
positioning, it is possible to grasp the accurate magnetic position by referring to the memorized magnetic pole position at delecting the
detector's phase Z.
2 .Difference From Current Model Regarding Magnetic Pole Positioning 0
The following table compares DH and C1/CH regarding the major items in magnetic pole positioning
Major item Current MDS-C1/CH What is different from the

MDS-DH spindle drive unit
current model
-Machine setup
When to
-Motor exchange (Including -Machine setup Not necessary in replacing
perform the -Motor exchange (Including detection
detection gears) drive units.
positioning gears)
-Drive unit exchange_ _
q (1) Set the spindle parameter (1) Let the motor detector's phase Z Even though the procedure
1
o
SP205=0->1, and turn the
spindle ON.
pass. steps increase, necessary time
(2) Set spindle parameter SP225/bit4 will be reduced.
Procedure (2) Positioning complete in up to 1, and turn the spindle ON.
and to 90 seconds. (3) After 10s. write down the value on
necessary (3) Turn the NC ON again. the spindle monitor screen.
time (4) Turn OFF the spindle , and set the
value in (3) in the spindle parameter
SP118
(5) Turn the NC ON again
The magnetic pole shift amount can
Result of positioning
be checked on the spindle monitor Magnetic pole position result
Others (magnetic pole shift amount)
cannot be checked. screen or by the setting value of the can be checked.
parameter SP118.
3. Details of Magnetic Pole Positioning with MDS-DH Spindle Drive Unit
To this document, procedure of magnetic pole positioning (magnetic pole shift measurement) is attached. When MDS-DH
spindle drive unit is connected to a machine with an IPM spindle motor, please perform magnetic pole positioning following this
procedure.
[Machines to perform the positioning (Mx)l :
0
milling spi n d I e,
INTE200/300I II upper milling spindle. MPT/INTE low er
QTN250MS (Y) sub spindle
4. When the Change Starts to Apply
Magnetic pole positioning (magnetic shift amount measurement) by MDS-DH drive unit is supported from the software version
0
A4 (high-speed synchronous tapping will be supported from A4E).
As the version A3 and before doesn’t suppon magnetic pole positioning, there will be 5 seconds of display time at the initial
start of the spindle every time the power is turned ON. This can be solved by upgrading the software to A4 and after, and
performing magnetic pole positioning.
-Added magnetic pole Issued by Authorized by Sales Dept.
posilioning lo Outline 066-A Drive System Fundamental Development
1 0, Aug. 2005
Sec., Drive System Dept., Nagoya
0 -Added models to which the Sawaki Sano Tsutsui
ft)
change applies
Works, Mitsubishi Electric Corp.
-Changed the supported 5-1-14, Yadaminami, Higashi-ku,
O software version 25.S(*j>. 25 Sep 25.Sep
-Added cautions to procedure Nagoya461-8670 JAPAN
of magnetic pole shift amount
2006 2006 2006
TEL +81 52 712 2298
measuring 066-B
FAX + 81 52 712 3960
31. Oct 2005 # BNP-B8959- 240-*(BNP-B8959-066-B)
291
[Procedure of magnetic pole shift amount measurement with MDS-DH drive unit]
When SP142=0, set as follows, and turn the NC ON again. 0
INTE200/300 III upper milling spindle: SP 142=1 333
MPT/INTE lower milling spindle SP142=U1
QTN250MS (Y) sub spindle SPI42-1 n
Start (Note 1)
Set all SP125. 126 and 127. Normally, set

all to 0.
1. Setup for magnetic
1 pole shift amount
SP226/bit5=1
(Pulse application magnetic pole estimation valid)
1
Spindle forward rotation
(About S60)
< “CYC CNT" on spindle

monitor is not 0
N J 2. Check if phase Z is
passed
Y
Spindle stop (Servo OFF)
SP225/bit4=1
.(DC excitation mode start)
I
Spindle forward rotation
(Arbitrary S setting)
U
3. Measure magnetic
< Weak excitation lime passed.

Normally. 10s
N
pole shift amount
Y
Write down the value of 'AFLTdB" on
spindle monitor
I Spindle stop (Servo OFF)
I Magnetic pole shift amount SP118=Value

that was written down
I
SP225/bit4=0 V 4 Set magnetic pole
(DC excitation mode stop) (Note 2)
shift amount
r Turn the NC ON again
m Finish
[Notes]
1 Perform magnetic pole shift amount measurement without workpieces and tools With workpiece and tool, the measurement
result may be incorrect.
2. When the measurement is complete, make sure to perform DC excitation mode stop (SP225/bit4=0). Otherwise, after turning
the NC ON again, the initial parameter error alarm 37 will occur
3. Magnetic pole shift amount is different depending on each machine. When importing the parameter from another machine
(SRAM data), make sure to change the SP118 value to the one suitable for the machine
292
T'l
) • [Related parameters]
Parameters with an asterisk * in the abbreviation are validated with the NC power turned ON again.
•re¬ setting range
Name Abrv, Description •ii; ; Details
(Unit)
Magnetic Set the magnetic pole shift amount of I PM spindle motor. -18000 to 18000
SP118 MSFT pole shift When set to "0". shift won't be performed (Electrical angle
amount When performing pulse application magnetic pole estimation, setting is necessary. 1°/100)
When in DC excitalion mode
D/A output Set the excitation rate in the weak excitation range in the unit of motor short time
SP125 DA1NO channel 1 ratio %. -32768 to 32767
data # When set to ‘0". it will be 20%.
_
Normally, set to “0".
W/hen in DC excitation mode
r-5 D/A output Set the excitation rate in the weak excitation range in the unit of motor short time
SP126 DA2NO channel 2 ratio %. -32768 to 32767
data # When set to “0". it will be 50%.
Normally, set to "P".
D/A output When in DC excitation mode
DA1MPY Set the weak excitation time in the ms unit.
SP127 channel 1 -32768 to 32767
output scale
Normally, set to "0"_
When set to ‘0", it will be 10000ms.
In the case of IPM spindle motor

Used in initial magnetic pole detection of IPM spindle motor.
Set the time and coil to apply pulse, and estimated magnetic polarity in pulse
application magnetic pole estimation.
As this setting is specific for motor, normally set the value in the spindle parameter
list.
Flux control 1 . Time to apply pulse: Set in the [ps] unit. (0<Application time<350)
SP142 KF6* ratio 6 2. Coil to apply pulse: W/hen selecting low-speed coil, add 1000 to Ihe application -32768 to 32767
time.
3. Estimated magnetic polarity: W/hen setting the opposite polarity, set negative
sign to the values of 1. and 2.
E g.) Perform 333ps of pulse application magnetic pole estimation with low-speed
coil. Estimated polarity is the opposite polarity.
SP142 =-(333+1000) = -1333 _
bit Name When set to 0 When set to 1
0
1
2
3
4 ded Normal DC excitation mode start
5
Spindle 6
SP225 SFNC5 7
function 5
8
9
A
B
C
D
ovsn Overshoot compensation type 3 Non-sensitive band setting (Unit is 2°/1000)
E
i F
bit Name When set to 0 When set to 1

0
1
2
3
4
Spindle
5
6
pon Normal
pole estimation valid _
IPM spindle pulse application magnetic
SP226 SFNC6
function 6 7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
T
293
PROJECT NAME:
PLG Adjustment of Matrix Control
The new PLG TS5690 of Matrix Control does NOT need to do PLG automatic compensation
function(SP245) like current PLG TS5276 in order to adjust A and B-phase sine wave signal
input into spindle drive.
Also there is NOT a PLG PCB, it is NOT necessary to check voltage of each-phase sine
wave signal on synchroscope.
M640
CH-SP
liiSi Bus Line
CN5 jj-
Analog
Pri-Amp |
Si Thermal
'
m PLG I* ’
(TS5276) Spindle
Power Line
Mx
v
DH-SP
Optical Cable
Serial
CN2t I Thermistor
New PLG
(TS5690) Spindle
Power Line
294
r-
Replacement of Unit Fan

When an alarm and/or a warning is displayed about the coolant fan on the NC monitor screen and the LED portion of the
unit, replace the unit fan.
Drive Unit Alarm

r No. Alarm Description
A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped, and the loads
45 Fan stop
1 on the unit exceeded the specified value.
Power Supply Alarm
I No. /LED Alarm Description
!A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped, and
i 72/ E Power supply:
Fan stop overheat occurred in the power module.
[Drive Unit Warning

No. Alarm Description
A6 i Fan stop warning A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped.
[Power Supply Warning
No. / LED | Alarm Description
EE/ 0 Power supply:

Fan stop warning
[A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped.
295
Replacement parts
Model Size
fl09P0424H3D 13 p40mm (for MDS-D-CV)
pMF-04C24DSÿ-RCA p40mm (for other than MDS-D-CV)
{MMF-06F24ESÿRM5 p60mm
MlvlJ-09D24TS-RR15 p90mm
|MMF-T2D24PSÿM5 Dl20mm
i
m
i
1 1 . Turn off the breaker for the input power and j

(removethe drive unit after the charge lamp on |
the power supply unit turns off
|
| ft
296
H
V
2. Unscrew the mounting screws at 4 places to
remove the fan guard on the backside of the
drive unit.
BiiP
tv,*
!
I
V
jji #
5 SalllS i
\3. Remove the hooks (at 4 places x 2) from the ir..> 5
jfan guard and then remove the fan guard.
in
pS
!
297
El Igp
%
8pgf|l
After removing the fan guard * SO
11
i
|4. Unscrew 2 screws for mounting the fan.
I sBiSlm
2M
!
!
11
!..
I: E :i
298
Wm Si
i* -O
5. Remove the rubber bushing for the fan

power line and disconnect the connector.
m
Remove the connector and replace the fan. :m
"c
{dire assembly should be performed in the
reverse order of removal.
lit*
fe,
-• ••
m
B
J /
299
MATRIX Maintenance Modes
Ivlaintenance modes which are added newly on the MATRIX machines are the operation restriction functions with various
interlocks used at the service and the maintenance To perform safe servicing and maintenance operations, the functions including
the feedrate limitations and the axis movement interlocks other than the equipment required the adjustment are operated, and then,
servicing and maintenance can be provided.
1. Selecting a maintenance mode
The following selection conditions must be satisfied:

-The machine is in a stopped status.
-Manual operation mode or MDI mode is valid.
-The setup switch is set to the ON position (1) with the door open.
(1) Press the DIAGNOS menu key in the POSITION screen.
EOS XT 10)1 SET UP FROCRJIM TOOT. c-eoiw PARAM ormnios DAT .A TOOL DISPLAY
IN
(2) Press the VERSION menu key.
VERSION ALARH ALARM PLC MAIHYEH RUNNING GRAPHIC DATA ACCUMlf -

HISTORY SIGNAL CHECK CONTROL MAIWTE- ERASE TIME
IN
300
Menu select key I
Menu key
!i
8m
O I P = I
rrrnrgÿiTOTy §
mtt-iHof"
—
ii
lp|liijF0l ri |
JL fejai
PÿS'i
- 't kpy
(3) After the DIAGNOS screen is displayed, press the menu select key
press the INPUT key.
—K*_ Then
. enter password "1 131" and
(4) Press the machine menu key and then press the screen select key I i once. The MAINTE. MENU menu item
will be displayed.
(5) Press the MAINTE. MENU menu key.
MA1HTE.
MENU
301
(6) The items provided for maintenance purposes are: ‘MAINTE. MODE ATC, MAINTE. MODE PC, MAOSTIE.
MODE AXIS, MAINTE. MODE SPINDLE, and MAINTE. MODEDBB. Select die appropnate item according
to particular needs. The selected item will have its display highlighted on the screen. Select the menu items as required
one by one.
_L |WSJ O' j 200u/0€/Q? [l3:23;d2

W 50% (~'3D Onlti~u [VW Onon/ula
MAXrtTE . U&Xin'E. tlRIMTE . M3LTWTB .
UODB MODE MODS MODE MODE
MC PC AXIS SPJHELB DBB
<Display in maintenance mode>

"The "WAAMITNG; MAINTE. MODE AAA" is displayed as an alarm message.
(AAA: Selected maintenance mode). Then the selected maintenance mode will have its display highlighted on the
screen. When the maintenance mode is cancelled, above display will be cancelled.
Cancellation of the selected maintenance mode>

Tie selected maintenance mode will be cancelled:
-When die door is closed
-When the setup switch is turned to the OFF position (O)
-When power is turned off
-When the selected menu key is pressed again (to clear the highlighting of the menu item).
302
2. Operation hi maintenance modes
The door interlock is cancelled under the following functional limitations:
(1) Functional limitations on each maintenance mode
<Maintenance Mode ATC>

-ATC/ magazine-related maintenance menu key operations are possible.
-Only ATC-related M-code operations are possible in MDI mode. (Usable M-c odes: M6, M17, Ml 8,
M19.M149)
[Ml 5, M16: M-code for ATC cover (Option)]
<Maintenance Mode PC>

-Pallet change-related maintenance menu key operations are possible.
-Only pallet change-related M-code operations are possible in MDI mode. (Usable M-codes: M70,
M71.M72)
<Maintenance Mode Axis Move>

-Movement at tlie maximum speed is possible by pressing the axis feed switch and the MF1 and MF2
keys at. the same time. Releasing any keys stops the movement.
-If neither the MF1 nor MF2 key is pressed, the maximum speed will be limited to 2 m/min (if it is
rotation axis, surface speed is limited to 2 m/min)
-The maximum speed operation is also possible for axis movement in MDI mode.
303
<Maintenance Mode Spindle Rotate >
-Operation at the maximum spindle speed is possible by pressing the spindle starting switch and the
MF 1 and MF2 keys at the same time. Releasing any keys stops the rotation.
-If neither the MF1 nor MF2 key is pressed, the maximum speed will be limited lower (The maximum
speed depends on the machine type.).
-The maximum speed is also possible for spindle rotation starting in MDI mode.
(Usable M-codes: M3, M4, M5, M19)
<Maintenance Mode DBB>

-Automatic operation starting is possible.
-Axes movements are permitted (Usable M-codes: MO, Ml, M2, M30, M99)
(2) Hand pulse operation for axis movement is possible, even during maintenance mode.
(3) The chip conveyor/ screw conveyor comes to a complete stop.
304
305
306
Matrix Special Menu
• Allows customer to add their own menu
keys to call up special softwares
• Example shows setting for printscreen
functions.
• Edit
c:\MC_sdg\CustomMenu\CustomMenu.txt
307
308
Matrix Special Menu Explanation

/.ÿHUP m
XWO /Si u ..
fi-ic
iir /v-m‘m.-.! * \c\-:
Comment
Only * j Hen uNain e=Pr i nt:
|[Henu-1]
Screenl
F11 BP aril-c:\jna1 me\pr1 nx: screen -exe
[Menu-?]
Menu Shown Men u Maui e=Pr i ntScreen!
F11 QParh-c:\jfla1 me\pr1 rat screen 2 „ exe
1
j [Menu— 3]
|Men uNam e=Pr i nt ScreenB
Actual File path F11 epaxhÿcsVaal mte\pr1 nt screen 3 «
i
and Executeable
(.exe) file
* ”1
A
Matrix Special Menu Example

mmmmmmm
File Window Help
Mi;Vÿ M -veaisna \i
i AT
a Back ’ ?ÿ Search L Folder; j
Actual File i is j
AO*jl C:-5 !0I C:\MC_sdg\ CustomMenu ;»£•£! So
Folders X fvlane Size Type Date Modified i
G Cookies [i] CustomMenu.txt 1 KB TextOocument 8/ J 7/2005 2:39 AM
>: [J Desktop
•±i Favorites HIJBBI BUSH i ...i
: - "aaj
•+.: I j My Documents
.7; Q Start Menu j [Menu-1]
Programs MenuName=Pri nt screen
Pi 1 ePath=c :\ma1 nte\Prin tscreen. exe
:+ G All User?
+'. G metpub [Menu-2]
Qj m6y_yrnw uName=Print
Menu Scr een2
File Pat h=C : \mai nt e\P ntscreen2 . exe
+• O ni6yboot
+': L_J mainte [Menu-3]
•*J G MC.Backup HenuName =Print Screen3
.
MC.Direct Mode Programs Fi 1 epat h -c : \mai nte\Pri nt Screen3 exe
;£ÿ G MC_Gl Data
:f: G MC_Machine Database
;.t- D MC_Machine Programs
S iG MC_sc'g
G Alarm
G CustomMenu
D cutest
D cutmorj
D cutres (3)
G dbl
D fug
~ I Mil
I Toollnformation | Full Ptint Screen |S. SAVE|
it: G meloctrl 1/23 14: 49: 26
< > Aclive Piinl Screen! & SAVE |
TUTT2s% Tnr“
Print Print Print
309
»>
Screenl Screen2 Scresn3
(2) MENU
(1)
310
311
312
Matrix:
Howto select multiple Folders in the Explorer
address jss C;\

=olders x Name •- Size ; Type Date Modified
0 0CPCU
'
-• 3ÿ1 Desktop File Folder 12/1/2005 10:10 AM

±J Q My Documents 1 0 Documents and Settings
3 Q My Computer I 0 inetpub I Shift 1+ Ctrl
3 3’A Floppy (A:) i 0m6y_ymw
S S3 MAZATROL (C:) 0m6yboot
L+! 0CPCU I 0|| Press & Hold Shift + Ctrl to Select
E !
_
El 0 Documents and Settii 0MC_Bacdup
] Administrator j 0MC_Direct Mode Programs
Multiple Folders in Explorer.
S
l .~l .iboconsole
l~~l Cookies
0 0 Desktop
Favorites
© Q My Document
j
1 0melpctrl
MC_GL Data
0 MC_Machine Database
I 0MC_Machine Programs
CDI
CCncbackup
/ File Folder
File Folder
IJZoT, 7T9
10/26/2005 6:47 AM
Ei CD Start Menu j
S3 [0 Programs !
l+i 0 All Users 1 >
_
0nm64mdata
]pli tool
File Folder
File Folder
10/26/2005 7:49 AM
9/1/20135 12:00 PM
i+J 0 inetpub
:
j 0 Program Files File Folder 10/23/2005 6:32 AM
i+l 0 m6y_ymw Ij 0 RUNMNG File Folder 10/25/2005 7:46 AM
Iddies; C:\
:olders X Name Size Type Date Modified
Desktop A QCPCU File Folder 12/1/2005 10:10 AM
+3 Q My Documents ; 0 Documents and Settings
3 Q My Computer
E 3’A Floppy (A:)
| Cl inetpub
0 m6y_ymw Shift rn Ctrl
E 0 MAZATROL (C) I 0m6yboot
S3 0 CPCU | Cl mairite Start Postion Cursor to Stating Location.
o 0 Documents and Settir 0MCJ3ackup 4 Press & Hold Shift + Ctrl.
*3 0 Administrator IK Move Cursor to Ending Location.
1 .iboconsole !ia
r~1 Cookies :0
0 Desktop ,0!
;+!
V? Favorites
+: 0 My Document
0 Start Menu +- 11 n LllI : |
File Folder 10/26/2005 6:47 AM
i? 10 Programs 0nm64mdata End File Folder 10/26/2005 7:49 AM
+ÿ
0 All Users 0 plctool File T older 9/1/2005 12:00 PM
+. 0 inetpub 0 Program Files File Folder- 10/23/2005 6:32 AM
+
+ÿ
0 m6y_ymvv
I iribvhrinr _ 0 RUNMNG
0 Voice
File Folder
“ile Folder
10/25/2005 7:46 AM
10/26/2005 7:49 AM
313
314
315
316
Remote I/O
_si
HI
<•
-V
__
.
i O
;
:
>6'SV \si*i .'4V-
* Z1
o
X1
C
-65. 3
-0. 023
0.
_____
__ 0
N 0[ o] I
(
2
SSI
y* ;
;--g
):
;
I
.
v? J
fk
'ÿ
“
'
:
«ÿ
X2 0. T13- 0[12- 0]
* Z2 0. PC 47 C 0) .
.
si
£
•
-* **in» <%>m. izfe .3 r> £«

:
j /ÿj ; : !
J . J ! ,§L
.".1# . *0 a$<r! ,fc*
y 2
. • II* 0 M|h v2:
¥« . •3-- •V •wif'sifi 5. 0 “ g i— g; o
••
.-£•ÿ : ym »i
C"i : :.: '
:
: •
zM
_REMOTE itO ...

/ y,* ‘
BSP j*
•
.-Ti
> v
•'*
: ' i V •
i v ... *
TROUBLESHOOTING
_ v *'.. */ _
Wi
•
fe»ir*v
.
~
---*
X
U
I 4n
W
V& I
H clI V
T ,s
1
jmmXtL *'
2 3
|
1
.
3
JC'
'
m fL. Ma S T L 0 =
*
i
mm <) I i K
RMiSiga
RA
*
r W
/ & I »>
[ÿin- H
m
111
11 il
fir
?<K?
« j i; gs
1> rÿ° R Iÿjlrÿ t
.v':
4» 4
'.0®' I hi
r-. A
*
5 •ÿ
:K I
I w T w fulfills) Oil
317
m
a
..
Mg .
I
m rx raiwi
n rx
318
r\ rr\ r?\
XRT
W
r
v_y LJ\_y v_y v.
I
WAV'1''
ma
*“ÿ
Si
?|as
iiSilil
/: ;
v •
(ill x
m
File View Setup Window Help M# X-
POSITION BUFFER NEXT COMMAND ;

X 0 X 0. G UNo. ijjj Sllfe
Y 0. Y 0. IT f M i i''!*
2 -40. 2 0 UNex8 , •-
MACHINE REMAIN UPC
o X 0. X 0. X -100.
S 0 F 0. lit H 0
o Y 0. Y 0. Y -100
m igi U17 G 91 G 23 G 94 G 21 G 40
o Z 0. 2 0. 2 -3U0 a -GX4f G
G40.1 G
80
67
G 98
G 69
G 50
G 97
G 54
G 15 G50. 1
G 64
m li x if mi*fes fei
Hi
v}V'j V;
11 11
TNo. 1
(CTR-DR
->-> TNo.
) (
0
i
NAGA2NPKNO .
(
’\y\
)
1 SPDL
(i)
0
0
min"1
H/HIN SPBL;
-0 100 200
m SI
HI
PALLET N
UNIT :
FEED 0.
0.
MM/MIH
M/REV X-AX: a m
¥
i
T-0FFSET Di( 0) 0. •If X

i
H#( 0) 0. Y-AX:
I i
m
>
a
W|»«
INDEX 8 :>
al 2-AX: 110I
w&
55 REMOTE 1/0 ERROR (400008000, r 1 TPS 0 2001/01/13 10:29

A m :/
M Y.WV/'V
Omm/min 1 ZERO RETURN

...
: , :: •
fi lilW ifpi ‘
4 T T ir I . :
TPS
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR(Mill)

9 REMOTE I/O ERROR (Lathe)
nfhF
-11 11 11 I I 1 1
rn
n A
n m H-N npÿF
r
055 D1024V MALFUNCTION (Note, , ) E H 0 PI

III
#1
it
Cause ill
ifIII
Note: & Q0 C|C Q1
—
Please contact your YAMAZAKI MAZAK products service station.
- This is a Hexadecimal #! If other than 00, it has a problem in that system.
No.1 system (XG~)
No, 2 system (X80~)
No, 3 system (X100-)
WhatlsaivstanP
f||
til
pftl
mj
f No.4 system (X280-)
Take Hex # and turn into 8 digit Binary!
VVXV,;
M mi nmm\m m ti lim? Hits 421

Action 7 6 5 4 3 2 10
0 0 01 0 0 0 0 1
Station m
Station 1
’ WlatlsastatloiP
Station 8
319
The above example indicates that an communications error has occurred in station 1 of the No. 2 system.
x \J
n nfhR
320
o
r
nru II
r
m 0
Hr
009 REMOTE I/O ERROR ( ) E H M Red

An error occurred in data communication with the remote I/O card.
Cause
Please contact your MAZAK service representative.

Action
i /To o dy uH J I
'
\U\U
_j n
w inn rm
9 REMOTE I/O ERROR 2(0000,0001)

/ \ N Station 8 Station 5
Problem in system 2
Problem is with station 1
L J r-n rr\
Q
/
—
Jlf rv)
cm
r?nrr\ ;-s'
j
K1S i wuup
rr\r7\ mm ,-n
mm 7i /ÿNrrÿ
a ::
r
—
s
VJ3 \1S Kiy UjV_yuJ
V uu
; ;
•••••-•ÿ• : '
_ ;
I
'
za
File Window Help
•
- .•
VERSION j DIAGNOSIS HOW IT OR j OPTION | SERVO MONITOR] SPINDLE MONITOR HARDWARE MONITOR
[CMC] [CPU] t [BUS]

HR113 C HR122
M -***' 5 Wd 3 •V.
[RIO]
1 <u 8
1 HRS53 HRS53 §t|liWlmMMSm
m
2 HRS 71 ; HR371 HR371 m
ppi
3 RX312 :
4 HR371 HRS 71
§
•Vv
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR U0000G7G0, 1 TPS 0 2001/01/12

sss
10:05
|W 50% (z$ Or pm .
V#. 0 OOin/min s
a a:
321
DIAGNOS VERSION DIAGNOS OPTION SERVO SPIKDLE !

HARDWARE LADDER'
R1 pr n o
322
LMI D UU . o
, y-
O
fVF C¥\ mn -iH :
Q
2
cv
:
sat ERtlTl: I« x|
File Window Help
VERSION DIAGNOSIS MONITOR] OPTION]
13
SERVO MONITOR]I SPINDLE MONITOR HARDWARE MONITOR ]
|
[CMC]
HR113
[RIO]
i
C
[CPU]
HR122
_ smritii
.
& OD 00
TTT
07 00
T
US]
No.1 system.: (XG~)

No.2 system (X80-)
1 HR353 HRS 5 3 '
2 HRS 71 HR371 HR371 No, 3 system (X1CO-)

3 1X312 NoA system (X280-)
4 HRS 71 HR371
0 7
vnm 1 -;
;
765413210
8 4 2 1 9 4 2 1 Jiinary
L Station. 1
Station
‘jraW’J
2
3
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR t £00000700 Station 8
w 50% [zjjl 0 r pm I V'A'V 0 . 0 0 in
DIAGNOS VERSION
T T Sliii
<E HARDWARE LAC'D ER
&00000700 - -
MONITOR MONITOR
aaa
/T\ /m a n n a
U O'
—
crq Q
iu Qi D
I
u VJL/ i JWULJL
File Window Help

i. m mmmmmmmM
>
VERSION DI&0N03I3 MONITOR] OPTION] SERVO MONITOR] SPINDLE MONITOR HARDWARE MONITOR
M
A m
[CMC] [CPU] It 'BUS]:
HR113 C HR122
5.88 xii1-. •-* w« IB - - mse-a/SK
Sc 00 00 07 CO
[RIO]
system (XD~jji
1
1 HRS 5 3
2 HRS 71
&
HRS 53
HR371 .HR-371
4 5
- No.2 system £X.80~)
w vr 6
3 5X312
4 HRS 71 HR371
7
7B54|32tO
B 4 2 1 4 2 Binary
|
i
i
•vM 4 ; 2
niojJ 5
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR f £00000700 . i
|w 501 _D Or pm jV'M 0. 00 in/mJ

=2
T v,'.
. v
323
DIAGN03 VERSION E HARDWARE LADDER
&00000700 * MONITOR MONITOR 0

—
i rn <ThR ns o (Dr\ 7a ffb,
324
JI _3 m t r r UUU0ii]liJ
71 T
2 0 S7\
JW
n juu i joy r r
V-/
: ini m :w:
x\
File Window Help ..jV :
s VERSION | DIAGNOSIS MONITOR] OPTION]
[C1JC]
Hill 3 C
[CPU]
HR122
STATIONS
SERVO MONITOR ] SPINDLE MONITOR HARDWARE MONITOR
BUS]
m
Y [RIO]
i Liu LG 07 oS
7
NoJ system (X0-)

l:"? 4 5
Na2 system (X80~)
£j
1 HR353 HRS 5 3
2 HRS 71 HR371 HR371 No*3 system {X1Q0~J
3 RX312
HRS 71
l-'l-i;-.- ®§ NoJ system (X2S(H
4 HRS 71
0 7
7 6 5 4 3 210
e 4 2 10 4 ! 2 1 | Binary
fl
Mill* —
*—Siafion
Si alien
- STtof lohl
1
2
3
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR
pvv (3®
U0000p700y r
— Stations 8
50*
DIAUNOS VERSION
0 r pm
I
|V#i 0.00
in/mÿ I4i
,E HARDWARE LADDER i
MONITOR MONITOR
&00000700
|R
325
C 3
a
win
__
50,
is
a
°
CD $VM
O
£3$
sm
°
1
l
OS
T»
*
L*l
i i
o
X
i -(
8
K
cr
T
io
15
S
«
>
*t>
-
ill
©
I
- es
I :
£9
e
[
Era
£3£1
>
(=)
:
n
-i 1 $Y2“i I <*230> u>
C<
1 1 Sv2-«J tx23ii >•
c
\1 ,,
O
<ÿ
N.
£o_J
EE 03 5V2'M
SV2*«-i
*9
©
« » *
X *
o o o
3D
•* o
m
o
II
-L
C3T0 v A
PS 03 SV3
t O T
Ju c-i »V
- *
W 12
c=o 03 f"C 8 o:
0P) « % oz
r
J
5'
OH
&
>-
V
o
o
IOO
't*-0
r*o
s ?
t.
3
.
\. ...A
_
x
* »ÿ
* rirnr -*«i
S rz
—
v_r*
Li
£
i--> i »
£
J <y m
«
>
>w 1
L:L
~
£0
CP£) il CO
OH i
: £9 f 11
Q
I
—
C3
i
1651Pi
t ; FH
ueaw lieaH
5 Lj
£3 O
— — o
>
*c
*
>
*D
o |C/>
O;
IPD £g
K X
5 CD r
CP
e>
*v>
1 rn > rLo > i-o>
u am
IPS >
CJ
4J
UCiiH 2
o
UCttH hj 3
|M)
opiC) w
I
(0
0 o D
326
n d
AP20 MAGAZINE KHRMISMNI

J
ss
@’(§> ©
_T3L
®
.XL, fXL _Q_,
HHRttiMlN] XL, XL
Sr o o «s C. o
X)
.-r, s g
!C
4-0 tO
CTj O wr> Uf> SO Q2 o to to so 40 so f
•-}
Is- s 5
CSJ
X
X
5 X x X X X X X X K X X
«*ÿ
X X X
4S *3-
MO
© ©®©©©©©©®®®i§}®©@® 1
X4024
(¥2601 )
r
©
an ]CHI
—s *(« i«
n
£
"
JJ"" to to
£rz
to
s ec
i/3
%
X
lQQ[l;ii i! lilii: i! i!|
tt
to
to
i
X2024 patter? i
tXT 6 1 ) 7 r
«<ÿ
«|J «|) t|i ”4|T 5i|j 4i=y i
•*
C1D I-,,, CHS CHS CN7 CHS CHS CN« j
pa
IIIIII!
a Cv Ti o i«i
3MB in ;
aa i
W
>fr
5
SK
4(g'|' '-®'
|I t
*
a /
/
SET:?
Statin # an Se«0B= ®76 s 4321
X3024 (XT 3! )
JUMPER: 1-2
Mazatrol Fusion Remote 10 I
!
Communication error count j
Spec
Tins function is always activated ( Note In case of lathe parameter 088 bit 0 should be on
This function is that it. can output counter value of communication error corresponding to the R register table below.
Each count value accumulated in R registers can be made cleat' by R51 28 setting
P.5 1 28
bit 0: Clear Max value (make "0" for R5000 -Eh 0631
bit 1 : Clear accumulated value (make "0" for R5064-R51 27)
*When this bit is set . start ot clear ,and at same time thus bit will be off automatically While
looking at these registers is helpful, it is not. 1 00 % accurate as telling where the problem is. There have been cases
where the P.-register may be higher, but problem was actually on another station where R-register count was lower.
Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station

Signal name System 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Max value 1 R5 000 R5001 R5002 R5003 R5004 R5005 R5 006 R5007
Commnicaiton
VsV.A.'.AW.A.V.AW.Aÿ.\W/v
2 R5008 R5 009 R5010 R5011 R5012 R5013 R5014 R5015
3 R5016 R5017 R5Q18 R5019 R5020 R5021 R5022 R5023
4 R5024 R5025 R5026 R5 027 R5028 R5029 R5030 R5031
Max value 1 P.5032 R5033 R5034 R5035 R5036 R5037 R5038 R5039
CRC R5040 R5041 R5042 R5043 R5044 R5045 R5C46 R5047
3 R5 048 R5 049 R5050 R5051 R5052 R5053 R5054 R5055
4 R5 056 R5057 P.5 058 R5059 R5 060 R5061 R5062 P.5 063
Accumutated 1 P.5 064 P.5 065 R5066 R5067 R5068 R5 069 P.5070 P.5071
Value 2 P.5072 P.5073 P.5074 R5075 R5076 R5077 P.5078 R5079
Communication 5 P.5 080 P.5081 R5082 R5083 R5084 R5085 R5086 P.5 087
4 R5088 R5089 R5090 R5091 R5092 R5093 R5094 R5095
Max value 1 R5096 P.5 097 R5098 P.5099 P.5100 R5101 R5102 R5103
CRC 'V
A R5104 R5105 P.5 1 06 R5107 R5108 R5109 R5110 R5 111
•->
R5112 R5113 P.5114 R5115 P.5116 P.5 1 17 P.5118 R5119
4 R5120 R5121 R5122 R5123 P.5 1 24 R5125 R5126 P.5127
327
Counter clear Flag R5128

328
REMOTE D I/O SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION FUSION 640 CONTROLS

Mills The relationship of PLC address with remote I/O systems and stations:
Only! INPUTS OUTPUTS

ROTARY
SW
USAGE
Station 1 X000-X00F Y000-Y00F N/A HR337 / HR353

Station 2 X010-X01F Y010-Y01F N/A HR337 / HR353
Station 3 X020-X02F Y020-Y02F N/A / 5 HR337 / HR371
Station 4 X030-X03F Y030-Y03F N/A/ 4 HR337 / HR371
Bus System No.1
Station 5 X040-X04F Y040-Y04F 3 HR371
Station 3 X0A0-X0AF Y0A0-Y0AF 5 HR371
Station 4 X0B0-X0BF Y0B0-Y0BF 4 HR371
Bus System No. 2
Station 5 X0C0-X0CF Y0C0-Y0CF 3 HR371
Station 6 X0D0-X0DF Y0D0-Y0DF 2 HR371
Station 7 XOEQ-XOEF Y0E0-Y0EF 1 HR371
Station 8 X0F0-X0FF Y0F0-Y0FF 0 HR371
Station 1 X100-X10F Y100-Y10F HR371
Operation Station 1 X110-X11F Y110-Y11F HR371
System No.3
Board Station 2 X120-X12F Y120-Y12F HR371
Station 2 X130-X13F Y130-Y13F HR371
Station 3 X2A0-X2AF Y2A0-Y2AF 5 HR371
System No.4
(HR337 Station 4 X2B0-X2BF Y2B0-Y2BF 4 HR371
Star DOES NOT Station 5 X2C0-X2CF Y2C0-Y2CF 3 HR371
HAVE.)
Station 6 X2D0-X2DF Y2D0-Y2DF 2 HR371
Station 7 X2E0-X2EF Y2E0-Y2EF 1 HR371
Station 8 X2F0-X2FF Y2F0-Y2FF 0 HR371
329
330
There is the ELEMENTARY DIAGRAM LIST
on page 2 that serves as the contents in the EL£.5l:H»Afft DIAGRAM LIST
_
ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM. As an SET 3 PP32300030 16 Draw By vx, __
ChftcV.od By : MM-
ITS* jSreCIRCAUCW Approved By:
example, look at TOOL EYE (OPTION) 1 S&CtfSKS TVP8 8aT-flW250 m\&
n ••
2 1W.CHIKE lb. «!• *•I !«»•
enclosed by a red frame in the table below. 3 CNC 7YPc fcÿOT

«i *«*
«lf *
Oil ll
H I «
•
« t> (I i i
•• i
i SPIKEUS Ttips; il «« < mU.,i •,
The figures "32000340362" indicates a drawing i_5 MILL $*\m£\ &: W IP
•HU II I k
M»|!
11 *
LJ Hi
i« *I»*P
M i
i «i
'* « 1 1
4I3UI Ll
number. !7 IWK. 1 R>W Nti

j itoc % m Ux\
*ÿ*«
l\1 Ltf
ni
M I
m
l
«iÿn
•rcmn •*
‘*
[Ctot i«*ns
_
Taut
1 ti wrn t&x imr i jXT
» QXE 1151/0
Enlargement ifoyaittrt O
J«UÿJJALA2L
NCSCC.U$i vrD
IjESggjig
32000340294 *2*0*6 REMOTE 1/0 COMMON glKSKM&»«»
*3
+a
H CXC U?l «)
a earri.i<vr <sr
YiSgWmiPISl 43H4 U OXC LIST (£ÿ)
32000340303 *2*5 REMOTE 1/0 COMMON ai-giooH&ni *3<n H OX€ LrS-T IT)
JLSaSfiUJSELiJÿ- _
32000340313, *2*5 REMOTE 1/0 COMMON iqggMCHOltO
u { asflmfr&a
*3
>;
H cace LIST
M CX€ LIST Do) _
32000340323 *2*5 REMOTE I/O COMMON M W* CM
MACH?* Pgÿam Mj CM
12 aMWMWffl IRiQITMf
B 32000340330 FAN MOTOR - D &U0.a2Mi *L'L_ nc rwuETw .mu. (0
si 32000340340 SLIDEWAY LUBRICAT

J 32000340351 *1 HEAD COOLING PUMP — Tiÿr
%'J 32000340562 *2*/ TOOL EYE (OPTION)!

.53. smoimM
ii axosaefti
M awtwmt PUS
tt*QTE
I/O tiHW
cnoTF ia) OIHPQIN
M4* SUPPLY 10 D’l/6'
mam
I ti*m
?
32000340370 TOOL EYE< OPT I ON) JUUL &3&.30B&.
M &mtM!ÿKW_
SiiaL ihvtttirtHtti .w.» I«)«ni
Hft IfcYtt
3 32000340380 WORK LIGHT iW #X<lRtfr6 StlDctAY UJWIWWji
101 <?2A5R03i1t! INC W VxTCK
9 32000340391 *5 MAIN SPINDLE CHUC -•,7-vrrMfRRy no yypf-iPTtEffV
r***-
ill t-XL kYS<; CPI ICC)

) 32000340401 *1 TAIL SLEEVE/BODY jjM«a«aM». irlfX LUStfT
1 >5 &RIK SPtWLt SUCK
1 3200034041 1 *2 TURRET SOLENOID/S ir(.)g»CG4C401 «l Hit ajEENC/POW
.....
111 3SCWW-1 1 •2 TigÿgT s<uiÿrc».ycvs.>R
7 32000340420
3 1 32000340430 'Mil
PCB PC I NPUT TURRl
C-AXIS SOLENOID
US 3?ftS03lC45i3«
m 52SSjSa£45£.
J.W.
w WWML
_______ PC 1 hFUT TlHYrT
fcÿasLsgaauL,,
ACWtCIRCUII
}
331
332
A drawing number is written on the bottom- J if C 6?

* rmarma7 i J ( l ii
right corner of each drawing, as shown by a -Hf

i
gLa- rj
—
. . . ....... .
red arrow. Open a page related to the TOOL flJ •A
—
*I. ...... ifrr crm*
»J .wo
I
EYE. W < <'K
*!: A
I 891 (II rs <*
IU LU U>
ns j «. !3y> m., i rrc u:if -4ii
n;
iSnsftr
~C2
—*»~ J**-©
n
wm
ns £2 :<*&*- »«...,
ns
r ;<.* *ÿ•
•>> .nimwa.
;o
iif
}J
&MT'&
LW
VI ITU, m wi «-»
.0
J4
WTH-W*'-
ii I
__ W
-igr-
Ik* fil 1Wft.»6
rsx na icrim
;s
TISSS-
SISC
MU
Enlargement , rÿi&- -M8 M
o
LJu-J—
at
1TBT TITLE
i
1
*ou*
i
ail CsA <rT t-

i.e»
TOOL EYE (OPTION)

20
21
— --- «}..
r
- B* CiW4
2? ua >
D RWH H o 32 CO 03 30362
A
2?
arid! Fore tan Trade Law 2* .'ÿU
I
J iw.’w HA •+'t«n i / CIKHMi
*
01
A BCPEFGHIJKL JP1 onvpp P)MH
23 IC
X303 R30
02
'
21
n 1500 6<Jtf
& 'i
03
4
_ 11
10
04
TYPE:CB120100
12/10 f!f 200WV
04
MACHINE SIOE *4
05 MAIN SPINDLE
CONNECTION BOX
m KM KA5 >130*1 K401 TOOL EYE MOTOR
;
06
030213 0302M
23
to
’» anoint
TYPE E221 1-444
us r,M £2§ A, AH®I mo U. P. G. ORIENTAL
(OW/O. 9A/50H2
PLACE 12W0. &5A/G0HZ
07 5 H 5"''4T7
0362 1 4 030213
24
08 —E§ 3/\ i< PUJC
XjlOl
09 c<d - ft. » YELLOtf/GRECK
i
10
MB tQ1
NC TERM I >LAL
BOARD A3
11 [
~ IN
I XCF33 X2
i
KA3
niQ
§
w
1 78 701 TOOL EYE ARN HIGH
12 TOT. M
fs
3 1 0)6101
Y4 F
¥
704
13 TOR. K «r1 OB 109
TOOL EYE FORWARD
QlOIBICt
Y5 bl 0)630)
14 TOU.M
§ÿ I SB ins 1GB
iflf TOOL EYE REVERSE
010)610)
b ;I 036301
15
HACK! HE SIDE
16
POE API
MAIN SPINDLE NC TERMINAL
CONNECTION BOX BOARD A3
17 2L-
1O0L EYE
SENSOR X 1 54 XII R3
18 «r 1
On I.OKO 1/4W
Sff 1092 2
XI 2 3CSKIP
19 :<2- —> 1N
54Q8W.
W
£5,0X18 SKIP (TOOL EYE 1)
IN 1 SKIP CANNON
20
2L*
/ XI 3 R4
:
21
22 NOT USE 2» -O «3
23 •'»
w
24 ?. 36
1
333
APR' D BY CHK' D BY URTIN 0Y TITLE
ADD, KA5.KA4 '

ALT PIN No. 3« 2 ’06-6/10 H.H
99-3/10 II. H \MMsk~7
liVKVKI VAZM
DRWN No (Dr.Ml A) IÿV
32CD0340302
S
TOOLEYE (OPTION)
This product is subject to all the applicable Japanese Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law
*rPc I
334
1) KA3, KA4 and KA5 are relay contactors

and numeric characters "5 and 8M and ”9 KM
and 12” under the contactors indicate a 5 8 M 8 9"-YT2 *
relay terminal number connected to a 036212 036213 036214

KA5 KA4
relay.
036214 036213
"036212", "036213" and "036214" show
the area related to a function of these
relay contactors.
2) To see "036212" of KA3, for example, the

SOT TITLE
last four digits (0362) of the drawing TOOL EYE (OPTION)
number enclosed by a red frame shows
D RWN II o 32000340362
the page number that covers KA3 in its
12th line. md Fore ii gin Trade Law
M-3 sfr 5T% ag k L 5ft -t „
<
- -cv
A • A
_ _- -
A if C S> 5 y iv / J* .c i Jif*
iV « £
:1 U*
a*—
W MU
0? [{I *iu
CP—
—— —.
-Ml
*•
'£> *L_ 'Ib-tifrr~4Pm»*
Hj i raw
cc1, M- E J
& K«I3W*
LU
-£r~iZri$(r~HSs—
LU U>
®L AL.ÿ
— *»-
—
PML
\™
I SR. Sll B3C4
IKFt U2IT-MII
ilt
C/
ils
liSrar
iHE2~
tftQjii
'{M&rl
—A))..
—
& 'to¬ UUL/
JMflL...
*
r~ :<>—*
---
J5
*->ÿ lJ;
.1/
IÿT¥ S5£ y. it
fjH IR* in ‘ÿi.i «e>
•/?/v £
ftgl tf
3) The area enclosed by a blue frame that is tf iyVK-p iiL itI- >H
—
IH*. Jill
tf -MR
in the 12th line on page 0362 is the Af ;<llr: *ÿ -»*»— jnjl— XX liT BCillCX
-MI8B- 1
portion related to KA3. JS
iu»w: live
J* y*
**
j; iwrsf
u
.15 $.Las-Jg -+-~a-
l tae- 1 «
tf -%S — Stfcf t!£l Sri t-
—r
4|<L - i y~«*i
n>
t>
PI
-tf-i*
I
Silfc lÿoiMr
H
2; fts O-
3W La *» > 8fa
&
&
* VHH •i.h TTF
W> j-LS.yU
iJ I
TM;'f ;ry T >i
>» l-t|2L;ii it 1
« iimn/ ’an tit >cp< OH |
pf>r H *ÿ x1 c -m 3i ’
335
MACHi ME SIDE
336
MAIM SPINDLE
4) This section shows a motor circuit of the CONNECT! OH BOX
tool eye. MIO is a motor and BROWN, X40 1
BLACK, BLUE and YELLOW/GREEN »1 BROWN
show each color of motor wires. AX401 MIO
"X401" is a number of the connector, and

4J 2
» BLACK M
the numeric characters 1 to 4 are pin

numbers of the connector.
li A3» BLUE
X40I
© YELLOVf/GREEN
NC TERMINAL
BOARD A3
5) This section indicates a signal output and
Y3, Y4 and Y5 transfer confirmation
signals to the NC board. XCF33
Y3 17B
TOF. Id
TOF.M, TOR.M and TOU.M are names
Y4 16B
used in the ladder. 0
TOR. M
XCF33 is a name of a connector and 17B, Y5 15B

16B and 15B indicate a wiring place of the TOU. M
connector.
i
6) KA3, KA4 and KA5 are relay coils and

1M
numeric characters "1 and 16" indicate a m to
1 n TOOL EYE ARM HIGH
relay terminal number connected to a
relay. a I 036206
b
i n is
TOOL EYE FORWARD
"a/036206", "b/036206" and "a/036207" alMS206
&IOW2Q7
written under the names indicate the t 16
TOOL EYE REVERSE
areas related to a function of these relays.
a\mm
"a" indicates the place of "contact a" and o mm
"b" indicates "contact b" respectively.
7) To see "a/036206" of KA3, for example, TITLE

the last four digits (0362) of the drawing TOOL EYE (OPTION)
number enclosed by a red frame shows
the page number that covers KA3 in its D RWN N c 32000340362
06th line. arid! Faineipt Tr8ds_Law
, T? "C fife W fe tfe 51? tfa L HZ. j" r>
337
338
—IA
pJ
ti C S> £ f C J T-f i u
J*
---
II
•Of w~ ~n.
Ill
VLJH.
— —J
w*» n*
Iffc ai'J»IK-
sOJ
£V
C{'
:<l - 4«-
M-T* H lijC
.££. Ifctijl KiM*
Ut uv 1SX Ill K7VN

J $
Cii
R &W. — ->v~
rw— * IBM!
\»
I IK CJill <11
wm
«
&
i>;
'iSTBW
i
“UT.
scXb ri..
**£ÿ
»- ..... JM..
.laiVPin.
i; —
i
i: -SM rxx in cnim
il2SS
portion related to KA3. ;s
-H*
;; Btm .«. •
gjry
SM" & u
;s -a-
%
I.Ufr l.rt
«p- - -i£LZ» o mt
r i*
: i
1C
u* ('tL
«*- UXM
:s
.V
r h\:-
r16!
.—
*H > 1
14s-
j *
r/r r v v*r- I [ TTV
'
.Mi
U
U\ »l
hi,
T/- VH
>•*
•*
-A'lU, j.{
1
» i
W7 •aa ci* EBH |
p»p«*r>
,"-r r .
k>„i> VJ i,1J -x1!* !nr A
• y*
NC TERMINAL
BOARD A3
I . OK Q 1/4W
9) This section indicates a signal input and
X198 transfers a confirmation signal to rv, X198 SKIP (TOOL EYE 1)
the NC board.
1M
SKIP COMMON
339
340
m XL
r
li
] P- Electrical Circuit Diagrams
i
tv-
*
i• i
YYY
Ft
i ip
4B*Jim us
. .m..
ZL _
International Electrical Codes
Lfcu.
LJffiL..
e*
V"’,
Hil
“ti*
ife.I- Kass. ....it*
A list of the I.E.C. and

abbreviations used to
* write this manual can
Yv
\ \w i
’ÿSJJ
"3"' —© 1
_ y
Vÿ-'S
WHO *.-f- ..r“ r-ÿ-ÿ4

be located in the front
—— —— —
, SITS'* 'Xf- V
-A
liawrffA'iC- 5
’ Y
mrT , n
» '£-
section of the Electrical
r
i Yv
A„
Circuit Diagrams.
;• 3 JjP*’' Abbreviation Comparison List
s® CTW *.VJSUP.«',»»•*
lip." tir.i . , 1 1.
IBI-SHS* rew'SPi 33H
! V Vÿ6ÿ*vV» ail
i
W1 >»U*llltt-S
I ST
fi- it!!
»**•
icrÿr Mil fcT*
nm* wnx> »W fI”**
is uh :n»ki
I &
W tvÿ-awa 1 <#11
*
<*til ili ir,ftr tMT*x «u*.> ] f*l*> f i
?*-*-
M1**tl* GTi< Cÿ8 Cl o-n-.'J *i j a**. j st-ki|
4. 'St
*>*1*#i
Di J •ex - I I Lit* ilitt* Uil lilllJU ai-u
i
, Sr, to* *«o
1
u«» «4»< J’tl tit
Ct-#»-
Via !
l is* &«<«> *511 ks*u Ins-'ia tu
R.n !«ÿ HI V-*»
fej »«CT!Hrn MlfCX 14##
p
:;:.V
¥
Electrical Circuit Diagrams

te
pi
s f:-.
_ -t=j
i
itis
»**tc»r> i
<by;|'-.;;. : TTOfirj a
IJ !
Breaker Abbreviation
. . . .....
•*&mV VrtM*
f.s ;i
1 _iUKu_-i.t-.i.ÿI
'.t ;
it 1* i >.' a ww«
:
&$v
1
i --.-•v-- <•"'ÿ
ill-;
-i
>- J
I
—— — u ;t
- - ----. . . —
«
i ,)ÿ IT ‘L-_j- JTI 'i>t L_ ; j jrmÿ j ®L w*\«

i.xfc»rwt'.
1 ! r ».
R¥: - 1pJW*c
T3ff ITflM
--
«•
n , V’ L...~ lk.
v 1>~*mu
i r.Entire area dotted , ; Mi
_
1
J
j
&
T* HiiJjSuwat
+TU. 1*1 ft
:-p ,:T>4 - -4j--

v-<
I /mv*f -au.
'
.,i*Jaoaant;
i
i
is optional I
i;*j
! !?<* ; Irfni— 1
-
-JWSH ji
'
•4-11 <t)W
--
9
M|
Is !n
1*
It|
I
‘
y,..4....Q,
1ÿ1* BL
«* M
J
I
i
j JT3BS-+-
Vt
S'
-
w
-
uacSi
HI
fc
’ÿ
4 JS.-v
*»
“JS—. Vr* im. ‘j

,
•
•
m
«* n
**>*'*',
mm <•
a
ssw.
< 'Jrl-r
KUtft 11 *
y;
31
j TV
ftt f
I
t" J
l1
7
a -JSA,
wi
j “V wi
Ti*|.
r war
r.\ Yamazaki Mazak Europe
tf. w:» will not apply to U.S.
ic r‘1
i*i Metric "Wire Size& Color n rm-M, m-c

m
SI
341
342
IS 7
-Iv
m
ute,
I
i «&*.
I
fe
53*2ÿ3*
Sfe
fe-.<
V, •The 60 Hz machines manufactured in the U.S. are
r designed for 230V + 10% (thus a I'ange of 207~253VAC).
$ÿ
fel; •The 253VAC upper limit is to be considered an important
V Ui ** '
factor and every effort to avoid exceeding this limit should

m be made. The best continuos voltage range for machine
mi operation is 208~230VAC.
l Ifcs
pr •Normal acceleration & deceleration of spindles generate
m, 3.5% ~ 7.0% regenerative line voltage.
i
w* •When using a transformer, the 210VAC secondary is the

it appropriate target for machine operation, selecting a supply
voltage on the low range allows for positive variances without
:i adversely affecting the machine.
t; J |
m 1
I &# •
;
» •When a problem develops on a machine, more than
likely the problem will be on the hardwired side,
He •Before assuming that the problem is definitely on the

machine side, trace the problem back to the PLC input
| or output.
ll
•After identifying PLC address, view the state of the
A" address on the Diagnosis Monitor Screen.
I p*-
343
344
tfe
’'Tii
How to locate the PLC address.
Jr- Example: The coolant pump motor is not turning on*
Step 1* With the Elementary Diagram List search for the

t m drawing numbers with the (4 series) included. Once
the 4 series is located, read through the title column
for a related item and then view the drawing.
Examples:
|146|35400840220,0|AUX. MOTORS ~
8
|35400840550,0|POWER PANEL CONTACTORS

167
1
|222|35400841140,0|AC-PCBPC OUTPUT RELAY

1
| Electrical Circuit Diagrams

x -r
- V ' ”1
1
-*
W SJ£~
I ,H
*m<w* *am s*
4 Series, Page 22, Additional Page

l
B
•i seen
r i
I .. I
if
{ — y-
y
SÿT
"j
]* I
mm !
i This drawing
has the coolant
!v:
:
I i'yH
y
,
j
”L,<•
“ A:
Xvjm,
tfÿf
I
...
j**
=-
»*
1
» ssraw
*
i
ij
pumps 3 phase
motor.
f
r Now for step 2
P *h£ locate the coil
......
.....
n- ~ T r
h
H that will engage
c the contactor.
I
!ÿ:*''*fc;S:.:E532lB3iiii5S5B?a3
y
p
.-
- --—- % ,.
«s.**£
w "ÿ
'—jmgml j-
345
346
1
M&'m
8
*'•
IS” Electrical Circuit Diagrams
fife: |
H 5.%-.
— V; USS* mrnm *m i* 3.9ms1 ft

I mm#!*. t. #» *• S
4 Series, Page 22, Additional Page §

",j - w&m -au.
- Thermal Relay i: PM#
1- f1 l*U| , Wire#
ii \~T
V1.W~- .....
.....
i
«V»
ESH333jB jrtj
i ,W,«|A! !**ÿ»
** gtisg
iQDl
I It
P 2*
T
_ FU
UIS
?** sura •SSO
4- 15
*15
—
3 rn .. » <4.tL..
221 , s;
i>*
I
ijE!l *
;
-—-V- MIS
3- * cosLmt PUMP Hero?
Contactor Pin #
2$ i
i.
OBUi
i 5hvf—
26 /r MÿmaiwasBit
,c
IS+m ?**
l\
VgLLCW:/tiHfEM
;
711 ivFTTT
I'I *
Tutu
rt!*PMH
[:r:::aTtA
|
&
i*k
La-
f
!/; ;
R* ! 2 3
13ISSE ISÿSEsÿri.
,
&2&JLLJJ Itazasd
ki
SM; T7v
B
y
| Electrical Circuit Diagrams
*
'.••ÿ' ' -. v- -~-'v ~

<
'
p 2
aft«8 **€» n»€t
This drawing
ftfti I I
1
has the coolant
....
4 « F11
n MYIJRRJ.IC
ry*e wjrw
iift- * >4
il 6
AJBUWI
211 | pumps motor
5 wct« rtlJ Fit t*lj
m m**" starter coil.
M -II W
—
B
•> lit
- 4 \
'§1
- -•.
U X .<l!L S-1
•511
Me
MI mi !
I
_
COCLANT P'X’ K)TC«
for step 3 -S
i 12 U 214
locate the relay
0b, u
l M coil that will
-ft r.marm
m IS
'drt)\’ntri~
2si
hft—M
IS
engage the relay
1 l?
it
i*
Hi
m\\
contact.
l Li I Series, Page 55, Additional Page 0

ft- '
347
348
r""""
Ip
i

&
,Imm
v
Wil i
m TJTIFT# i
Tn7v I
!i 2 11 iTn 1
i s n
rt TTTTK 4 >* FI
:
11 wrtjRxa.li 'OR
5
AJMBWT*!
Pin#
10 X5J1 FI 3 mi
WCH
«.
*4ÿ6
tt m IT W HDTOR
r”i - *
—
ll
feV;
IA I--* t
(CIM/Ml
IS *: m
i J
Cross Reference _ Wii e#
%
To Coil Location K j H i T I CHIP CCW
H
Connector# TOW
n*
Cross Reference To
F jTTT
Normally Closed Contacts
ft 17
ITEISIffla?
I H i tor"
«TM”
]*
lb:i
f;| Series, Page 55, Additional Page 0
. ; *1
SB
SVi
K'. j' lÿyv*'
m
m:
i
# ftP
it
?0
31
22
2!
2*
sHILH
aum, ""w
£hr@— Cf“-
dOJSu tt*ui
TJ:
——
V*E*
"'*
moi
*
j
H<5
Vifcn
H<5-
umx%
--
MW>
CHXX CPEH
}—W
CHUCX ac*£
1I*XI
» fi
This drawing
has the coolant
pumps PLC
output address.
25 C3U J 1 1 50**1 K.SKJ
734 734 fSKM"!9%*)
26
Jfc-0 -L2»
<fii S’ &JMr
27 cw W57
tan SLHre Now for step 4
'a a-® -“»
«-* YCfe
L«
n locate the PLC
•cojj-.i «:WAI rx*o?
tail SLCEvt ft£vt*S£
m Jl
?«o
%
)V.
vtfe
H4—
address on the
S?
Shown S : 5! Diagnosis Monitor

—
KQJJW i/lPD*
W C COLON T
-4
NexM .;
35
2V-@ <fÿ *|'
M-a
tacu/ii
I
I
Screen.
i
'
’w': ‘
V ' 'ÿ
'ÿ»*.' ”'.vi «•i'.’S,**iv I
Senes, Page 114, Additional Page 0
•
I
m
1 1V
349
350
IP
#
<6?
£g
•ÿ•-•--v-
mmmmimmwm
......
-v
m rnmmmm
MB
l*
/M. mrsi *•% PPCN *mxx
DUO. (Pf*
2D
51
Ml X
ITTSril
J
a! 4} i DU rr
|% jcj—
LLJ »»ye»
CMJCK aosf
r CIMMUI
£
>i«*
I
gTlniiÿx-
K FTW.I Cross Reference To
$1Vi mull
Normally Open Contacts H
2T
25
«*w *i
•J
*XW
L 3U*lt W-WO pm
:
/ fvÿMl i.JTTBTS
55
s
«CCU $1 I XCH44 L
741 7*i COOLANT
u Y?T
cÿ-
YOi
CH-K
V «ÿ
rawsi i
FuÿT
rJ 35
HB Wire #
ft
Li Mg [y
/ X >-A ; '$£ V v
< . > , i#
HIM I 4.l:A»i Vi. L sJlllMMK
I Ml EmTTmi
Strips, Page 114, Additional Page 0
|L *»
|l|
351
This is a newer example of the Electric Circuit Diagrams
352
? I 4 5 h. 2 3 m
LIfC
l (40040/23)
A
2 6 Li SL2 6L3
KMLG FRIO >110
£L1 6.0A LLLL
3 Q? 7/' H \ HYDRAULIC RUHR A
Vli PC MOTOR 2.2KV
4 61.3
A
Vli V3V 200V 50Hz 7.6A
<40300/12) 60Hz 6.8A
5 / \
Z10
6 B
XT2 HZ5
35 C DOLING FAN
7 zL MOTOR
—oc
+ÿ
% i
*
*
/ 100 V 60Hz 0,15 A
B
9
ft PI
A c
10 4PC T JJ POWER PANEL
c/0 UNTT
li 1M 15
X1030 KM10
HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
YQ1
—
Hrn.H
o N N
B19y
2300 7 A 1 VEl
a 300 S42
\ \
FRiO
M3 AinA2
fee MOTOR STARTER
13
<403CG/12> 40300/03 . I!
4-0 300/12
14 16
X1030
16
15 S \
16 E
17
2L+ REF
19 * (4D330/11)
19 FRIO c
1349 REF
98 9? * (40370/05)
20 JH.
21 NACHM mz
ppi
cc TJJ BASE I/O LIMIT
G
SPI
23
1500
;<526 x'98 X55 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE
»“*• //A 9 A19y.: XII
£4 \\ ?/
HYDPS DOWN
2L+
25 I26 H
2b
27
£8
£9
30
31
32 J
33
34
TITLE should say
35
Hydraulic System k
A CHK-'L BY DRWN BY TITLE

A V f /7 10' 27-98 10-27' 9B HEAD LUBE PUMP
A MET DR
A CfWilD OVERLOAD HEATER SCTTCHG FHCM 9*70 60A 2/32/99 J &
YNV&m MAZAK CORPQPfflOH M.HDTTA J, BRYANT
DRVH M3 557K01403002
& CHAM5ED rm KCTCP FROM 2SOVAC TU JQOVftC 1/23/99 JS
This product is subject to all applicable export control laws and regulations by Japanese Governnent
353
354
355
356
Its important to understand the
difference between how Electrical
Ladder and PLC Ladder function.
Electrical Ladder it based on
physical closing and opening of
contacts. PLC Ladder is based on
logical status of contacts. Instead of
close or open, PLC contacts are 1
or 0.
357
358
To better understand PLC Ladder

we need to review a few basic
electronic logic circuits.
•Digital signals have only two values,
•Ml" and “0",
•“High" and “Low", or
•“On" and “Off", or
•“True" and “False".
High
On
Off Low
359
Logic: Switches in Series (AND)
360
SI S2 Lit
•The
•The
SI S2
* 0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
bulb will light only under certain conditions: what?
bulb will turn on only when switches SI AND S2

are closed, for all other combinations the bulb is off.
1
Logic: Switches in Parallel (OR)
/
SI
6 SI
0
0
1
S2
0
1
0
Lit
0
1
1
1 1 1
/
S2
•The bulb will light under certain conditions: what?
• The bulb will turn on when switches SI OR S2 are
closed, for all other combinations the bulb is off.
361
Logic: Opposites! (NOT)
362
S Lit
S
0 1
1 0
• The bulb will light under certain conditions: what?

•The bulb will turn on when switch S is OFF, and turn
off when switch S is ON.
• This circuit is for illustration only!
• If this was a real circuit, what would happen to the battery
when switch 5 was dosed?
Logic Gates} AND
mm
mm s»;'
I
n>; bacasmi I
mm \ ' ' ' :

:r
y-'
f
m 'msemSBm i
.
: Aii 11 ; B |
I
Q ,•
I
wmmmm m
m immm
Two-IiFrmn+ Am&rte
fa si o
m NtaS
Pill .
s:-<:
;r
I i
IIRHS&I
mm|i
- H
The output of an AND gate is 1 only when all inputs are 1.
Only when Input A /\N0 Input B are 1. the output is 1.
363
Logic Sates: OR
364
W'l ......
OR
[I
Truth Table
A B Q
0 0 0
Two -Input OR Sate 0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
The output of an OR gate is 1 when any input is 1.
When Input OR Input

A B is 1, the output is 1.
Logic Gates: NOT
!
fm NOT
Truth Table
r A Q
o l
NOT Sate 1 0
Note that NOTgates have only one input.
The output of a NOT gate is the opposite of the input.

When Input is 0, Athe output is 1.
When Input A is 1, the output is 0
365
Summary of Logic Sates and Truth Tables
366
•Logic gates may have one or more inputs.
AND Gate OR Gate NOT Gate

A B Q A B Q A Q
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0
1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 isi
m88H
Basic PL Contacts
C
In PLC Ladder the

NO contact is
representing the
value of 1 .
In PLC Ladder the

NC contact is
representing the
value of 0.
367
Basic PL Contacts
C
368
If this NO contact
which represents a
logic 1 is not
highlighted then its not
true and must be a 0.
If this NO contact
which represents a
logic 1 is highlighted
then its true and must
be a 1 .
Basic PL Contacts
C
If this NC contact
which represents a
logic 0 is not
highlighted then its not
true and must be a 1 .
If this NC contact
which represents a
IV logic 0 is highlighted
mm then its true and must
be a 0.
369
Electrical Ladder vs PL Lodder (AND)
370
51 S2
II—(
3 )
XI X2 yi
Lets compare a electrical circuit to an PLC circuit.

Electrical Ladder vs PL Ladder MNC))
SI
Jli
XI
/
S2
ii—(
X2
* )
yi
S1 physically closes and X1 highlights to show you

that the logic 1 is True. PLC contacts won’t change
from NO to NC on the PLC monitor because they
are logical not physical.
371
Electrical Ladder vs PL Ladder MND)
372
_ SI
II
II
S2
XI X2 yi
Now S1 and S2 are physically closed and X1 and

X2 are both highlighted to show you that the logic 1
is True for both. Both outputs will now be 1 .
List of Commonly Used Abbreviations for Mazatrol PLC Devices
PRS = Proximity Switch *(xxx) = *denotes active low

SS = Select Switch
RS = Reed Switch
SW = Switch
PB = Push Button
.M = Machine Side
PS = Pressure Switch
LS = Limit Switch
CD = Command
INT = Interlock
.B = Button (typically on operation panel)
.N = Signal to or from the NC
,L = Lamp (indicator lamps on operation panel)
.P = Parameter related
CL = Clamped or Closed
UCL = Unclamped
OP = Open
EXT = Extend
RET = Retract S = Solenoid
ST - Start T = Timer
373
FIN = Finish R = Relay

374
Assume that Alarm 250: SPINDLE START MISOPERATION has occurred. The following explains a
procedure to investigate a cause of the alarm using the ladder circuit.
(The INTEGREX series is used here as an example and the trace procedure for other models is basically the
same.) P250 Ml 209
0
HI {TOR R7000 H2000 R700o}
Ml 209
6 {WAND R7000 HDFFF R7000}
P251 M200
11 {iNC R2130}
F252 M200 M200
15 4
M200
Hf {PLS Ml 2 28}
Ml 2 28 XI11
21
HMf {SET M5003}
XI11
{RST M5003}
M200
28 {WOR R7000 HI R7000}
M200 XI 56 K4
{MOV Y310 }
33
R7000= 641 *
R2130= -14887
HFFFF
JW< III
jHeiaory ( 10775 / 3Z718 Step) Mode JMONITOR )
II RUN/
375
READ HI >00 L STOP .. END

When the MONIT OR menu key above is pressed, the following screen will be displayed
Next , Press the -< >- Menu Key
376
P 2 50 Ml 209
0
HI [TOR R7000 H2000 R7000}
Ml 209
6 {WAM) R7000 HDFFF R7000}
P251 M200
11 [INC R2130}
P 2 52 M200 M200
15 i
M200
Hf [PLS Ml 2 28}
Ml 2 28 XI11
21
HI-iHf [SET M5003}
XI11
[RST M5003}
M200
28 [TOR R7000 HI R7000}
M200 XI 56 K4
[MOV Y310 }
33
R7000= 641 *
R2130= 23891
HFFFF
Memory < 1077S / 32718 St-ep) Mode

'
f
HI- HP— HH I jyy
Ti \ H >- >[ Y- TRIGGER RE0IST. HEX 8
Enter F50 using the numeric keypad, so the F50 ladder circuit will be displayed on the screen.
T4S M3433 M3110 F50

1ST92 4
F50 is “ON”. F50 was turned 113430 M3454
On by: -1 \
1. T45 M3417 F9S
2. M3430 -1 \
3. M3417
There is no reason to look for the (3)

three signals. Instead , you should
—
F97
Ml 50 3 M2Q2
HI-
IH
M3111
H
Ml 50 4
focus on why M3433 is a “0” it KEY SIGNALS
should be a “1”. “Reset will get rid Ml 9 M3 1 10 (S-MODE) Spindle Mode
of the alarm but, it will reappear as
soon as you try to start the spindle
again. M3433 must be brought to
__
HI-
MIS
|j
M3433 (ENBST) Spindle Start Enable
T45 (SJOG.T) Spindle Jog Timer
Ml?
a “1” before you can run the spindle. M3430 (SPST) Spindle Start
RESET PB
Ml 6 M3417 (SPRNM) Spindle Run Memory
“
I \— Nl/
M3454 (ENBRUN) Spindle Run Enable
--
F50 X140
F50 II
Jriemory ( Mode jttOHITOR |
—
1077 S / 32718 Step )
377
II Vt— HH 4F j -[ ]- TRIGGER REGIST.

|
HEX
Enter M3433 using the numeric keypad, so the M3433 ladder circuit will be displayed on the screen.
378
M3501 M4053 Y4E0 M5135 M5133 M3432 M3705 M3433

16768
Hlil lil III < >
M5128 M2601 M5326
Hf-Hl
M6948
HI
(Memory <
j| If
I MISS
10 7 7 S /
__ I IS
32718 Step )
I
11 I 1
Mode
i
...
(HOKITGI*. t >- M3433
HL
:
I
Enter M3501 using the numeric keypad, so the M3501 ladder circuit will be displayed on the screen.
X444 X445 M3501

5725
M5375 M3498 M3498
-< T80 D40
>
X444 is "PC input signal from

< >
TOOL EYE forward end
confirmation sensor" and X445 is
"PC input signal from TOOL EYE
reverse end confirmation sensor".
M3501 has a "function to rotate the
spindle" that is enabled only when
the X445 is on. The alarm occurred
because X445 was not on.
If the TOOL EYE is retracted, the
TOOL EYE reverse confirmation
sensor must be malfunctioning.
ISO = 20 D40 20
rso = o
M3501
-
[Memory! {ttOHITOR EÿC
— —— ——
1077S / 32718 Step; Mode
mmm
379
jfl. i j| i i, j-f i I JSSE5 C ] TRIGGER REGIST. HEX

380
DIAGNOSIS (MAKER) - LADDER MONITOR Display
No. item Unit Data description

1 Exit This key is used to exit the ladder display,
2 Previous Th is key is used to return to the previous menu on the display,
3 StepNo. This key is used to search by Iad5erstep numbers?"
4 Dev. No. This key is used to search nocvrestricted by device number.
5 -I !- This key is used to search normally' open contacts,
6
7
- -
/
-< >-
This key is used to search normally closed contacts.
This key is used to search for coils,
8 A t This key is used to search for instructions.
9 Dec This key is used to change the displayed data to decirraL
__ ___ __
10 Hex This key is used to change the displayed data to hexadecimal
11
12
Trigger
Regist.
changes state. _
This key is used to freeze the screen when a monitored device
This key is used to display a device status of either ON or OFF at
the bottom of the screen.
13 Run/Stop This key is used to RUN or STOP the PLC.
14 NC<-IC This key is used to transfer date from IC-Card to NC.
15 NC->IC This key is used to transfer data from NC to IC-Card.
16 NC<-HD This key Is used to transfer data from Hard Drive to NC,
17
18
19
NO>HD
ROMCOPY
PLCLANG
RAM. _ _____
____
__
This key is used to transfer data from NC to Hard Drive
This key is used to transfer dab between FLASH ROW and
This key is used to transfer data between FLASH ROW and

LANGUAGE FILE
Instruction Function
WAND ’AND’ Instruction (16 Bits)
DAND •AND* Instruction (32 Bits)
WOR ’OR’ Instruction (16 Bits)
DOR ‘DOR* instruction (32 Bits)
MOV ’MOVE* instruction (16 Bits)
DMOV "MOVE* Instruction (32 Bits)
FMOV •FORCE MOVE1 Instruction
BMOV •BIT MOVE" Instruction
SET "ADDRESS SET Instruction
RST "ADDRESS RESET Instruction
(Resets a noted address that has been set)
>,< "COMPARE" Instruction (168Ey
D>,CK "COMPARE" instruction (32 Bits)
a "EQUAL TO" Instruction (16 Bits)
D= "EQUAL TO" instruction (32 Bits)
] BCD "BINARY TO BCD" Conversion
BIN ‘BCD TO BINARY* Conversion
E + "BINARY ADDITION* Instruction
‘BINARY SUBTRACTION" Instruction
L t DIVISION’ instruction
'•#
"BINARY MULTIPLICATION’ Instruction
PLS ’PULSE ON" Instruction (Each Scan)
PLF "PULSE OPPHnstrudion (Each Scan)
i CALL "SUB-PROGRAM CALL’ Instruction
CJ "CONDITIONAL JUMP" Instruction
RET ’RETURN* To Main Sequence Proyam
INC "INCREMENT ADD 1 instruction
DEC "DECREMENT Subtract 1 instruction
XCH ‘EXCHANGE Data Instrudion
BIT "BIT ON* Instruction
Bll "BIT OFF’ Instruction
WXOR "OR* Exclusive Instruction (16 Bis)
SFL "SHIFT LEFT By Binary of "K" value
SFR "SHIFT RIGHT By Binary of "K" value
H- "HEX" Value
K "CONSTANT
381
382
P250
0
H1209
G; TiaOR R7000 H2000 R700ol
M1209
CBÿ
PZ51 *
H200
[MAUD R7000 HDFFF R700o}
PZS2
t {iNC R2130}
H200 H200
IS
t A
M2 00
[f'LS H122GJ-
H1228 Xlll
E;[SET
21Hhr4f H500ÿ-
Xlll 4
f RST HS003J
H200
f [MOR R7000 HI R7000}

H200 X156 6
n
K4
¥ -[HOV HFypy Y3io
R7000= 641 R2 130= 22639
1 WOR R7000 = DECIMAL 641,HEX 0281 or BINARY 0000 0010 1000 0001
When WOR with HEX 2000 BINARY 0010 0000 0000 0000
The result will be HEX 2281 BINARY 0010 0010 1000 0001
The result of the WOR INSTRUCTION is now stored in R7000.
2 WAND R7000 = DECIMAL 641, HEX 0281 or BINARY 0000 0010 1000 0001
When WAND with HEX DFFF BINARY 1101 1111 1111 1111
The result will be HEX 0281 BINARY 0000 0010 1000 0001
The result of the WAND INSTRUCTION is now stored in R7000.
3 SET The contacts of M5003 will now be true.
4 RST The contacts of M50O3 will now be false.
5 HEX VALUE The HEX VALUE to be used in the instruction.
6 CONSTANT If the K is to the outside of the instruction, it states a limited amount of
BITs to use.
If the K is to the inside of the instruction, it states a decimal value to use.
Constant BIT values
K1 =4 BITS K2 = 8 BITS K3 = 12 BITS K4 = 16 BITS
K5 = 20 BITS K6 = 24 BITS K7 = 28 BITS K\
= 32 BITS
383
M200 1
S498
P28
t R2170 K10 D170 }
M454 2
6579
U 7 D23 K2 D24 }
3 D23 D25 }
H470
6621 {= KO D29 }—IF D25 D29 }
6869 {>• H5 D89 HO D89 } -[CALL P89 }

4 5
R2170 = 2000 D170 = 20000 D23 = 22 D24 = 0 D2S = O
1 * BINARY MULTIPLICATION
R2170 = DECIMAL (2000) MULTIPLICED by CONSTANT 10
The result will be (20000) and stored in D 1 70.
1
2 / BINARY DIVISION
D23 = DECIMAL (22) DIVIDED by CONSTANT (2)
The result will be (if) and stored in D24.
~~
3 EQUAL TO
If D29 EQUALS CONSTANT 0, then instruction is true.
4 > GREATER THAN
If HEX 5 is GREATER THAN the data in D89, then the instruction is
true.
5 < LESS THAN
If HEX 0 is LESS THAN the data in D89, then the instruction is true.
384
1734
X230
—Ih
H23S
M
H230
dk{HOV R20 D617 }
Pll }
[CALL P16 }
2
H230
R20 K900 D618 }
[CALL P12 }
[CALL P19 }
H200
3
5040
t + D23 K1 D7S }
= o £>617 = 0 D618 = O £>23 = 22 D7S = 23
MOV MOVE
Move the data from R20 to D617.
BINARY SUBTRACTION
Subtract the CONSTANT (900) from the data in R20 (0).
The result will be (0) and stored in D618.
+ -MNARYkDDlTlON
! ADD the CONSTANT (1) to the data in D23 (22).
The result will be (23) and stored in D75.
385
H12Z8 Xlll
\hr~M- {sBT HEOOÿ-

Xlll
t {RST MS003}
MZOO
262
t {HOV R1937 D80 }
1
SFR D80 K8 }
H491 H512 2
6853
u
H480
{ 1-[{BIT R2109 K6 J
4
XCH R1999 R1994]-
HH RZ109 K6 } {HOV HI D89 }

3
R1937= O D80 = 0 RZ109= 0 R1999= 3 R1994= 0
1 SFR SHIFT RIGHT

The 16 BIT BINARY value in D80 will shift 8 places to the right, filling
the vacant places with 0’s.
Example: If D80 = 24755 or Binary 0110 0000 1011 0011 _
0000 0000 0110 0000 1011
2 BII BIT INVERSE (OFF)
The instruction is true when R2109 BIT 6 is 0.
3 BIT Will be
BIT ON
Deleted
The instruction is true when R2109 BIT 6 is 1.
4 XCH EXCHANGE
The value in R1999 (3) and R1994 (0) will exchange.
The result being R1999 (0) and R1994 (3).
386
1513
H203
t
MZ7S
Clk[DHC D4 {
M2014 M540 2
3769
\br*r R199?}
H201S
—I H
3774
{= K13
R1997J {HOV KO R1997J-
XI 50 X109 3
8404
Ih-H
M5003 nsoo3
PLF M744 }
J-HH
8424 {BIT R7005 K6 ]ÿ [PLS H378 }
D4 =3 R1997= 1 R7 0 0 5 = 640
DEC DECREMENT (SUBTRACT 1)

i
Subtract (1) from the data in D4 (3).
The result will be D4 = (2).
INC INCREMENT (ADD 1)
Add (1) to the data in R1997 (1).
The result will be R 1997 = (2).
3 PLF PULSE OFF
Address M744 will be OFF for one scan of the PLC.
4 PLS PULSE ON
Address M378 will be ON for one scan of the PLC
387
MZOO XI 56 K4
33
JHOV HFFFF Y310 }
3433
X23C
II
G\[BCD R44 D93 }
{/ R44 K5 D94 }
H594
4 KO D95 }
2
< >
H1199
4887
-[FMOV KO R1S8 K4 }
H229
if [FHOV KO DS4 K20 }

H378
8481
w [BHOU R2782 D1006 K14 }
R44 = 0 D93 = 0 D94 = 0 D9S = 0 R1S8 = 0
1 BCD BINARY TO BCD

The BINARY DATA in R44 will be changed to BINARY CODED
DECIMAL and moved to D93.
Example: If R44 = 1 3 5 or BINARY 0000 0000 1000 0111
The BCD stored in D93 would = 0000 0001 0011 0101
2 FMOV FORCED MOVE
BATCH TRANSFER OF MULTIPLE 16 BIT DATA BLOCKS.
A (0) will be moved into R158 ~ R161.
3 BMOV BIT MOVE
16 BIT DATA BLOCK TRANSFER
The first 14 BITS beginning with BIT 0 from R2782 will be moved to
D1006.
388
1
220{BIT R414 K1S J| [CALL PI }
H200
PI
t
XI 5B
4939
-\\ iPLS M852 }
2
4957 RET }
H200
5340
PXO
t P10 }
H200
5523
f {DHOV HI D100 }
5653 ]ÿ
R414 = 22672 D100 = 1
I 1 CALL SUB -PROGRAM CALL,

Call SUB-PROGRAM PI
2 RET REtURU TO MAIO-PROGRTM
RETURN back to the LdcRr sequence where sub-program was called
389
390
Matrix Ladder Troubleshooting
Introduction
Troubleshooting with the Matrix Ladder software takes a bit more effort
than using the previous control’s ladder tools. However the advantage of
having comments displayed while viewing ladder symbols will make up for
the added keystrokes.
First, you must load the ladder into the on-board area. Follow the
instructions, Matrix Ladder Monitor - Appendix A
Simple troubleshooting.
Once the ladder monitor is displayed along with comments, the next step
is to do a search for the contact or coil that is causing the problem. In most
cases it is to search for the alarm generated on the screen. See the ladder’s
element or comment list for the most complete listing of alarms.
An example is alarm 217.
Alarms 200 to 399 which are generated by the machine itself, simply
subtract 200 and do a search. In this example, this would be FI 7.
Now, the Matrix deviates from the M640/Mpro.
Alarms 1200 to 1399 are searched by subtracting 1000.
Example:Alarm 1208 is searched by F208.
Alarms 200 to 399 on Head 2 of a multiplex will add 200.
Example: Alarm 250 on Head 2 will be searched by F450.
Alarms 1200 to 1399 on Head 2 of a multiplex will R
Su 6 7 ftcT
Example: Alarm/301 will be alann searched by F701 .
Alarms 200 to 399 on Robot of multiplex will need addffifrfl. LJO0
Example: Alarm 202 on the GL will be searched by F602.
Assuming that you now have the ladder displayed with comments, press
the left menu key till you see the menu key Monitor
Pressing Monitor, you will see contacts highlighted in blue when on.
If there isn’t anything highlighted, ensure that the top display doesn’t say
monitor stop. If it does, select the Start/Stop to toggle it on.
Monitor
Another display at the top to pay attention to is the ladder file that it being
viewed. When searching for a contact or coil, the current ladder will be
searched. At the end of the ladder, it will state:
391
PLC Onboard m
The find target could not be: found. Find another program.
B NO
Enter yes, and will to another ladder file within the M01 area. Remember
there are multiple ladder files.
Which Ladder file Pic Run
Being viewed Or Stopped
T
Til
X Monitor Mode
«** »*« XMC
?1* Or -a***?* i
T •
l£*t
Monitor Stop
1385
{ urn
*1/08 mt S3 mi
??*;
if!
LnJ
r
:E I s ;
II?
CI-iSÿCE
MDNlTm
i€Dto:
IF!
Searching for a contact or coil.
1 ) If yourf screen looks similar to the one above, press the left menu key
till you see FIND
REPLACE
2) After selecting this menu key will allow you to select

FIND
CONTACT
OR COIL
392
3) Enter in FI 7 for alarm 217. and it will stop at the first contact or coil
of FI 7 it finds.
4) Pressing the TARGET menu key will toggle between contact and coil.
28775 -Th H3h- N971B

-tf- k F17
OM.T
irf
X7 M9720
-1 h-
INTE 0
Itl H TARGET PROGRAM
m 3 )MAIN374 3
F17ÿ H8010 N6011
TARGET
ih:;M RE M s' I |CONTACT

RIP
28787 HV JT432ÿ J<9718ÿ FIND W. F18 D
| M01
DEVICE TARGET $10 FIND : TARGET

PROGRAM
PROGRAM
CHANGE
Example above shows the search for F17 and the target selected for coil.
When you are finished searching, then keep pressing the left menu key until
Aili '»
COPYRIGHT© 2004
.,
__
display shows the copyright screen. Select END and will exit.
You will probably see the following menu display. Ignore its warning and
say YES to exit.
-
Mi »V”'
EH
There is date not preserved efter it edits
d in the onboard edit area. The content o
the edit is lost when ending as it Is.
•i
NO
—I L RIGHTS RESERVED
1 | MO!
YES NO
393
Appendix-A Matrix Ladder Monitor
1) Press DIAGNOS.
2) Press VERSION.
3) Press LADDER
MONITOR
4 ) Select NC
FILE
5) Press OPEN.
A) Display will say "Reading from Pic"
7) Press OK.
8) Press <LEFT MENU< key twice to see LADDER in black now.
9) Select MONITOR and display will actual values.
STOP
MONITOR
TOOLS
B) Select COMMENT
DISPLAY
Still No comment?
screen .
B) Select ENVIRON .
SETTING
C) Select NC FILE
D) SETTING
E)Click on the STORAGE PATH Box so it is highlighted

FILE
I) Repeat steps 5 through 11 to see the ladder with
comments .
394
Matrix Ladder Save Procedure.
Ensure both ladder and comments are saved.
1) Press DIAGNOS.
2) Press VERSION. Select >RIGHT MENU> key and enter 1131 and
press Input.
3) Press LADDER
MONITOR
4 ) Select NC
FILE
5 ) Press OPEN .
A)Display will say “Reading from Pic”
7 ) Press OK.
8) Press CLEFT MENUC key twice to see LADDER in black now.
9) Select MONITOR and display will actual values .
STOP
MONITOR
_ TOOLS
B) Select COMMENT
DISPLAY
Still No comment?
screen .
B) Select ENVIRON .
SETTING
C) Select NC FILE
D) SETTING
E)Click on the STORAGE PATH Box so it is highlighted

FILE
Repeat steps 5 through 10 to see the ladder with comments.
395
12) Ifladder and comments are shown, go to next step to
save ladder and comment file.
13) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see the Copyright screen, the
LADDER must be shown as solid black.
14) Press NC
FILE
15) Press OPEN

16) Press OPEN again.
17) Select OK.
18) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see Copyright screen again.
19) Select I EXTERNAL
FILE
20) Press SAVE

PROJECT
21) Press EXTERNAL

SAVE
22) If a USB jumpdrive is inserted, then make sure that

the Drive/Path is set correctly to the drive.
23) Select PROJECT

NAME
24) Enter in an appropriate filename, normally ladder

version .
25) Press SAVE.
26) Select OK.

The ladder is now saved to the USB Jumpdrive.
Note: The LPC file is not saved with the ladder. It must be
copied from the c:\m6y ymw\mplc or tplc folder.
27) Save the * . lpc and *.alm and *.bmp files from the
c:\m6y_ymw\mplc or tplc folders using Windows Explorer.
Note: Note: When the project ladder is saved , it will be a

folder that includes sub-folders containing the ladder and
comments . The lathe, e-machine, and mill's file structure
are different.
Following example shows for Integrex Mark IV.
396
S~€3 373MX11B &>«*! Name >
__ I Size | Type _!
j B-Q Resource
! •l__J
HM SV'fe
LJ U Resource
&)Gppw.gpj 1 KB
File Folder
GX Developer Project
! JC*U~
B-y Pou
Others 373MX11B
_ Project.inf
3 KB
1 KB
GX Developer Project
Setup Information
l_J Body
Select an item to view its description. ProjectDB.mdb 78 KB Microsoft Access Da. . .
The Gppw . * , Pro ject . inf , and ProjectDB.mdb are structure

files for pic. Do not change/remove any of these from the
project's ladder filename.
Under Resource folder is additional folders, Others, Pou,

and the file param.wpa. Do not change/al ter/remove any.
I I ‘JOII1C
[_] Others
,*7.7*
L-JPOU
Resource 11 param.wpa
Name Size j Type

LT:N--- j wwanwifllt if] 373MX1 lB.wcd 317 KB WCD File
fe-
Others
The Others folder contains the comments for the ladder

which is used for ladder display.
Under the Pou folder is a folder called Body which contains

the actual ladder file .
V Name / bize Type

Li LIWIWIJ !*] 373MX1A8. wpg 207 KB WPG File
Body
As stated earlier, E-machine and Mills file/folder

structure may be different for the pic ladder.
397
398
Matrix Pic Ladder Update Procedure R4 .
Added saving of ladder to hard drive c:\ladder(step 1 and 13 revised(R4))
1) Backup the existing ladder if not done already and copy

in the new ladder from portable device, probably USB
drive to C : \Ladder (R4 ) . This ensures that the ladder
will be backed up properly in future using the backup
softwares .
Note: Power off and on between backup of ladder so that

the Ladder Onboard Sram doesn't have existing ladder in
it .
First part will be to load into the Ladder-F (M01 area) ,
2ndpart is to load into Ladder-B (M02 area) . The M01 area
controls actual machine and M02 controls simulation. These
ladders are identical so only need backup M01 area.
2) Press DIAGNOS.
3) Press VERSION. Select >RIGHT MENU> key and enter 1131
and press Input.
4 ) Press LADDER
MONITOR
5) Select NC
FILE
6) Select PLC
Run/ Stop
7) Select YES to stop the pic. Status before yes is RUN.
Question box will disappear. Note that doesn't say
PLC STOP like M640.
8) Press DELETE .
9) Press SEL. ALL Then DELETE again and select YES

/CANCEL
10) Press OK. In red, you'll see WRITE LADDER TO ROM.
11) Press left menu key twice Select EXTERNAL

FILE
399
12) Select OPEN
PROJECT
13) Highlight the file folder containing new pic. This

should be directed to new file that was copied to c:\ladder
folder is step 1. (R4)
14) Press the SELECT button.
15) Select OPEN
16) Press OK.
17) Press CLEFT MENUC till see copyright screen.
18 ) Select NC
FILE
19) Press SAVE.
20) Press SAVE again(2nd time).

If it asks if you wish to overwrite, say ALL YES.
21) Press OK.
22) Press CLEFT MENUC key.
23) Press ROM

WRITE
This will clear out the ladder from SRAM area.
24) Select YES.
25) Select YES again (2nd time) when it asks you if you
really want to execute.
If the pic is somehow running, the following will be

as ked .
A) Select YES again (3rd time) It will ask you again, PLC is
in Run state, Is a ROM write performed, after stop PLC?
400
Translation: Pic is now running, the pic will
automatically stop and do a ROM write. Is this okay?
B) Select YES (4th time) when message will say PLC is in a

STOP STATE. Is PLC changed into a RUN state?
26) Press OK.
27) Select PLC

Run/ Stop
28) Select YES if the status window says: STATUS: STOP.
If says STATUS: Start, then proceed to step 29 to update
the second ladder Ladder-B (M02)
29) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see menu ENVIRON

SETTING
30) Select CONNECT
NC
SETTING
31) Press the Down Arrow key or click on drop down menu so
that is displays M02 in box.
32) Press SET and M02 will be displayed in Orange M02
color at the lower right hand side of display.
33) At this point repeat steps 5 through 28 to load in the

pic to the Ladder-B side (M02)
34) Before exiting go back to ENVIRON. SETTING, CONNECT NC

SETTING, and press Down Arrow key to reselect M01 .
35) If the lpc file is to be updated, delete or rename the

current lpc file in the c:\M6y_ymw\M_plc or T_plc folder.
The copy the new file into that directory.
36) Power off and on and update is complete. Verify by

looking at the version screen.
401
402
1 Outline
This document describes the maintenance of the thermal displacement compensation software
(MazakTdc).
The traditional thermal displacement compensation function has performed the compensation
considering that the thermal deformation of the machine was proportional to the temperature. Using
this method, the thermal displacement could be compensated with high accuracy in the steady state.
However, just after the spindle speed was changed, it could not be compensated properly because
the time constants for the temperature change are significantly different between the thermal
displacement and the measured temperature.
The thermal displacement compensation software (MazakTdc) estimates and compensates the
thermal deformation of the machine based on the spindle speed and the temperature. It monitors the
spindle speed and compensates the thermal displacement according to the speed. Therefore, it can
compensate it properly even in the transient state.
2 Installation of the MazakTdc software

2.1 Function setting on Matrix
The software has been pre-installed in the hardware on Matrix.

To validate the software function, set the parameter as follows:
Step 1 Set the parameter 042 bit4 to 1. That will allow “MazakTdc.exe” to be started when the
power is turned on.
2.2 Individual installation

The following describes the procedure for the individual installation of the "MazakTdc” software.
Step 1 Create a new folder named "C:¥Mazaktdc.”
Step 2 Copy the “MazakTdc.exe" file from a media such as a USB memory or a floppy disk to the
created folder “C:¥Mazaktdc."
If you already have a parameters file, copy it to the same folder as the EXE file.
flWESiTB ' “ Mazaktdc f-lnlxl
?yJWQ Sim®
£ 77Tiioiir
- M 7-f X/tV9i At :
/;!; MazakTdc.exe 60KB
£3 3.5 CA •FD (A.) ! fij] Parameler.txt 4KB 747ÿ#
8 <C )
_
_) Act obat Reader
_J Cpcu
J Custom Display
JSctbus
J Ladder
Ladder3
L_J Ladder 4
:_J LADDERWTNB
;+• i I m6y_vmvv
It Cj mtyboot
: 1 Mainte
JIDSB
_J MC.Backup
_J MC'.Dir.ct
iL
_J MC. Machine
P'2jÿ ZJ
(ZSmim :;a=i
403
3 Version upgrade of the MazakTdc software
3.1 Version upgrade on MATRIX
The version upgrade of “MazakTdc.exe” will be automatically performed when upgrading the version
of the NC software.
The operations described in ”3.2 Full version upgrade of the MazakTdc software” might be
required due to a modification to “MazakTdc.exe.” In that case, that will be informed in the NC
software release notice.
3.2 Full version upgrade of the MazakTdc software

When upgrading the version of the “MazakTdc” software after its data structure is changed, the
parameters used in the previous version might possibly be applied after the version upgrade is
completed, resulting in a malfunction. Therefore, perform the following procedure to prevent the
previous parameters from being applied after the version upgrade:
Step 1 Before starting the NC version upgrade, open the “MazakTdc” window and save the
current parameters in the folder “C:¥Mazaktdc.”
• As for how to open the “MazakTdc” window, refer to “5 Opening the window.”
• As for how to save a parameters file, refer to “8 Controlling the parameters.”
• If no change was made to the parameters on a customer’s machine, it is not needed to
save the parameters because the file of the default parameters at delivery already
exists in the folder “C:¥Mazaktdc.”
Step 2 Clicking on the Sr button will open the |Coefficient2 Setting.

dialog of ''Coefficient2 Setting..," shown on
the right.
92
X
Cl | o'oOOOOE+00
I 0.000Q0E+Q0
d ...... Y
| . nnr-nn
c2 | 0.00000E+00
H
cl
c2
Z
j 9.88000E-01
| 790oioOE-03
*J
There are 12 parameters to be set, e1 to e4,

for X, Y and Z in the lower part of the dialog
cii; j o.oooooE+00 d1 | 8.823S3E-01 d1 j O.OOOOOE+00
Set all the values of these parameters to d2 j 0 OOOOOE+OO d2 3.2941 0E-02 c)2 ] O.OOOOOE+OO
“0.”
0.00 ei 0.00 el J 0.00
e2 0.00 e2 0.00 e2 0.00
e’3 0.00 e3 0.00
Then, click the “OK” button after changing e4 0.00 e4 0.00 e4 0.00
the parameters to close the dialog.
L
_
« CANCEL
Step 3 Exit the running “MazakTdc” software.

Refer to “4.2 Exiting the software.”
Step 4 Perform the NC version upgrade
Step 5 Restart the NC unit.

Confirm that the “MazakTdc” software was started. The icon will appear in the task tray.
Step 6 Stop the thermal displacement compensation.

Click the M
button to stop the compensation.
404
Step 7 Import the parameters file.
Open the window, referring to “5 Opening the window.”
Import the new parameters file, referring “8 Controlling the parameters.”
Step 8 Check the parameters.

Confirm that the parameters set to 0 in Step 2 returned to 1.
Step 9 Restart
Exit the “MazakTdc” software and restart the NC unit.
3.3 Individual version upgrade of the MazakTdc software
The following describes the procedure for the individual version upgrade of the “MazakTdc" software,
which is not involved in the version upgrade of the NC software.
Step 1 Open the "MazakTdc” window and save the current parameters as a file in the folder
“C:¥Mazaktdc.”
• As for how to open the “MazakTdc” window, refer to “5 Opening the window.”
• As for how to save the parameters file, refer to “8 Controlling Parameter.”
• If no change was made to the parameters for a customer’s machine, it is not needed to
save a parameters file because the file of the default parameters at delivery already
exists in the folder “C:¥Mazaktdc.”
Step 2 Clicking on the & button will open the Coefficient Setting;.
X
i::
v
I mz *
dialog of “Coefficient2 Setting..,” shown on C1 j OOOOOOE+OO :
C1|O.OOOOOE+OO C1'ÿ] 9.88000E 01
the right.
e2 j 0.00000E+00 c2| O.OirULE-IO c2 j 7.90C€ObTT
There are 12 parameters to be set, e1 to

e4, for X, Y and Z in the lower part of the d1 j O.OOOOOE+OO dl j 8.82353E 01 d1 j 0.00000E+00
dialog 02 j O.OOOOOE+OO 02 | 3 2941 OE-02 d2 |O.OOOOOE+OO
Set all the values of these parameters to
“0.” 0.00 81 0.00 ei o.oo
e2 0 00
e3 j 0.00
64 0.00 64 0.00 e4 0.00
Then, click the “OK” button after changing

the parameters to close the dialog. lr~:g< J CANCEL
Step 3 Exit the running "MazakTdc” software

Refer to “4.2 Exiting the software.”
Step 4 Open the folder ”C:¥Mazaktdc” through the Explorer and change the name of the
“MazakTdc.exe" file by adding the version number that is currently installed in order to
prevent the file from being overwritten. (For example, the name of the old version file was
changed to “MazakTdc62.exe” in the figure on the next page.)
405
Step 5 Copy the “MazakTdc.exe” |lj Iÿtl-7 - CÿMazakTdo HSBj
file from a media such as U7XfcP
a USB memory or a floppy 03 MazakTdc ------------
. ..
,...._
disk to the folder. 5 El ritd jtMg *>| y|g| »,|

Ml 1X03*1*8 "]
i d) Hsf A
]- 10] J2ctbus XK MazakTdc.exe 360KB 7V.

i Q Kev MazakTdc62.exe 360KB 77*!
£0-0] Ladder
53' 0D lan_card_driver_pcislot_c||i
3 d) m6y_ymw
1 Parameter txt |
Para meter05051 7# 1 .txt
3KB 74;
3KB 74;:
lil-dl m6yboot
E3‘ Lfl mainte
;
03 MazakTdc
\B 03 MC_Backup
)• i.,1 MC_Direct Mode Prograr||l
i "d) MC_Machine Programs |||
h d) MC_Machine Programs! '0
SI il
\i mcofiVift s'1- /t
x [725KB !.3tGB)
Step 6 Double click on “MazakTdc.exe.’’

Confirm that the “MazakTdc” software was started. The icon will appear in the task tray.
Step 7 Check the version of the “MazakTdc” software.

As for the check procedure, refer to “4 Basic function operations.”
Step 8 Import a parameters file.

Open the window, referring to “4 Basic function operations.”
Read a new parameters file in, referring to “8 Controlling the parameters.”
Step 9 Check the parameters.

Check that the parameter value changed to 0 in Step 2 returned to 1 .
Check the value of each parameter, referring to “7 Functions in the window.”
Step 10 Restart
Exit the “MazakTdc” software and restart the NC unit.
406
4.1
_
4 Basic function operations
Manual start of the software
Step 1 To manually start the software, double click on “MazakTdc.exe.”

— The icon will appear in the task tray.
:1 ?
”
The thermal displacement compensation will begin just after the software is started.
4.2 Exiting the software

Step 1 Move the mouse pointer over the icon in the task tray.
jMazakTdc‘|
m ,a49
Step 2 Right click on the icon.

The “Exit” menu will appear.
-*ÿ
About MasakTcb... f U
Exit 1 j ?;58
Step 3 Left click on the “Exit” menu.

-» The software will be exited.
When the software is exited, the thermal displacement compensation will stop.
4.3 How to check the software version
[l£ 19:49
Step 2 Right click on the icon.

—
>• The “About MazakTdc...” menu will appear.
About MazakTdc... |P'~! II

Exit S 20:00
Step 3 Left click on the “About MazakTdc...” menu.

—
• The dialog with the version information will appear.
1
About Ma2akTDC a
MazakTdc Version Beta 6.6 OK 3
Copyright (C) 2005 Yamazaki Mazak Corp.
407
5 Opening the window
Opening the window will allow you to set, change, save and import the parameters.
To open the window, it is required to enter the password.
5.1 Entering the password
I fMazakTdc’l
19:49
Step 2 Double click on the icon.

-* The “Password” dialog will appear.
Password
rÿr~i CANCEL
Step 3 Enter the password ”1131” and then press the “OK” button
Password [3
II
r
Oh ] CANCEL
The “Mazak Thermal Displacement Compensation” window will appear.
-Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformation Compensation HE

File Edit Compensation: Setting.. View Help
:
issiti
jjH : JJfe m ffi foj ab Cd ;§ f j I!
Ready r;
j ’
[HUM j :ÿ
408
6 Contents shown in the window
The window provides the software processing information, the measured temperatures, the spindle
speed, the spindle load and the offset amounts.
The following shows the state of the window just after the compensation begins.
Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformation Compensation -in|xi

File Edit Compensation Setting. View Help
B ab ced # fj
;Loading DataCom OK.
.NCTable is attached correctly!
3
;Data Initialize OK. Processing information
;Fin>t Temperature : 20.80
;Start thermal deformation compensation !
;ye a r/d ate/time T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 mSp mLd cmp.X cmp.Y cmp.Z
05/06/27 19:46:09; 20.85 20.75 21.98 20.52 0.00 0 4 6.000 -6.000 16.000
Iv V V. V. J
...4. .
Compensation time
Year/Month/Day
Hours:Minutes:Seconds
— "V"
Measured
temperature
ch1, 2, 3, 4 & 5
Spindle Info.
Speed & load |
r-r
Offset amount
X, Y & Z
-- 1
NUM jf||
After the compensation begins, only the compensation information is displayed in the windows as the
time passes.
The measured temperatures will be shown in the order of ch1, ch2, ch3, ch4 and ch5 immediately
after the “time” column.
-Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformation Compensation

File Edit Compensation Setting.. View Help
- ~|xj
iH| & m[mm ab %«
05/06/27 19:48:03: 20.95 j 20.75] TToil '20.47 Food 3000 4.500 -6.500 12.500
05/06/27 19:43:13; 20.95 20.70 22.07 | j 20 52 1 I 0.00 3000 7 4.500 -6.500 12.500
t.
....
05/06/27 19:48:23 ; 20.95 20.75 22.03 20.47 | I 0.00 3000 4.500 -6.500 12.500
05/06/27 19:43:33; 20.95 20.75 22.12 20.47 | | 0.00 3000 4.500 -6.500 12.500
05/06/27 19:43:43; 20.98 20.75 22.03 20.47 I I 0.00 3000 4.500 -6.500 12.500
05/06/27 19:43:53; 20.95 20.75 22.03 20.47 ] | 0.00 3000 7 4.500 -6.500 12.500
05/06/27 19:4903; 20 95 | 20.75 | 21.98 I 20.47 I I 0.00 3000 7 4.500 -6.500 12.500
7'
Ready [ JNUM §§
ch1 ch2 ch3 ch4 ch5
409
7 Functions in the window
7.1 Functions
Menu Bar Title Icon The description of the function
File Save Overwrite save the text in the window to the specified file in
the Text format.
Save As.. Save the text in the window as a new file in the Text format.
Import Parameter Import the parameters file (extension: *.txt). However, it
cannot be imported while performing the thermal
displacement compensation. If you try to import the file
during the compensation, the alarm “Please Stop
Compensating!" will appear. _
Export Parameter Export and save the parameters to a file (extension: *.txt)
Exit Exit the software.
Edit Undo Undo the previous editing operation.
Cut
& Cut the selected text in the window.
Copy Copy the selected text in the window.
fli
Paste Paste the copied or cut text to the window.
Select All Select all the texts in the window.
Compensation Start Start the thermal displacement compensation.
ffi
Stop Stop the thermal displacement compensation.
Setting.. Inter Face Open the Inter Face parameters setting dialog.
Coefficient! ab Open the Coefficient! parameters setting dialog.
Coefficient2 Open the Coefficient2 parameters setting dialog.
View Toolbar Show or hide the tool bar.
Status Bar Show or hide the status bar.
Hide Window Hide the “Mazak Thermal Displacement Compensation”
window. (To show the window again, double click the icon in
the task tray.) _
Help About Mazak Tdc.. Show the version dialog.
f
7.2 Setting the interface parameters.

Clicking the button on the tool bar will open the “Inter Face Setting” dialog. The following table
provides the description of each parameter.
|Inter Face Setting.. a

j— NC Type -
| C M640T,MT,TE,MT-5X,T Nexus Interval (sec)
; C M64DM, M-5X, M Nexus
Follow up (hour) 0
j C M640M Pro
j r M640MT Pro Time Constant
i f? MATRIX
Temp filter 10
Rregister IJF Load filter 20

Compensation Temperature )001 mm
Round Unit
RX 2501 |2234
RT1
RY (2500 RT2|2230
i
RZ 2226 RT3 ] 2232
r Restore Log File
Rsts j 0
RT4 fo
RT5 0 [ iLlgilJl CANCEL
Unit jo.uOOQI mm |
410
Parameter Default Set Range I/O Object* Description
NO Type Select O Select the type of the NC unit for the machine.
N/A If no NC type is selected (which is the default
state), the compensation will not begin._
Interval (sec) 10 0 to 3599 O The interval that the thermal displacement
compensation is performed. If the set value is
0, the compensation will be automatically
performed at the interval of 10 seconds, which
is default.
Follow up (hour) 3 Oto 24 O Follow-up time. If the set value is 0, the
follow-up will not be performed._
Time Constant 0 Oto 30 O Width of the dead zone
Temp filter 0 Oto 30 O Number of the moving average filters to be
_
input for the temperature data
Load filter 0 0 to 30 O Number of the moving average filters to be
_
input for the load data
Round Unit 0.0005mm O Rounding unit. Basically apply the same unit as
that of the NC interpolation. _
RX 0 0 to 20000 O R Register No. which the X-axis thermal
displacement offset amount is written to. If the
set value is 0, the offset amount will not be
written.
RY 0 0 to 20000 O R Register No. which the Y-axis thermal
written.
RZ 0 0 to 20000 O R Register No. which the Z-axis thermal
written.
Rsts Read the state of the machine in.
RT1 0 0 to 20000 O R Register No. from which the NC value of the
temperature sensor 1 is read in. If the set value
is 0, the NC value of the temperature sensor
will not be read in. (The value will be 0.)_
temperature sensor 2 is read in If the set value
RT5 0 0 to 20000 O Number of R register from which the NC value
of the temperature sensor 5 is read in. If the
set value is 0, the NC value of the temperature
sensor will not be read in. (The value will be 0.)
Unit 0.0001 mm O Unit of offset amount
Restore Log File Check X Checking this check box will automatically save
N/A the thermal displacement compensation history
to the “C:¥MazakTdcLog.txt” file. This function
is valid at debugging. However, if debugging
with this parameter checked, the file size will
gradually increase, running out free space on
the hard drive. Therefore, this parameter is not
checked every time when starting the software
as default.
NOTE: The mark “O” indicates a parameter that is subject to and the mark “x" indicates a parameter that is
not subject to the Import Parameter or the Export Parameter function.
411
7.3 Setting the parameters (coefficients a & b).
Clicking the button on the tool bar will open the following “Coefficientl setting..” dialog. The
description of each parameter is provided in the table below.
_
Coefficientl Sett ing..
9 b —
ill
X Y z X Y z
a1 -1 .23 a1 -5 98 |
a1 -7.33 : M(19.9S552E-01 j O.OOOOOE+OO
b1 b1 j 9 96222E 01
a2 j 2 24 o2 179 a2 9 76 b2| -1 09026E-05 b2| UOOOOOE+OO 1
b2 -8.54373E-06
a3 -3.92j a3| 6 91 a3[~278 b3 mSSFEg'"' b3| 0 OOOOOE+00 b3 jTo6663E-10
j 04 3.05 1 o4|-1 .56 a4 I 1.73 i t*r 9 2UnB(ir-14 b4| 0 ODOOOE+OO b4 j -4 07307E-1 3
a5| 0 00 as j o no as j 0.00 j b5 }* 1 12160E 07 b5 I 0 00000E+00 I
b5 -1 68425E-06
j
a6|-291 j
a6 -23 .16 j
a6 -27.70 I
b6 -7 79079E-04 b6| 0 OODOOE+OO b6 j -1 892S2E-03
' . j
|
b7 -2 58678E-04 |
b7 0 00C0CIE+00 b7 j 5.91 733E-03
j bsl 0 OODOOE+OO b8| O.OOOOoifoO b8 j 0 OOCOOE+OO

Wm | 1
b9 0.000C0E+00
V I b10 j -2 S000UE+01
b9 j O.OOOOOE+OO b9 j 0 00C00E+G0
b10j 0.00000E+00 b10 j -5.00000E+01
-
BBSs ay
IkS3 CANCEL j
Parameter Default Set Range I/O Description

Object*
a1 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38
Coefficient of the temperature term for the structure
O
thermal displacement compensation _
a2 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Coefficient of the temperature term for the structure
thermal displacement compensation
thermal displacement compensation _
a6 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Constant of the structure thermal displacement
compensation
b1 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Coefficient of the displacement term for the spindle
response surface
b2 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Coefficient of the speed term for the spindle response
surface
b3 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Coefficient of the speed squared term for the spindle
response surface _
b4 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e3r O Coefficient of the speed cubic term for the spindle
response surface
b5 0 -3.0e38 to +3.06ÿ O Coefficient of the (speed x displacement) term for the
spindle response surface
b6 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Speed ON/OFF for the spindle response surface
b7 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Speed UP/DOWN for the spindle response surface
b8 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e35' O Squared nominal load coefficient for the spindle
response surface
b9 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Not used
b10 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Determine the limit (the range of the offset
displacement). The offset amount by the spindle
response surface is limited to the range of b10 to 0 if
b10 < 0; and 0 to b10 if b10 > 0. (If b10 = 0, no limit.)
NOTE: The mark “O” indicates a parameter that is subject to and the mark “ x ’’ indicates a parameter that is
not subject to the Import Parameter or the Export Parameter function.
412
7.4 Setting the parameters (coefficients c, d & e).
Clicking the button on the tool bar will open the following “Coefficientl setting..” dialog. The
description of each parameter is provided in the table below.
11 *J
X Y 2
c1 | 0.00000E+00
df 0 00000E+00 d r 9 88000E-01
C2 f n OOOOOE+OO c2 j O.OOOOOE+00 c2 7.90000E-03

m
d1 | 0.00000E+00 ] 852353F-01
eft di O.OOOOOE+OO
d2 faoooooF+00 d2[ 3.2941 0E-02 d2 f 0 OOOOOE+OO
e1 1.00 e1
1 1.00 1 00
e2 1 00 82 1 0.00 e2 I 1 00
e3 e3 ( 0 00 e3 100
j—
e4 0 oc e4T 1 00 e4 0 00
iniMzm CANCEL l
Parameter Default Set Range I/O Object* Description

c1 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 O Displacement compensation coefficient 1 in
natural cooling at the spindle stop._
c2 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 O Displacement compensation coefficient 2 in
_
natural cooling at the spindle stop.
d1 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 O Distortion compensation coefficient 1 in natural
cooling at the spindle stop. _
d2 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 O Distortion compensation coefficient 2 in natural
cooling at the spindle stop. _
e1 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 O Structure thermal displacement compensation is
valid
e2 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 O Spindle thermal displacement compensation with
the spindle response surface is valid _
e3 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 O Displacement compensation in natural cooling at
the spindle stop is valid _
e4 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 O Distortion compensation in natural cooling at the
spindle stop is valid _
413
8 Controlling the parameters
8.1 Saving the parameters to a file
Save the current setting to a parameters file (*.txt).
Step 1 Click “File” and then “Export Parameter.”

The following dialog will appear. Coirc-n. jturv g
Save
Save
Import Parameter
Export Parameter
&it
Step 2 Set the file name and click the “Save” button.
Save In: |.jj t,ta».w«io

Parartveter.txt
Filename: IBBHH- Save ]

Save astute fiTI FilesOMxO
1 Cancel ]
8.2 Importing the parameters from the file
Import the parameters file (*.txt). It is required to save the parameters file in the “Mazaktdc” folder.
(However, the parameters cannot be imported during the thermal displacement compensation.)
Step 1 Click “File” and then “Import Parameter.”

The following dialog will appear. Edit .Compensation
Save . CtrKS
Save As.
:
Export Parameter
Exit;
Step 2 Select the parameters file to be used from the “Mazaktdc” folder and then click the “Open”
button.
Save;|n: j Mazaktdc H aJdjl=Tj

ll) Farameter.txt
Filename: .. Save ]
Save as type: jT*:< t Files (ÿ txO Cancel
414
Step 3 Exit the “Mazaktdc” software once and restart it.
(As for how to exit or start the software, refer to “3 Basic function operations.”)
By performing the above steps, the parameter will be saved in the registry.
8.3 Name of the parameters file
Define and identify the name of the parameters file as follows:
Machine standard parameter
tdcOOOAAAAA.txt
tdc Identifies that it is the thermal displacement parameters file.

OOO Machine code
A A A A A : Identifies the added number, the machine specification or the parameter version.
Determine the string and the digit number for every machine
EX) tdc 372A0000.txt (in case of INT100)

tdc OOODHBAA.txt
O: Machine code
Version identification
A: Special-ordered
A: Revision to the special-ordered one
9 Work involved in the hard-disk replacement

When replacing the hard disk, perform the following procedure to the "MazakTdc” software.
Item necessary to be prepared: Media such as a USB memory
Step 1 Save (export) the parameters.

Save the parameters in the "Mazaktdc” folder, referring to “8. Controlling the parameters."
Note: If no change was made to the parameters on a customer’s machine, it is not needed
to save the parameters because the file of the default parameters at delivery already
exists in the folder "C:¥Mazaktdc.”
Step 2 Save the “*.txt" files under the “C:¥Mazaktdc” folder to the media.
Step 3 Replace the hard disk.
Step 4 Turn on the power and copy the "*.txt” file in the media to the “C:¥Mazaktdc” folder.
Step 5 Import the parameters, referring to “4 Basic function operations,” “5 Opening the window"
and “8 Controlling the parameters.”
Step 6 Turn off and then turn on the power to check that the "MazakTdc” software is started up.
415
10 Recovering the wire breaking on a thermistor
The alarm “THERMAL DISPLACEMENT OFFSET ERROR” will arise when the wire breaking occurs
on a thermistor.
The CH temperature value will change for a thermistor with the wire breaking and the offset amount
will considerably change in the “Mazaktdc” window, as shown in the figure below.
-Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformation Compensation

File Edit Compensation Setting.. View Help
- a)x|
H v 3V ffi ab %<l : ®c! X Z
goo 12.50l>
05/06/27 19:48:03;
05/06/27 19:48:13;
20.95
20.95
20.75
20.70
21.98
22.07 20.521
0.00
0.00
3000
3000
7
7 4.500
6.500
6.500 12.500
ill 1
05/06/27 19:48:23; 20.95 20.75 22.03 20.47 0.00 3000 7 4.500 6.500 12.500 Normal state
05/06/27 19:48:33; 20.95 20.75 22.12 20.47 0.00 3000 7 4.500 6.500 12.500
05/06/27 19:43:43;
05/08/27 19:43:53;
20.98
20.95
20.75
20.75
22.03
22.03
20.47
20.47 /
0.00
0.00
3000
3000
7
7
4.500
4.500
6.500
6.500
12.500
12.500 J
05/06/27 19.49:03;
1
20 95 20 75 21.93 £0.4/ 0.00 3000 7 joo 6.500 12.500,
Jll:
Ready rÿm r™ 4
Considerably
-Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformatio|i Cotwarn change in|x|
File Edit Compensation Setting. View Help
H ' *> BV ffi tefr ab Cfl ) ffjfe
r
05/08/27 19:58:03; 20.95
05/06/27 19:53:13; 20.95
20.75
20.70
21.98
22.07
£44.1a
-44.16\
0.00
0.00
3000
3000
7
7
#7?) .500
76.500
-49.500
-53.500
-36.500*
-41.000
.3 State at the
05/08/27 19:58:23; 20.95 20.75 22.03 -44.16 1 0.00 3000 7 82.500 -57.500 -45.500 wire breaking
05/06/27 19:58:33; 20.95 20.75 22.12 -44.16 j 0.00 3000 7 88.500 -61.500 -50.000
| 05/06/27 19:58:43; 20.98 20.75 22.03 -44.16 I 0.00 3000 7 98.500 -65.500 -54.500
-J
05/06/27 19:58:53; 20.95 20.75 22.03 -44.16 1 0.00 3000 7 100.000 -69.500 -59.000
05/06/27 19:59:03; 20.95 20.75 21.98 \-44.1i 0.00 3000 7 'WO .000 -73.500 -63.500
d
Ready il ! [RUM f
i
-Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformatioij Compent
-
,IOjxj
File Edit Compensate Setting.. View Recovered V
a m ui ffi .b w @ ? I i
05/06/27 20:03:03; 20.95 20.75 21.98 -44 16 0.00 ~j Will not recover "Il -80.500 3 State that the
wire breaking
05/06/27 20:03:13; 20 .95
05/O6/27 20:03:23; 20.95
05/06/27 20:03:33; 20.95
20.70
20.75
20.75
22.07
22.03
22.12
-44 16 0.00
0.00
0.00
i
i
3000
soon after action
7 -1Q|
a •8#0 .500 •85 000
•89.500
«yÿv000 was recovered
05/06/27 20:03:43; 20.98 20.75 22.03 20.47\ 0.00 3000 7 'SfoO.OOO -81.500 -89.5(315%
05/06/27 20:03:53; 20 95 20.75 22.03 20.47 ! 0.00 3000 7 -100.000 -77 500 -85.000
05/06/27 20:03:03; 20.95 20.75 21.98 20.47/ 0.00 3000 7 -100.000 -73.500 -S0[5G0ÿ
d
Ready ;NUM l A
After finding the wire breaking on a thermistor, recover it according to the procedure below.
Step 1 Open the "MazakTdc” window and check the temperature values and the offset amounts
of the thermistor channels (CH 1 to 5) for wire breaking.
Step 2 Press the “Emergency” button on the machine.
Step 3 Recover the wire breaking of a thermistor.
Step 4 Confirm that the temperature value of a channel with the wire breaking was recovered on
the “MazakTdc” window.
(It will take a longer time for the offset amount to return to the normal state due to the
filders.)
Step 5 Restart the “MazakTdc” software. (As for how to exit and start the “MazakTdc” software
refer to “4 Basic function operations.”
Step 6 Confirm that the temperature value and the offset amount were recovered.
416
11 Handling procedure after turning the production machine ON
It is required to import the parameters after turning the production machine ON. The following
provides the procedure.
Step 1 Copy the specified parameters file “*.txt” to the “C:¥Mazaktdc” folder.
[ W.tj'grl Mazaktdc -!n|x|
PS.-OTP :. SrSW : MW*
S rx)frr
M S)
71 3>t>S X*!j| I iÿNi MasakTde.exe 60KB TfWÿWj
B-® <Ci
i B
35<>f FD (A;)
d AcrobatReader
! jgj Parameter trt
J4KB 747K£#
Cl C">~
(_J Custom Display
: J2ctbus
O Ladder
gj Ladders
Cj Ladder4
£j LADDERWTNB
; ©DmSv.ymw
SI m6yboot
g) Mamte
dEHHSS
& d MC.Backee
-
Cj MC.Direct Mode P n[
4 I
1 MC_Machme
Pfogrÿl JLL J di
2 10©*?%'*.:
Step 2 Start “MazakTdc.exe” manually. Refer to “4 Basic function operations.”
Step 3 Open the window. Refer to “5 Opening the window.”
Step 4 Import the parameters. Refer to “8 Controlling the parameters.”
Step 5 Click the button to close the window.
Step 6 Exit “MazakTdc.exe.” Refer to “4.2 Exiting the software.”
Step 7 Set the parameter for the software functions on Matrix so that the “MazakTdc” software
can be started from Matrix. Refer to “2.1 Function setting on Matrix.”
417
418

Mazak Mazatrol Matrix Control Classroom Maintneance Manual C740MT0201E PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Mazak Mazatrol Matrix Control Classroom Maintneance Manual C740MT0201E PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

MAZATROL

•ÿ-ÿ•ÿ:= •ÿ••ÿÿ » . ‘-vV> V- -.1

3, Acrylic key top j - .1 i 1 -VI I - •

Interface Connected to Standard

Decrease printed circuit boards of NO unit

2) Both of Mazatrol and EIA/ISO programs can perform a simulation.

4) A simulation can be run in the background.

Work simulation Machine simulation

NHM MW MMP WWBB I

Actual Machine 3D Models

[Intelligent Thermal Slueld]

1st and 2nd process simultaneous cutting

1) A history of 10,000 alarms can be saved. (48 alarms in case ofM640)

I 2*« me MH SU«*i «1#*0* KW-* .

1) The running management data for 12 months can be displayed.

Use status of spindles (speed and load) ! Alarm information

HMtf-J X Sfrft <ÿ<) ».»» !ÿ : AW* {.-V

K':i Sti • *«•ME *'I- «* •H fcS I* «•» 36:

3. DIAGNOSIS MONITOR Display

4. FLC SIGNAL Display

The addresses of a device corresponding to each "TITLE" are displayed.

5. HARDWARE MONITOR Display

The ladder version for the virtual machining is displayed.

7. SERVO MONITOR & SPINDLE MONITOR Displays

8. Start of Application Software from Mazatrol Menu

A file can be saved in either of the TNG" and “BMP" formats.

and CardBus slot

Back Side of Matrix

Hidden Compact Flash -Drive D-Used to backup

IBBHHH JH 5*« -dm

" w*» $ÿ' JM* 4 Fl

M1-C73-M128 or M1-P12-M256: Main PC PCB HN260 card

PC RAM DIMM: 256 MB

HN01 1 : PC to NC extender bus

Pfgl ftpe ;*S-.

• Capacitor backed up for 30 Hi mmmm !

HN482: NC main memory PCB, SRAM and FLROM

This contains Main-A, Control Serial Number,

• Similar to HR25 1 on the M640

HN271/NH272: LCD interface PCB

IIMI fcy >'••ÿ-ÿ.

FCA750PY-N01 [.v •'•'ÿÿu--’.’.-:-

CXA0385: backlight power supply for 15” LCD

NC cooling fan: Notice the third wire for overheat detection

i* xtfvA.r&f 'i * 'SJ

PD27 Power Supply

Connector layout drawing

FAN 1 FAN2 CardBus ON/ OFF CONNECTION DESCRIPTION

S3i in zL Fan 1 & 2 Fan connections

O f£TT3T BAT CardBus PCMCIA I/F x 2

. LCD Internal LCD I/F

FRONT OUT Front slot l/F

DCiN CFO I CF24 EMG FDD HDD OF25

Connector layout drawing

CGI 2 CF10 OPT2 CF50 CF55 0PT1

CF 10 Base I/O main I/F

OPTI & 2 Optical servo I/F

CF50 2'"1 servo I/O I/F

CF55 Additional I/O, servo I/F

© E .12 Soft menu key I/F

m 0 DCIN +24 V from PD27

* CFOI Power off detection

0:::v- N o .13 & 4 Sub op I/O J3“IN, J4+OIJT

I 2« me MH SU«i «1#0 KW-* .

K':i Sti • «•ME 'I- «* •H fcS I* «•» 36:

" w» $ÿ' JM 4 Fl